Autocad Plant 3d

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010

User’s Guide

February 2009

© 2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not bereproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. The data from DIN Standards are used by permission of DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. They conform with the current version of theDIN Standards concerned (December 1, 2007, Autodesk)The JIS symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under permission from JIS.ISA Symbols © ISA© Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at AustinISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)ISO 14617-6:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)ISO 3511-1:1977 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)ISO 3511-2:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)ISO 3511-3:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)DIN 2481:1979-06 Symbols © Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (DIN)JIS Z 8204:1983 Symbols © Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCADLearning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, AutodeskInsight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner,Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next>(design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio,Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF,Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax,Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, InventorLT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox,MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall,Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ,Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo),SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, VisualLandscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries:Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA(design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. DisclaimerTHIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMSALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY ORFITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Published by:Autodesk, Inc.111 Mclnnis ParkwaySan Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1P&ID Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

P I P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4I S A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4I S O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5JIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Overview: Create and Configure the Working Environment . . . . . . . 7Set Up a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Configure General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Set or Change Project Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Configure Drawing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Configure Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Configure AutoCAD P&ID DWG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Configure End Connections and Line Behavior . . . . . . . . . . 33Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . 40Set P&ID Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) . . . . 53Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines . . . . . . . . 57

Set Up Symbol and Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

iii

Set Up Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Set Up Tag Formatting (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Set Up Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Set Up Off-Page Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Configure Plant 3D DWG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . 140Set Plant 3D Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant

3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Set Up File Names and File Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Configure the Display of Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Configure the Display of Isometric Sloped Lines . . . . . . 160Set Up Isometric Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Configure the Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments . . . . . . . 171Configure Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . 182Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Set Up Properties (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Set Up Tag Formatting (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Set Up Annotations for Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . 231

Point Users to the Project Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Overview: Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Set Up the Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Include Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Organize Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Set Drawing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Overview: The Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Work with Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Open a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Get Ready to Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Add Project Data to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Add Status Notes About a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Save Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Manage Work History Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Manage Project Files Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Share Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Audit and Compress Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

iv | Contents

Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Work with the AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . 273Switch Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285AutoCAD Plant 3D Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286AutoCAD Plant 3D Substitution Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287AutoCAD Plant 3D Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . 290Understand the Work History Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Control the Display of the Drawing Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Understand P&ID Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Create a Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Add Components to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID

Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other

Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 314Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its

Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Create and Use Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Connect Schematic Lines to Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking

Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines . . . . . . . . . 329Edit Schematic Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Tag Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Annotate Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or

Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Contents | v

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . 349Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Understand the P&ID Line List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Edit Size Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Validate the 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Correct Validation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Create Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . 369Create User-Fabricated Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment . . . . . 383

Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Position and Manipulate Equipment in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Reorient Equipment in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Copy Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Attach Graphics to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Detach Graphics from Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Understand Structural Modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . . . . . . 393Set the Structural Model Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Work With Structural Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Work with Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Specify Member Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Create a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Edit a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Change the Length of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Cut a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Miter Two Structural Members Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Trim or Extend a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Edge Cut a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Restore a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Work with Structural Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Work with Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Work with Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417Work with Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

vi | Contents

Explode Structural Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Work with Footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Work with Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Export Structural Objects to SDNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431Select a Pipe Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Set Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433Create Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437Route Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Route pipe at a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Create a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Lock Pipe Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Select Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Place Pipe Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466Place Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Create Custom and Placeholder Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Assign Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478Insulate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480Copy Plant 3D objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485Add Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485Modify Pipe Support Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Edit Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490Create Custom Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Work with Sloped Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Chapter 12 Control the Plant 3D Model Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495Control the Visual Style of the Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Work with the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the Data

Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Control the Display of the Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Filter Information in the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512Sort Records in the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Contents | vii

Control the Display of Columns in the Data Table . . . . . 517View Read-Only Data and Property Acquisition Data . . . . . . . 520Print Data from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Export and Import Data in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522Export Data from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) . . . . . . . . . . . 527Modify Exported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528Import Data to the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

Generate Reports in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534View Data in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536Export Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537Import Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545View Report Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547Print Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551Understand Isometric Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551Create Isogen Messages and Information Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Create an Isogen Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552Create an Isogen Information Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555Generate a Production Isometric Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556Review Isometric Results Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558Export a Piping Component File (PCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561Overview: Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561Create an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562Link or Copy Orthographic Drawings to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . 568Annotate an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575Overview: Migrate Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575Verify Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576Migrate Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576Migrate Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582Resolve Migration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Overview: Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Validate Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Correct Validation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

viii | Contents

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Contents | ix

x

Introduction to AutoCADPlant 3D

AutoCAD® Plant 3D supports a wide range of process plant and piping design tasks. You cancreate both P&ID drawings and 3D models for piping, equipment, and structure. Orthographicdrawings can be produced from your model.

You work exclusively in a project environment, so that your drafting is consistent with othersworking in the same project.

You can also create reports for a single drawing or an entire project.

If you are an administrator, you can configure a custom drafting environment that is exactlyright for your organization and your designers.

About AutoCAD Plant 3D HelpThe AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 Help system is organized to make informationeasy to locate when you need it. Help is available when you press the F1 key orclick the Help button in a dialog box.

Once the Help system is displayed, you can locate the topics you need in severalways. Use the method or combination of methods that gets you the informationto help you accomplish tasks in the program. Following are a variety of waysfor making best use of the Help system.

Find Information Using the Landing Page

When you open the Help system, the landing page on the right side displaysinformation that is organized by task. Simply click a link and go directly to aHelp topic for the task.

1

1

Find Information Using the Contents Tab

You can also use the Contents tab to find information that is structured inlogical groupings — just like the Table of Contents in a printed book. TheContents tab contains the following sections:

■ AutoCAD P&ID Best Practices. Provides workflow diagrams that illustrateP&ID processes and links to help you with the specific tasks involved.

■ Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575. Migrates projects and drawingscreated in earlier versions of the product to ensure data integrity with thecurrent product release.

■ Create and Configure a Project on page 7. Provides conceptual andtask-based help for administrators who want to create a custom projectconfiguration for their designers.

■ Organize Project Drawings on page 239. Provides conceptual and task-basedhelp for CAD managers or lead drafters who need to set up projects.

■ Work in a Project Environment on page 253. Provides conceptual andtask-based help for designers who may be new to working in an organizedproject environment.

■ Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273. Provides conceptualhelp for designers to familiarize them with the drawing environment andintroduce new interface elements to make designing easier and moreefficient.

■ Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing on page 297. Provides conceptual andtask-based help for designers who primarily use symbols and schematiclines to create their P&ID drawings.

■ Validate P&ID Drawings on page 591. Provides conceptual and task-basedhelp for drafters and designers who work with drawings and want tomanage and maintain the validity of their drawings while they work.

■ Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D on page 349.Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who want to placeP&ID objects into Plant 3D models.

■ Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model on page 367. Provides conceptual andtask-based help for designers who create 3D models of piping symbols.

■ Manage Data and Generate Reports on page 499. Provides conceptual andtask-based help for designers about managing data and producing reportsfor an entire project or for individual project drawings.

2 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

■ Generate Orthographic Drawings on page 561. Provides conceptual andtask-based help for designers who want to produce orthographic drawingsfrom Plant 3D models.

■ Glossary on page 605. Provides a list of AutoCAD Plant 3D terms and theirdefinitions.

■ Command and Interface Reference. Provides help on commands and systemvariables for those who like to use the command line; also provides detaileddescriptions about the dialog boxes, windows, tool palettes, and workspacesthat make up the AutoCAD Plant 3D environment.

Find Information Using the Search Tab

Another way of accessing information is by using the Search tab. This optionzeros in on the exact subject you are trying to find information about.

Find Information Using InfoCenter

On the menu bar, InfoCenter allows you to search for information throughkey words (or by typing a question), display the Communication Center panelfor product updates and announcements, or display the Favorites panel toaccess saved topics.

When you enter key words or type a question for help and then press ENTERor click the Search button, you search multiple Help resources in addition toany files that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box. Theresults are displayed as links on a panel. You can click any of these links todisplay the Help topic, article, or document.

NOTE It is recommended that you use key words to search for information, askey words often produce better results.

For more information about InfoCenter, see Find Information UsingInfoCenterFind Information Using InfoCenter in the AutoCAD Help system.

Provide Feedback About Help

We strive to make our Help system an easy and efficient way for you to findthe information you need to do your P&ID tasks. We work to improve ourHelp system by reviewing and considering all comments that we receive fromusers.

If you have questions about any topic in the Help system or have ideas aboutimproving a topic, you can provide us with feedback from within the Help

About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help | 3

system. Simply click “Please send us your comment about this page” at thebottom of every help topic, and complete the feedback form.

While we cannot respond to all comments we receive, we do seriously consideryour comments and improve our Help system based on your feedback.

P&ID SymbolsThe symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from PIP(Process Industry Practices), ISA, ISO (International Organization forStandardization), and DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.).

PIPThe PIP symbols in this Autodesk product are used with permission grantedby license agreement from Process Industry Practices (PIP).

Process Industry Practices (PIP)

3925 West Braker Lane (R4500)

Austin, TX 78759, USA

Phone: (512) 232-3042

www.pip.org

ISAThe ISA symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from ISA.

ISA

67 Alexander Drive

PO Box 12277

Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, USA

Phone: (919) 549-8411

Fax: (919) 549-8288

Email: [email protected]

www.isa.org


http://www.pip.org/

[email protected]

http://www.isa.org/

ISOThe ISO symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from TheInternational Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO standards can bepurchased from American National Standards Institute (ANSI/ISO)

ISO

25 West 43rd Street

New York, NY 10036

Tel: (212) 642-4900

http://webstore.ansi.org/default.aspx

ISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization(ISO)

ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization forStandardization (ISO)

ISO 14617-6:2002 Symbols © The International Organization forStandardization (ISO)

ISO 3511-1:1977 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization(ISO)



ISO 3511-4: 1985 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization(ISO)

DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.)The data from DIN Standards are used by permission of DIN Deutsches Institutfür Normung e. V. They conform with the current version of the DIN Standardsconcerned.

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.,

Burggrafenstraße 6,

10787 Berlin,

ISO | 5

http://webstore.ansi.org/default.aspx

Germany

DIN 2481:1979-06 Symbols © Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (DIN)

JISThe JIS symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under permission fromJIS.


Create and Configure aProject

You use the Project Setup wizard to create a project, then configure the project setup optionsto meet your working environment requirements or your client needs.

Overview: Create and Configure the WorkingEnvironment

The working environment is set up for ease in creating and managing drawings,models, and other related files.

When you start AutoCAD Plant 3D for the first time, a default project is set asthe current project. You can either modify this project or create a new one,depending on your requirements.

Both the default project and any new projects that you create include standardsetting for paths, drawings, Data Manager configuration, and so on. Thesedefault settings are often appropriate for most tasks throughout a project cycle.However, you can configure these settings to make them specific to the needsof your organization or your client. You can configure your drawing environmentin the Project Setup dialog box.

NOTE It is strongly recommended that you avoid changing the project setup whileothers are using the project. Any changes you make will be visible only after usersclose and open the project again.

Set Up a New ProjectYou can create a project and then change the project settings.

2

7

You can specify basic settings as you create a project with the Project Setupwizard.

You need the following information to complete all pages of the wizard:

Information requiredPage

Page 1 of 5 Specify general settings ■ The project name

■ The project description (optional)

■ The directory where you want to storethe program-generated files

NOTE The program creates default direct-ories based on the project name.

■ The directory where you want to storerelated files, files such as basic Auto-CAD files, spreadsheets, and word-processing documents.

■ The location of an existing project XMLfile that you want to use as a template(optional).

NOTE If you choose this option, your newproject inherits the folder structure of theexisting project. If Project A contains afolder named Ortho Files, Project B, whichis based on Project A, also has a foldernamed Ortho Files.

The base unit for project drawing: eitherImperial or Metric.

NOTE If you choose Metric, you canchoose to have nominal diameters shownin either inches or millimeters.

Page 2 of 5 Specify unit settings

Page 3 of 5 Specify P&ID settings ■ The directory where you want to storeP&ID drawings (required even forprojects without P&ID drawings)

■ The standard (for example: PIP, ISA,ISO, DIN, JIS/ISO) for P&ID tool palettecontent (required even for projects

8 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Information requiredPage

without P&ID drawings). The stand-ards shown depend upon whether youchose Metric or Imperial on the previ-ous page.

Path information for the following:Page 4 of 5 Specify Plant 3D directory set-tings ■ 3D model files

■ Spec sheets

■ Orthographic drawings

Whether you want to edit additional pro-ject settings.

Page 5 of 5 Finish

To set up a new project

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤

New Project.

2 Complete the Project Setup wizard.

3 If you want to change the default project settings, select the check boxlabeled Edit Project Properties After Creating Project.

4 Click Finish.

You now have a new working project.

You can change the default project setup options using the Project Setupdialog box. Use the tree nodes on the left pane of the Project Setup dialog boxto locate the options you want to change. Modify the information displayedon the right pane. For more information, see Configure General Settings onpage 10.

NOTE It is strongly recommended that you set security measures to prevent usersfrom accessing or changing certain project folders or files. Using Microsoft securitysettings, you can lock the project files that you do not want users to modify. Formore information about Windows security settings, see Windows Help.

Set Up a New Project | 9

To open a project


Open Project.

2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location of the project, and clickthe project.xml file.

3 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

NEWPROJECT

OPENPROJECT

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Project Setup Dialog Box

Configure General SettingsYou can configure general settings, including project details, drawingproperties, and reports.

NOTE Your administrator can lock project files to prevent changes toproject-specific settings and options.

Set or Change Project DetailsYou can change details of the default project settings.


You can perform any of the following tasks:

■ Specify or create additional project properties.

■ Configure work history prompts.

■ Specify path and file location for project reports.

■ Specify path and file location for related files.

■ Associate a tool palette group with the project. This setting specifies thetool palette group that displays by default for all designers when the projectis opened. You can set two separate tool palette group associations: onefor opening the project in AutoCAD P&ID, and another for opening theproject in AutoCAD Plant 3D.

■ Change the Data Manager interactive zoom factor.

To add a new property to the existing set of project details


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click ProjectDetails.

Set or Change Project Details | 11

3 On the Project Details pane, under General Properties, do any of thefollowing:

■ In the Project Description box, add or change the project description.

■ In the Project Number box, add a project number.

NOTE The Project Name was set when the project was created. You cannotedit this name.

4 Under Custom Properties, in the Custom Categories list, click ProjectData.

5 Click Add Row.


6 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a name (for example: Lead designer) anda value (for example: Rich Robins) for the new property.

7 Click OK.

8 Click OK.

To add a new category of project details


Project Setup.


3 On the Project Details pane, under General Properties, do any of thefollowing:

■ In the Project Description box, add or change the project description.

■ In the Project Number box, add a project number.

NOTE The Project Name is set when the project is created. You cannot editthis name here.

4 Under Custom Properties, click Add.

5 In the Add Category dialog box, enter a name for the new category (forexample: Other Information). Click OK.


6 Under Properties Of Selected Category, click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a name (for example: Project Manager)and a value (for example: A. Taylor) for the new property. Click OK.

8 Continue adding properties as necessary (for example: PM Phone,415-555-1212 and Process Lead, D. Quinn).

9 To add additional categories, click Add and repeat the steps for adding acategory and its properties.

10 Click OK.

To configure work history prompts


Project Setup.



3 On the Project Details pane, under Work History Prompts, click one ofthe following options to specify when designers must enter work historyinformation about their drawings:

■ Opening Project Drawings

■ Closing Project Drawings

■ Never

To configure general paths and file locations


Project Setup.


3 Under General Paths and File Locations, do the following:

■ In the User-defined Reports Directory box, enter the file path for thereports directory. Or click the [...] button, and in the Select ReportsDirectory dialog box, browse to the location where you want to placethe reports directory.

■ In the Related Files Directory box, enter the file path for the relatedfiles directory. Or click the [...] button, and in the Select Related FilesDirectory dialog box, browse to the location where you want to placethe related files directory.

4 Click OK.

To configure tool palette group association


Project Setup.



3 Under Tool Palette Group Association, in the drop-down lists, click toolpalette groups to display when a project is opened.

4 Click OK.

NOTE If the name of a tool palette group is displayed in red, the tool palettegroup exists but is not available on your system. You can make the group availableby importing it. See Save and Share Tool Palettes in AutoCAD Help. For informationon how to customize and share tool palette groups, see Customize Tool Palettesand Save and Share Tool Palettes in AutoCAD Help.

To configure the Data Manager interactive zoom factor


Project Setup.


3 Under Interactive zoom, in the box labeled Data Manager InteractiveZoom Factor, enter a number between 0.0 and 1.0 to set the zoom factorwhen designers zoom to a component from the Data Manager.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Project Details (General Settings Tree Node)

Configure Drawing PropertiesYou can configure drawing properties so that each drawing added to the projecthas the same properties available.

You can change the property value for individual P&ID or modeling drawings.

To add a new category of drawing properties


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click DrawingProperties.

Configure Drawing Properties | 17

3 On the Drawing Properties pane, under Custom, click Add.

4 In the Add Category dialog box, enter a name for the new category (forexample: Additional Information). Click OK.

5 Click Add Row.


6 In the Add Row dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Name, enter a name for the property (for example: ProjectName).

■ Under Description, enter a description (for example: The project towhich this drawing belongs).

■ Click OK.

7 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Properties.

In the Drawing Properties dialog box, the properties that you added aredisplayed. If necessary, use the scroll bar to display the properties.

8 Click OK.

Configure Drawing Properties | 19

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Drawing Properties (General Settings Tree Node)

Configure Report SettingsAutoCAD Plant 3D provides several report templates for viewing, printing,exporting, and importing reports.

You can export and import report data to and from Microsoft Excelspreadsheets (XLS/XLSX) or comma-separated value (CSV) files.

You can create new report types based on existing report templates. Thetemplates include:

■ Equipment List

■ Line List

■ Line Summary List

■ Instrument List

■ Valve List

■ Nozzle List

■ Control Valve List

■ Document Registry


To configure report settings, specify a report type, and then set the class,project, or drawing properties within that report type. The properties youspecify are queried. The Data Manager displays the query results.

Setting Up Reports Containing Plant 3D Data

The existing report templates contain P&ID classes and properties. You cancreate Plant 3D templates for the following report types:

■ Equipment List

■ Line Summary List

■ Nozzle List

■ Valve List

You add 3D data to these templates by following the procedure to configurea new report based on an existing report and selecting Plant 3D classes.

NOTE If you modify one of these reports, the Plant 3D data is included in thereport only if a corresponding P&ID object with an identical tag exists in theproject.

To configure a new report based on an existing report (without replacingthe associated tables)


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Reports.

3 On the Project Reports pane, in the Defined Reports, click a report youwant to use as the template for a new report (for example: Equipment List).Click New.

Configure Report Settings | 21

4 In the New Report dialog box, under New Report Name, enter a name(for example: New Equipment List). Click Continue.


NOTE The name you enter in the New Report Name box is displayed as thetitle of the subsequent dialog box.

5 In the [New Report Name] dialog box, in the Select Properties To Includetree view, expand the class definition whose properties you want toconfigure (for example: Equipment).

NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant3D object or drawing properties and order them.

6 Click the properties you want queried in the new report.

The properties you specify are displayed in the Data Manager, in theProject Reports view.

7 On the Property Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field to move. Usethe Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order in which the fields aredisplayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom order in the Fields listis displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager.

8 Repeat steps 6-7 for each of the available fields that you want reported.

9 Click OK.


To configure a new report based on an existing report (replace the associatedtables)


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click ProjectReports.

3 On the Project Reports pane, click a report on which to base the newreport (for example: Equipment List). Click New.

4 In the New Report dialog box, enter a name for the new report (forexample: New Equipment List).


5 To replace the family tables, do the following:

■ Click Replace Table(s).

■ In the Replace dialog box, select the check box next to the tables youwant to replace (for example: select the Equipment check box).

■ In the drop-down list, click a replacement class table. Click Continue.

■ On the Create Report Template dialog box, click Continue.

NOTE The name you entered in the New Report Name box on the NewReport dialog box is displayed as the title of the subsequent dialog box.


6 In the [New Report Name] dialog box, in the Report Properties pane, inthe Select Properties To Include tree view, expand the class definitionwhose fields you want to configure (for example: Equipment).

NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant3D object or drawing properties and order them appropriately. The Plant 3Ddata is included in the report only if a corresponding P&ID object with anidentical tag exists in the project.

7 Click the properties you want queried in the new report.

8 On the Priority Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field whose locationyou want to change. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the orderin which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottomorder in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager.

9 Repeat steps 7-8 for each of the available properties that you wantreported.

10 Click OK.

To modify an existing report


Project Setup.


3 On the Project Reports pane, under Defined Reports, click the report youwant to modify. Click Modify.


4 In the Modify Report dialog box, in the Select Properties To Include treeview, expand the class definition whose fields you want to configure (forexample: Equipment).

NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant3D object or drawing properties and order them appropriately.


5 Click the properties you want queried in the report.

6 On the Priority Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field whose locationyou want to change. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the orderin which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottomorder in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager.

7 Repeat steps 5-6 for each of the available fields that you want reported.

8 Click OK.

To preview, sort, and filter a report


Project Setup.


3 On the Project Reports pane, under Defined Reports, click the report youwant to preview.


4 In the Report Preview data view, do any of the following:

■ To sort the data, click a column header to change the sort order.

■ To view only items with the same value as the selection, right-click acell that contains the value by which you want to search. Click FilterBy Selection.

■ To view all the selected items, right-click a cell that contains the valueyou want to exclude from the filtered view and click Filter ExcludingSelection.

■ To filter for field values and ranges of values, right-click a cell for theproperty where you want to set a filter. Click the Filter For Field.In the Filter For Field box, enter a value and press ENTER. Among theconditions you can use are the following:


NOTE Surround a string entry with single quotation marks (‘). Entries arecase sensitive.

ExamplesPurposeConditions (can beused cumulatively)

to display values notequal to your entry

Angle brackets (< >) ■ <> ‘700’ displaysonly rows with cellscontaining stringsother than 700

■ <> ‘’ displays rowswith cell data notequal to an emptystring, thus eliminat-ing rows with emptycells

Like ‘*SCH40* displays allfields continuing the text

to display any value in itsplace

Asterisk (*)

“SCH 40” regardless ofthe characters that comebefore or after the spe-cified string

= ‘Bosch’ displays onlycells containing thestring Bosch

to display values thatmatch your entry

Equal signs (=)

Displays only rows withempty cells

to display only emptycells

IS NULL

Displays only rows withdata

to exclude empty cellsIS NOT NULL

LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displaysSCH20, SCH30, SCH40,and so on

to display any singlecharacter in its place

Question marks (?)

■ To remove all filters, right-click a cell and click Remove Filter.

5 In the Report Preview data view, do any of the following:

■ To sort the data, click a column header to change the sort order.


■ To view only items with the same value as the selection, right-click acell that contains the value by which you want to search. Click FilterBy Selection.

■ To view all the selected items, right-click a cell that contains the valueyou want to exclude from the filtered view and click Filter ExcludingSelection.

■ To filter for field values and ranges of values, right-click a cell for theproperty where you want to set a filter. Click the Filter For Field.In the Filter For Field box, enter a value and press ENTER. You canuse the following conditions cumulatively:

ExamplesPurposeConditions






Asterisk (*)




Equal signs (=)



IS NULL




ExamplesPurposeConditions



Question mark (?)

■ To remove all filters, right-click a cell and click Remove Filter.

6 Do either of the following:

■ To save the filtered or sorted view into a report template to bedisplayed in the Data Manager, click Save.

■ To restore the default view, click Reset.

7 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Reports (General Settings Tree Node)

Configure AutoCAD P&ID DWG SettingsAs part of your AutoCAD P&ID DWG setup, you can configure certainbehaviors to which all designers using this project adhere.


Configure End Connections and Line BehaviorYou can assign an end connection to a valve or an inline instrument.

You can also assign an end connection after a valve or inline instrument isplaced in a drawing. If the symbol for an end connection changes, the changeis displayed in the drawing.

Understanding End Connections

You can delete an end connection, but only if the end connection is notcurrently assigned to a valve or inline instrument. If an end connection isassigned to an object when it is deleted, the graphical representation of theend connection is removed from the drawing. The value assigned to the EndConnection property of the valve or inline instrument is removed.

NOTE The four default end connections, Flanged, Socket Welded, Unspecified,and Welded, cannot be deleted.

End connections display the type of connection (flanged, socket welded, orwelded) for a valve or inline instrument in an AutoCAD P&ID drawing. Thetype of connection is tracked as a property. End connections inherit theirgraphical properties (such as layer, color, and line weight) from the valve orinline instrument with which they are inserted.

You can configure settings that control how lines display when they crosseach other and the behavior of grips for a selected schematic line.

Drawing behaviors you can configure include:

■ End connection behavior for valves and inline instruments

■ Display style of crossing lines

■ Behavior of a gap symbol and scale

■ Standoff distance between a line and a component

■ Orthogonal and implied cornering behavior of schematic lines

■ Display behavior of vertex grips

■ Connection behavior of inline components when the component moves

To define a new end connection


Project Setup.

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior | 33

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click EndConnections.

3 On the End Connections pane, click Add Block.

4 In the New End Connection dialog box, under End Connection Name,enter a name for the new end connection.

5 Click Browse.


6 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, locate and click a drawing thatcontains the block you want to use for the end connection symbol. ClickOpen.

7 In the Select Block dialog box, in the Available Blocks list, click a blockto use for the end connection.

The Preview pane displays a preview image of the block you selected.

8 Click OK.

9 In the New End Connection dialog box, click OK.

10 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.

To modify a block used for an end connection


Project Setup.


3 On the End Connections pane, in the drop-down list, click an endconnection to modify.


4 Click Edit Block.

5 In the Block Editor, edit the block representing the selected endconnection.

NOTE If you are not familiar with editing a block, see “Use the Block Editor”in the AutoCAD Help system.

6 When you are finished modifying the end connection block, click Closeon the Block Editor.

The changes you made to the block are saved in projSymbolStyle.dwg.

7 Click OK.

To remove an end connection

When you remove an end connection block, you also delete the endconnection from the project.


NOTE You cannot remove default end connections.


Project Setup.


3 On the End Connections pane, in the drop-down list, click an endconnection to delete.

4 Click Remove Block.

5 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes.


To assign an end connection to a valve or inline instrument


Project Setup.


2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.

3 Continue to expand the list until you find the valve or inline instrumentto which you want to assign the end connection.

4 Select a valve or inline instrument (for example: Ball Valve).

5 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, locate EndConnections.

6 In the EndConnections Default Value property, in the drop-down list,click an end connection type.

7 Click OK.

To configure line behavior


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click LineSettings.

3 On the Line Settings pane, under Line Crossing Style, click Gap or Loop.


4 In the Gap/Loop Width box, enter a number to represent the amount ofspace, in units, between two crossing lines. (Units refers to project units,such as inches for imperial or millimeters for metric.)

5 Under Manual Gap Symbol, in the Symbol drop-down list, click a gapsymbol to use to represent a gap between lines.

6 Under Standoff Distance, in the Standoff X box, enter a number to setthe shortest possible distance, in units, that designers can draw betweena 90-degree elbow and a piece of equipment.

7 Under Schematic Line Grips, in the Grip Settings drop-down list, click agrip behavior option.

8 To control automatic cornering behavior of orthogonal lines when theyconnect to a component, select the check box labeled Create OrthoSchematic Lines.

If this option is selected, ORTHO is temporarily turned on when theSLINE command is used, and corner points are implied. If this option iscleared, ORTHO is turned off temporarily when a designer enters theSLINE command.


9 To control whether inline components are moved with schematic lines,select the check box labeled Maintain Sline Connection When MovingAssets.

If this option is selected, inline components move with the schematicline to which they are connected. If this option is cleared, inlinecomponents become detached when schematic lines are moved.

10 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


End Connections (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Line Settings (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID)Create custom settings for export and import that include any combinationof AutoCAD P&ID classes.

Share AutoCAD P&ID data with other applications by mapping AutoCADPlant 3D properties to correspond with similar properties in other programs.

Understand Export and Import Settings

You can export and import data using the default Displayed Data setting. Thissetting exports and imports data for the active node in the Data Manager treeview, with or without child node data.


In some cases, however, you want to be more selective with the data youexport and import. For example, you want to export only nozzles and valves.You can use export and import settings to create custom settings that includeonly the classes you choose.

You can also use export and import settings to move data to and from otherapplications. You use external data mapping to map classes and properties tothe data structure in the other application.

You create export and import settings at the project level in Project Setup.You use one setting for both export and import, which simplifies the processof exporting data, externally editing the data, and importing the data back.After you create an export and import setting, you can later modify or deleteit.

Export to and Import from Other Programs

One common reason to create a custom export and import setting is forexporting and importing data to and from other programs. For example, youwant to export data to AutoCAD Electrical. Because the two programs havedifferent data structures, you map the classes and properties in AutoCAD Plant3D to the classes and properties in the other program.

Set up External Data Mapping

You set up external data mapping in the Export and Import Settings dialogbox when creating or modifying an export and import setting. You specifythe classes and properties to include and enter external class and propertynames. You also identify each property to be used as a unique identifier (UID)for each specified class, and map property values.

A one-to-one mapping between every class and property is not required. ManyPlant 3D objects can be mapped to the same external object. To achieve thismapping, enter the same external object name for all Plant 3D objects thatcorrespond to the same objects in other applications.

For example, AutoCAD Electrical uses a single table called COMP for allequipment. AutoCAD Plant 3D, however, uses numerous tables and objectsto classify the various categories of equipment. While interacting withAutoCAD Electrical, you map every Equipment object to an external objectcalled COMP. You then map every equipment property to some commonproperties in COMP.

Export and import share common property value mappings. When you exportdata, the mappings transform data to a format required by the externalapplication. When you import data, the mappings transform the external data

Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 41

into a format required by AutoCAD Plant 3D. Thus mappings provide atwo-way mechanism for a continuous data exchange between applications.

In some cases, applications can contain erroneous or duplicate data. Theimport and export process uses a unique identifier (UID) to identify specificrecords. If the imported data contains duplicate records, the most recentrecords overwrite the previous records. AutoCAD Plant 3D generally prohibitsduplicate records. However, if AutoCAD Plant 3D encounters duplicate records,it exports them as multiple records and the importing application coordinatesthem.

To create export and import settings


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Exportand Import Settings.

3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click New.

4 In the New Export and Import Settings dialog box, under Name, enter aname for the export and import setting (for example: Pipe Lines and SignalLines).


5 Under Description, enter a description for the setting (for example: Exportonly pipe lines and signal lines).

6 In the P&ID Classes tree view, expand the nodes to display the P&IDClasses you want to export and import (for example: expand EngineeringItems and Lines. Select all check boxes under both Pipe Line Segments andSignal Line Segments).


7 If this setting is for exporting to and importing from another program,see “To set up external data mapping.” Otherwise, click OK.

To set up external data mapping

You can map property values when creating export and import settings or bymodifying an existing setting.


Project Setup.


3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click an existing setting. ClickModify.

4 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Name, enter a new name (optional).

■ Under Description, enter a new description (optional).

■ In the tree view, expand the classes and select the check box for theclass you want to configure for external data mapping.


■ Under External Data Mapping, in the External Class Name box, entera name that corresponds to similar classes in the other program. Forexample, if the program equates Pipes with Pipe Lines, select the PipeLines check box in the tree view and enter Pipes in the External ClassName box. Repeat this process for each class you want to configurefor external data mapping.


■ Under Properties, in the External Property column, click the externalproperty you want to change. Enter the new name (for example: clickthe ModelNumber external property and enter Model).Repeat this process for each external property you want to change.

■ To make a property a unique identifier (UID), select the UID checkbox corresponding to the property. PnPID is a UID by default. If theother program recognizes a different identifier, you can change thissetting.

■ In the Value Mapping column, click the cell corresponding to theproperty you want to map. Click the [...] button.

5 In the Map Property Values dialog box, do the following:

■ In the P&ID Property column, enter the P&ID property values (forexample: in the P&ID Property ModelNumber column, enter P1, P2,S1, and S2).


■ In the External Property column, enter corresponding property valuesfor the other program (for example: enter Model, Model2, Model1, andModel2).


6 Click OK.

7 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, repeat the valuemapping process for each property you want to map. When you finishmapping, click OK to close the Modify Export and Import Settings dialogbox.

NOTE When you use this Export and Import Setting for exporting data to anotherprogram, all Pipe Line ModelNumber P&ID properties correspond with the Modelproperties of the other program. The P1, P2, S1, and S2 P&ID values associatedwith the ModelNumber P&ID properties correspond with the Model1, Model2,Model1, and Model2 values associated with the Model properties in the otherprogram, respectively.

To modify an export and import setting




3 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, you can:

■ Edit the name of the Export and Import Settings. For example, underName, change Pipe Lines and Signal Lines to Pipe Lines.

■ Edit the description. For example, under Description, change Exportonly Pipe Lines and Signal Lines to Export only Pipe Lines.

4 In the P&ID Classes tree view, modify the P&ID Classes to export andimport. For example, you can clear the check boxes for Signal Line Segmentsand all its child classes.


5 On the External Data Mapping pane, modify the class name in theExternal Class Name box, if necessary. Make other changes, as needed,to the external data mapping settings.

6 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Export and Import Settings (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set P&ID PathsYou can change the default locations for accessing P&ID project data (suchas drawings and templates).

The Paths panel includes:

■ P&ID DWG directory. Sets the location of the project drawing directory.

■ Project package. Defines the P&ID classes and properties used in a project.

WARNING It is strongly recommended that you do not manually change theproject package file (ProcessPower.dcfx) and reload the changed file. You canedit the file and reload it, but you do so at the risk of corrupting your project.

■ Symbols and styles. Displays (read-only) the location where symbols arestored.

■ Drawing template (DWT) file. Defines the template file that is used whennew drawings in a project are created.

Set P&ID Paths | 51

NOTE It is strongly recommended that you set your project library locations andpaths to a shared network location and set security measures to prevent users fromaccessing or changing certain project folders or files. Using Microsoft securitysettings, you can lock the project files that you do not want users to modify. Formore information about Windows security settings, see Windows Help.

To set or change the project file location


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Paths pane, do one of the following:

■ Enter location paths for the P&ID drawing directory and the drawingtemplate file directory.

■ Click the [...] button to the right of each box to browse to the locationwhere you want to store the directory and file.

NOTE The other paths were set when the project was created. You cannotedit those paths here.

4 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Paths (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager(P&ID)

You can customize the way the Data Manager displays data for P&ID projectsor drawings.

You can create customized views for both P&ID and 3D project and drawingdata. This section describes the process for P&ID data.

For 3D modeling information, see Configure Customized Views for the DataManager (Plant 3D) on page 150.

You can view data in the default class hierarchy or create new views thatdisplay the data arranged in a property-based hierarchy.

When you create a Data Manager view, select the class property for each levelof the hierarchy. For example, arrange a tree with Manufacturer at the toplevel, Model Number at the second level, and Supplier at the third level. In aKKS environment, you can base a view on a Unit, SystemCode, SystemNumber,EquipmentCode, and EquipmentNumber hierarchy.

NOTE For best results, select properties for customized views from the same levelof the class hierarchy. For example, select manufacturer, model number, andsupplier from the Engineering Items level.

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) | 53

To create a customized view for the Data Manager


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click DataManager Configuration.

3 On the Customized Views pane, click Create View.

4 Under A New Customized View, do the following:

■ In the Name box, enter a name for your view. This name replaces thename A New Customized View.

■ To define the scope of your view, in the Scope drop-down list, clickeither Project Data or Drawing Data.

■ Click New Level.


5 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Class tree view, expand the appropriate node and child nodesto locate and click a class for Level 1 (for example: Engineering Items).

■ In the Properties list, click a class property (for example: Manufacturer).

■ Click OK.

6 Click New Level and repeat the previous step to add the number of levelsyou want in the customized view. When you finish adding levels to thecustomized view, in the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.

NOTE For best results, select properties shared by all components to be displayedin the customized view.

To delete a customized view for the Data Manager


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click DataManager Configuration.

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) | 55

3 On the Customized Views pane, click the customized view you want todelete. Click Delete View.

4 In the Delete Customized View message, click Yes.

To open a customized view in the Data Manager

1 On the ribbon, click the Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager.

2 In the Data Manager, click in the drop-down list and select a customizedview.

The Data Manager tree view displays the customized data view.

3 To display relevant component details on the right pane, click a node inthe tree view (for example: ModelNumber-100).


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

New Customized View (Data Manager Configuration)


Set Up Class Definitions for Components and LinesClass definitions specify the attributes and properties of a component or line.To create most equipment, instruments, lines, inline items, and nozzles, youstart with an existing component and edit its properties.

Class definitions are divided into the following four families:

■ Engineering Items. Includes equipment, nozzles, instrumentation, inlineassets, and lines.

■ Non Engineering Items. Includes items that cannot be purchased, or arenot counted in reports (including flow arrows, gap, actuators, connectors,annotations, line breakers, and so on).

■ Pipe Line Groups. Includes pipe lines.

■ Signal Line Groups. Includes signal lines used with instruments.

You can modify existing class definitions or create your own based on existingclass definitions. For example, if your company uses a pump symbol that isnot provided with the program, you can create your own customized pumpsymbol.

When you create class definitions based on a family or parent, the newdefinition inherits the properties and settings of the family or parent.

Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 57

You can modify the following properties for class definitions:

■ Symbol or line settings. The name of the symbol or line style; the nameof the block controlling the geometry that is displayed in the drawing aftera component is inserted; the layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, and plotstyle; the lineweight of a component when it is inserted; and other settingsthat affect the insertion of a component or how a schematic line is drawn.

■ Properties. The values assigned to a component or line class definition todetermine how it looks and behaves in a drawing, and the values that areattached to a component or line (such as default value, description,substitution, supported standards, and so on).

■ Tag format. The information that comprises a unique tag for a componentor line.

■ Annotation. The text and symbol settings that annotate a component orline.

You can also create and rename class definitions, and purge any that are notused in a project drawing.

To create a class definition for a component or line


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionyou want to use as the basis for the new class definition.


NOTE Select a class definition that most closely represents the class definitionyou want to create. The node you select is used as the template for the newclass definition.

4 Right-click the selected class definition. Click New.

5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a class name and a display name (ifnecessary) for the new class definition.

NOTE Use only letters, numbers, and underscores for class names. Limitnames to 31 characters. Longer class names can cause problems during exportand import.

Also, do not start a class name with a number.

6 Click OK.

7 In the tree view, expand the node where the new class definition is added,and click the new class definition.

8 On the Class Settings pane, make the desired changes.

9 Click OK.

To modify a class definition for a component or line


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you find the purchasable item whosedefinition you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤

Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).


4 On the Class Settings pane, do either of the following.

■ If you are modifying a class definition, under Symbol, add, modify,or remove the symbols for the selected class definition.

■ If you are modifying a line definition, under Line, edit the propertiesfor the selected line style.

5 In the Properties, do the following (as needed):

■ In the Display Name column, change the value for the Display Nameproperty. (This information is displayed in the Data Manager.)

■ In the Default Value column, change the value for the Default Valueproperty.

■ Add or remove custom properties as needed for the class or linedefinition.

■ Change the values of other properties as needed (such as taggingformat, annotation style, acquisition, substitution, supportedstandards, graphical style name, and so on).

6 Under Tag Format, add, modify, or remove tagging formats associatedwith the selected class or line definition.

7 Under Annotation, add, modify, or remove annotation styles associatedwith the selected class or line definition.


8 Click OK.

To rename a class definition for a component or line


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whosedefinitions you want to rename (for example: Engineering Items ➤

Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).

4 NOTE You can rename only those class definitions that do not have a plussign (+) next to them under P&ID Class Definitions. For example, you cannotrename Blowers under Equipment but you can rename Centrifugal Blower underBlowers.

5 Right-click the class definition you want to rename. Click Rename.

6 Enter the new class name for the class definition. Press ENTER.

NOTE It is recommended that you use class names that are not greater than31 characters. Longer class names can cause problems during export andimport.


NOTE If a class definition is used in a drawing that is part of the project, amessage is displayed indicating that it cannot be renamed.

7 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


P&ID Class Definitions (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Up Symbol and Line SettingsClass definitions for components and lines control their graphical display ina P&ID drawing.

Class definitions for components and lines contain two types of settings andproperties—graphical and non-graphical. The graphical settings and propertiescontrol how the component or line is represented in a P&ID drawing.

Non-graphical properties distinguish one component or line from another.

■ For a component, you can specify the symbol and settings that controlthe insertion behavior of a component.

■ For a line, you can specify whether flow arrows indicate the flow directionthrough a pipe.

You can create class definitions for both components and lines for generalgraphical properties such as layers, colors, schematic line types, linetypes, andlineweights.


You can also set the tagging prompt for both components and lines to one ofthe following options:

■ Prompt for tag during component creation

■ Automatically assign an auto-generated tag

■ Not a tagged component

The DIN standard uses multiple lines to represent oil, air, solid fuels, and soon. If your project is based on the DIN 2481 standard, and the pipe line youwant to change has multiple lines, change Smart Line Type to Mline.

NOTE The Mline Smart Line Type does not support conversion of arcs to multiplelines. When converting AutoCAD lines as P&ID schematic lines, arcs remain assingle lines with their existing linetype.

To change the tagging prompt for components and lines


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component orline whose linetype you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, do one of the following:

■ If you are modifying a component, under Symbol, in the drop-downlist, click the symbol you want to modify. Click Edit Symbol.


■ If you are modifying a line, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate andclick Tagging prompt. In the drop-down list, click one of the followingoptions:

■ Prompt for tag during component creation

■ Automatically assign an auto-generated tag

■ Not a tagged component

6 Click OK.

When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line,it is displayed with the linetype you defined here.

To change linetypes for components and lines


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component orline whose linetype you want to change.





5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate andclick Linetype. In the drop-down list, click a new linetype.

NOTE If your project is based on the DIN 2481 standard, and the pipe lineyou want to change has multiple lines, change Smart Line Type to Mline.Then click Mline style. In the drop-down list, click a new multiline style. TheDIN standard uses multiple lines to represent oil, air, solid fuels, and so on.

6 Click OK.

When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line,it is displayed with the linetype you defined here.

To change layers and colors for components and lines


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component orline whose color or layer you want to change.





5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate andclick Layer. In the drop-down list, click a new layer. Locate and clickColor. In the drop-down list, click a new color.

6 Click OK.

When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line,it is displayed on the layer and in the color you defined here.

To change lineweights for components and lines


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component orline whose lineweight you want to change.




5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate andclick Line Weight. In the drop-down list, click a new lineweight.


6 Click OK.

When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line,it is displayed with the line weight you defined here.

To change line style for a pipe line that is represented by multiple lines (DINstandard)


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component orline whose linestyle you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line

5 In the Line Settings dialog box, do the following:

■ Under General Style Properties, locate and click Smart line type. Inthe drop-down list, click an Mline.

■ Under General Style Properties, locate and click Mline style. In thedrop-down list, click a new multiline style.

6 Click OK.

When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line,it is displayed with the line style you defined here.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Symbol (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Line (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Symbol Settings Dialog Box (Symbol)

Line Settings Dialog Box (Line)

Configure Symbols for ComponentsSymbols are graphical representations of components in a P&ID drawing. Youuse symbols to control the insertion behavior when a component is added toa P&ID drawing.

If your company uses a set of standard blocks, you can use those blocks todefine the symbols assigned to a component.

You can create new symbols for a component or modify existing symbols. Usethe Block Editor to edit a symbol block or to define settings that control howthe symbol is inserted. After you define a symbol, you can specify the defaultsymbol that a component uses.

You can also remove the symbol for a class definition. Before you remove asymbol, the program checks to see if the symbol is assigned to the classdefinition. If the symbol is assigned, you are notified that it cannot be removed.

If a symbol is assigned to a value in a symbol list or to a component in a P&IDdrawing, the value can be removed from the symbol list. Also, the value canbe designated as unassigned for the property. In both cases, the visual fidelityto the component in the drawing is maintained.


Scale Components

Most components in AutoCAD Plant 3D are at a scale of 1:1, and are eitherunitless or in the unit format based on the selected standard. The scale factorfor inserting a component is defined as a property of the symbol that isassigned to the component class definition.

When defining the scale factor for a component, you choose whether thecomponent is scaled uniformly. Most blocks are scaled uniformly along theX and Y axis. If, however, you want to create multiple tank components withdifferent widths while using a single block for the different-sized tankcomponents, you can choose not to scale uniformly.

Understand Attachment Points on Components

Attachment points are snap points on a component that connect multiplecomponents and connect a schematic line to a component. Attachment pointsvalidate that when a component is placed in a drawing, it is actually connectedwith schematic lines.

Attachment points help to define the placement and orientation for acomponent. When you select a component for placement on a drawing, youplace it by its block origin (0,0) by default. You can switch from the origin toan attachment point before placing the component by pressing the spacebaror ENTER key. Attachment points define directional information forcomponents that have an upstream and downstream direction associated withthem (for example: check valves).

Attachment points are required to specify, label, and correctly apply endconnections. They are used in components such as pumps and blowers todetermine that the connections in a drawing represent the availableconnections on the real-world items. Inline components such as valves haveattachment points that provide precise control over line connections. Whenyou place an inline component on a schematic line, its attachment pointsensure that the schematic line is properly broken.

Attachment points serve as the recommended connect points for a component.If you do not use attachment points, the extents of the block determine wherethe line is trimmed to connect to the component. It is recommended thatyou use attachment points in the blocks that you create. Also, do not removeor change the order of the attachment points in the blocks that are includedwith AutoCAD Plant 3D.


Define Attachment Points

You define attachment points in a block with the Block Editor and Pointparameters. Each Point parameter that you want to use as an attachment pointmust follow a specific labeling convention, "AttachmentPoint" + [NumericSuffix]. For example, the first attachment point for a block would be labeledAttachmentPoint1, the second attachment point would be labeledAttachmentPoint2, and so on.

If you are defining an attachment point in a block for a valve or inlineinstrument, also define the rotation angle of the end connection by using thelabeling convention "AttachmentPoint" + [Numeric Suffix] + ":EndCode" +[Rotation Angle in Degrees].

For example, a block has a Point parameter with the labelAttachmentPoint1:EndCode90 for one of its attachment points. The labelAttachmentPoint1:EndCode90 indicates that it is the first attachment point forthe block and that the end connection at the attachment point is rotated 90degrees. If you do not want to use end connections with a block for a valveor inline instrument, use the labeling convention "AttachmentPoint" +[Numeric Suffix].

Node points are added to all attachment points to make drawing andconnecting lines easier. To snap to an attachment point on a component, youuse the Node snap. The Node snap also snaps to a point object, dimensiondefinition point, or dimension text origin contained in a block or drawing.

Orient Attachment Points

Most inline components, such as those on the Fittings and Valves tabs of thePIP tool palette, are horizontally oriented by default. Their attachment pointsfall on the X axis, following the flow of a horizontal line either to the left orright. Some components, however, are oriented by default along the Y axis.If you place such a component (for example: a flame arrestor) on a horizontalline, it automatically rotates to align with the line direction.

When you configure symbols for components, remember the followingguidelines:

■ The imaginary vector drawn from Attachment Point 1 (AP1) to AttachmentPoint 2 (AP2) defines the direction of the component.

■ Most components are horizontally oriented, with the vector along the Xaxis.

■ Some components, such as Flame Arrestors, have AP1 to AP2 along thepositive Y axis. These components are vertically oriented.


■ If the vector does not follow the X or Y direction, it is ignored.

Understand Join Types

The Join Type property setting for a component symbol defines whether thecomponent can be inserted into an existing line. Join type settings also definehow a line breaks when a component is inserted and whether adding thecomponent to an existing line creates a new line group.

Symbol properties for join type include the following options:

■ Endline. Typically used for components that are placed at the end of a line(for example: caps or blind flanges), or placed in a drawing beforeconnecting lines to them. Symbols with this property setting do not insertinto lines.

■ Inline. Setting for components that are regularly inserted into pipe or signallines. Components with this join type move when the line is moved,behaving as part of the line. If the line is deleted, the component is deletedalong with the line.

■ Segment Breaker. Symbols with this join type can be inserted into lines.When these components are inserted, they break a line, and the line groupand line number is retained for both line segments. For example, a reduceror a relief valve can break a line so that the line have different propertieson either side of the component.

■ Segment Group Breaker. Components with this join type (for example:ISO pumps, compressors, and blowers) can be inserted into a line andbreaks the line into two line groups with different line numbers.

■ No Join. Does not connect with lines (for example: agitators).

To add a symbol to a component class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component orline whose symbol you want to change.


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click asymbol to use as the template for the new symbol.

5 Under Symbol, click Add Symbol.

6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click SymbolName. Enter a new name for the symbol.

7 Under Symbol Properties, click Block. Click the [...] button.

8 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and select the drawingthat contains the block you want to use. Click Open.

9 In the Select Block dialog box, click a block in the Available Blocks list.Click OK.


10 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties andOther Properties, modify the properties as needed. Click OK.


To set the default symbol for a component class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose default symbol you want to edit.


4 On the Class Settings pane, in the Property Name column, locateGraphicalStyleName.

5 In the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the symbol youwant to use as the default symbol when inserting the component into aP&ID drawing.

6 Click OK.

To edit a symbol for a component class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose symbol you want to edit.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, clickthe symbol that you want to edit.

5 Click Edit Symbol.

6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, modify the properties for the symbol.

7 Click OK.


To remove a symbol for a component definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose symbol you want to remove.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, clickthe symbol that you want to remove.

5 Click Remove Symbol.

If the symbol is already assigned to a class definition, a message isdisplayed informing you that the symbol cannot be removed.

6 Click OK.

To edit the block associated to a symbol


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose symbol you want to edit.


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, clickthe symbol that contains the block that you want to edit.

5 Under Symbol, click Edit Block.

6 In the Block Editor, edit the geometry for the block as needed.

7 Click Close Block Editor.

8 Click OK.

To set the scale factor for a component


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose scale factor you want to change.


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, clickthe symbol whose scale factor you want to change.

5 Click Edit Symbol.

6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Other Properties, locate andclick Symbol Scale. Enter a scale factor.

7 To set prompting behavior for designers to scale a component when theyinsert it in a drawing, click Scale on Insert. In the drop-down list, clickYes.

8 To set scaling behavior, click Scale Mode. In the drop-down list, clickeither of the following:

■ Uniform scaling: Sets the component to scale proportionately bothvertically and horizontally.

■ XY independent scaling: Sets the component to scale independentlyboth vertically and horizontally, depending on which direction youmove the cursor.

9 Click OK to close each dialog box.

When designers place this symbol in a drawing, the symbol has the scalingbehavior you defined here.


To create a component and add it to the tool palette

NOTE Before you start this procedure, make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayedand that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the newcomponent. For example, if you are adding a pump to the tool palette, make surethat the Equipment tab is active.


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose properties most closely match the component you want to create.

The component that you select is used as the template for the newcomponent definition.

4 Right-click the selected class definition. Click New.


5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new class definition.

6 Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup tree view, expand the list until you locate where thenew class definition was added. Select the new component definition.

8 On the Class Settings pane, make the desired changes to the newdefinition symbol settings, properties, tag format, and annotation style.

9 Under Symbol, click Add to Tool Palette.

The new class definition is added to the active tool palette. The new toolcan be used just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D,and is included in reports.

NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, thecomponent is added to the bottom of the tab last displayed.

10 Click OK.

To create a component with attachment points and add it to the tool palette

The following procedure illustrates how to create a pump (an endlinecomponent) and define two attachment points (where schematic lines willsnap). You can create other components using the same general steps. Not allcomponents require attachment points (for example, tanks do not requirethem) unless you want to define them.

NOTE Before you start this procedure, make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayedin your drawing and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want toadd the new component. For example, if you are adding a pump to the toolpalette, make sure that the Equipment tab is active.

1 Create a new block (for example: a horizontal centrifugal pump) and savethe drawing file. If you do not know how to create a block, see “Createand Store Blocks” in the AutoCAD Help system.


2 On the ribbon, click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ BlockEditor.

3 In the Block Editor dialog box, click Current Drawing. Click OK.

4 Turn off Midpoint snaps if they are on.

5 On the Parameters tab of the Block Authoring palette, click PointParameter, and place a parameter (for example: on the inlet of the pump).

6 Right-click the parameter. Click Properties.

7 In the Properties palette, under Property Labels, click Position Label. Enterattachmentpoint1.

8 Click a blank space in the drawing, and then press ESC on the keyboard.

9 Create another parameter (for example: at the outlet of the pump), andlabel it attachmentpoint2.

10 Save the changes and close the Block Editor.


12 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the componentwhose symbol you want to edit (for example: Equipment ➤ Pumps ➤

Centrifugal Sump Pump).

13 Right-click the class definition. Click New.


NOTE Instead of creating a new class definition, you can also add a newsymbol to an existing class definition. To add a new symbol to an existingclass definition, see “To add a symbol to a component class definition.”

14 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new class definition(for example: horizontal centrifugal pump).

15 Click OK.

16 Expand the node where the new class definition was added, and selectthe new class definition.

17 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, click Add Symbol.

18 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, do thefollowing:

■ In the Symbol Name box, enter a name for the symbol that is addedto the new class definition.

■ Click Block, and then click the [...] button. Browse to the drawing youcreated in step 1. Click that drawing and in the Select Block dialogbox, click a symbol name (block) in the list. Click OK.

■ (Optional) Make other changes to the settings of the component youcreated.

■ Click OK.

19 On the Class Settings pane, change the properties, tag format, andannotation style for the new class definition.

20 Under Symbol, click Add to Tool Palette.

The new component is added to the active tool palette. The new tool canbe used like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D. It is alsoincluded in reports.


NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, thecomponent is added to the bottom of the palette tab that was last displayed.You can move it by dragging and placing it in a new location in the palette.You can also copy or cut it and paste it to another P&ID tool palette.

21 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager




Configure the Appearance of LinesYou can set up the arrow and flag behavior of lines.

You set up whether a flow arrow is displayed when a line is added to a drawing,the type of flow arrow symbol displayed, and whether to prompt for theinsertion of a flag.

To set up line arrow behavior


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the line style whoseline arrow behavior you want to set (for example: Equipment ➤ Lines ➤

Pipe Line Segments ➤ Primary Line Segment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Line Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Flow ArrowStyle. In the drop-down list, click a symbol in the list. Click OK.

6 Click OK.

To set up automatic prompting for flag insertion (DIN standard only)


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the line style whoseline behavior you want to set (for example: Equipment ➤ Lines ➤ PipeLine Segments ➤ Primary Line Segment).


4 In the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line.

5 In the Line Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click FlagPrompt. In the drop-down list, click Automatically Prompt to Insert Flag.Click OK.

6 Click OK.

To add a flow arrow symbol


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click Flow Arrow (forexample: Non-Engineering Items ➤ Flow Arrow).


5 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and clickSymbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol.

6 Under Symbol Properties, locate and click Block. Click the [...] button.

7 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and click the drawingthat contains the block you want to use. Click Open.

NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol. The blockyou want to use must be in the drawing file that you select.


8 In the Select Block dialog box, under Available Blocks, select a block.Click OK.

9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties andOther Properties, change the properties as needed. Click OK.

To create a line and add it to the tool palette

NOTE make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and that theactive tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new line.


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you find Pipe Line Segments or SignalLine Segments (Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments or SignalLine Segments).

4 Right-click either Pipe Line Segments or Signal Line Segments. Click New.

5 In the Create Class Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new linedefinition.

NOTE You can create a line class definition under Pipe Line Segments orSignal Line Segments only.

6 Click OK.

7 In the Project Setup tree view, expand the tree until you reach the newline class definition, and click it.

8 On the Class Settings pane, change the settings, properties, tag format,and annotation style for the new line class definition.

9 Under Line, click Add to Tool Palette.

The new line class definition is added to the active tool palette. It can beused just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and isincluded in reports.

NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, thecomponent is still added to the bottom of the last-active tool palette.

10 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager




Set Up PropertiesProperties store information about a component or line that is in a P&IDdrawing.

Both components and lines have properties that control how the componentand line look when placed into a P&ID drawing. Properties also storenon-graphical information that can be extracted from the drawing. Propertiesfor a component or line class definition can be defined as one of the followingdata types:

■ String. Permits a free-form text value for a property.

■ Numeric. Verifies that only a positive or negative number is entered for aproperty.

■ Boolean. Permits a choice between true and false.

■ Symbol List. (unavailable for Plant 3D objects) Defines a list of choices thatcontrol the symbol for a component in a P&ID drawing. This option isavailable only for P&ID objects when more than one symbol is associatedwith a class.

■ Selection List. Defines a list of property values. If a value is not displayedin the predefined list, it can be entered as free-form text.


■ Acquisition. Defines a rule stating that a component property acquires itsvalue from another property. For example, a rule states that a hand valveacquires its size from the corresponding property of a line. The source canbe chosen from class, project, or drawing properties.

NOTE When you set up properties for a project, make sure no one else isaccessing that project. If others are working in the project, your changes arenot saved.

To add a property to a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property you want to add.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.


5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property. The namecannot contain any spaces.

■ Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed forthe new property when using the Data Manager or Properties palette.

■ Under Choose a Type, select one of the available data types.

6 Click OK.

If you selected Selection List or Symbol List, the appropriate dialog boxis displayed to let you create either a selection list or symbol list.

If you selected Acquisition, the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed,where you select the source from which the property value is acquired.

7 Click OK.

To modify a property for a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property you want to edit.


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the propertyyou want to edit. Do one of the following:

■ Under Property Description, click the box and enter a new description.

■ Under Default Value, either click the box and enter a new value or,in the drop-down list, click a value. If the default value is Acquisition,in the drop-down list, click an appropriate item.

■ If the property type is List, click Edit to change the selection or symbollist that is assigned to the property.

■ Under Acquisition, click the [...] button and select Add acquisitionrule. In the Select Data Source dialog box, select the source where theproperty value is acquired.

NOTE To change the name of the property or its type, delete the propertyand then add it again.

5 Click OK.

To delete a property from a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property you want to delete.


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the propertyyou want to delete. Click Remove.


6 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Properties (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Property Acquisition (P&ID)When you select Acquisition as a property type, you set up a rule stating thatthe property acquires its value from another property.

The acquisition source can be another class, project, or drawing property.

Acquisition ensures consistency among component property values. If thesource value changes, all components set to acquire that value change as well.Property acquisition is also useful for maintaining consistent tagging. Whenyou change a source value, tag formats that are based on acquired propertiesupdate automatically throughout the project.

Understand Property Acquisition Rules

You can select without restriction any drawing property or project propertyas the source of an acquisition rule. When you select a class property as thesource, however, make sure that the acquiring class and the source class areconnected.


For example, a valve can acquire a size value from a line because the two areconnected in a relationship. A tank and a furnace, however, have no directrelationship to one another, so you cannot set up an acquisition rule betweenthem.

You can set up property acquisition rules when the following relationshipsexist:

■ Line and inline asset

■ Line and start asset

■ Line and end asset

■ Line and arrow

■ Annotated and annotation

■ Line and break

■ Line and page connector

■ Line and nozzle

■ Pipe line group and pipe line

■ Signal line group and signal line

■ Pipe line group and signal line group (if you manually associated the groupsusing SLGROUPEDIT). See Understand Acquisition Between Signal LineGroups and Pipe Line Groups on page 93.

■ Connector and connector

■ Asset and non-engineering (only between a control valve and its actuator)

The following properties have acquisition rules set by default. You can viewthem when you create a new project:

Source PropertyAcquisition Property

PipeLines.SizeHandValves.Size

PipeLines.SpecHandValves.Spec

PipeLines.SizeInLineInstruments.Size

PipeLines.SizePipingSpecialtyItems.Size



PipeLines.SpecPipingSpecialtyItems.Spec

PipeLines.SizePipingFittings.Size

PipeLines.SpecPipingFittings.Spec

Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode

A property that is set to acquire its value from another property is in Acquiremode. However, you can switch this property into Override mode and editthe value manually. Once a property is in Override mode, its value is no longeracquired from another source.

In the program, an icon next to the property indicates whether the propertyis in Override mode or Acquire mode. The icons appear in the Propertiespalette, the Data Manager, and the Assign Tag dialog box. When the Overrideicon is displayed, you can edit the value.

■ The property is in Acquire mode.

■ The property is in Override mode

Understand Initialization Only

Select Acquisition (the default) to set up a property to acquire its value fromanother property. You can also specify Initialization Only, which sets theacquisition to occur only once (when the component is first initialized). Afterinitialization, the property switches to Override mode. When the property isin Override mode, you can edit the value manually because it is no longeracquired from another source.

Copy or Move Components with Acquired Properties Between Pipe Lines

When you set up a component property to acquire its value from anotherproperty and then copy or move that valve onto another line, the valveacquires the property value from the new line. However, if the valve propertyyou are moving is in Override mode, the specific value accompanies the valve.


Understand Acquisition from Multiple Sources

Many Acquisition relationships are simple one-to-one relationships. Forexample, a gate valve has a one-to-one relationship with a pipe line andacquires its size and spec from that line.

However, a component can have multiple acquisition sources. If these sourceshave identical values or some identical values along with others that areunspecified, a value can be acquired. Only when the sources have conflictingvalues is the acquisition impossible. A question mark is displayed in place ofthe acquired value.

For example, a three-way valve has a direct relationship with three differentpipe line segments. In such cases, as long as the different sources either havethe same spec value (for example: PVC) or the same value in combination withblank values, the valve acquires the value. If the pipe line segments havedifferent specs, a question mark is displayed in the valve Spec field.

Understand Acquisition Between Signal Line Groups and Pipe Line Groups

By associating a signal line group with a pipe line group, you can set up thesignal line group to acquire any of that pipe line group properties. Youmanually associate the groups using SLGROUPEDIT.

Although a pipe line group can be associated with many signal line groups, asignal line group can be associated with only one pipe line group. Once anassociation is established, the following capabilities are available:

■ The signal line group can acquire properties from the pipe line group.

■ Signal lines can then acquire these properties from their signal line group.

■ Components (such as general instruments) on the signal line can thenacquire these properties from the signal lines.

NOTE Association and dissociation are manual processes. If you change a drawingthat make a current association inappropriate, you can change the association. Asyou change, all acquired properties are updated to reflect the current association.Tags and annotations based on these properties are also updated automatically.

To set up a new property acquisition rule


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property acquisition rule you want to create (for example:Engineering Items ➤ Inline Assets ➤ Hand Valves).



■ Under Property Name, enter the property name (for example:PipelinesInsulationType).

■ Under Display Name, enter the new property name you want displayedin the Data Manager or the Properties palette (for example:PipelinesInsulationType).

■ Under Choose A Type, click Acquisition. Click OK.


6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do thefollowing:

■ Under Categories, expand Engineering Items.

■ Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Pipe Line Segments).

■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: Insulation Type). ClickOK.


To add an acquisition rule for an existing property


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class containingthe property whose acquisition property you want to change (for example:Engineering Items ➤ Equipment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, click a property (for example: Type).

5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button.Click Add Acquisition Rule.



■ Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments).




To edit an acquisition rule for a property


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whoseproperty you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤

Equipment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whoseacquisition rule you want to edit.

5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button.Select Edit Acquisition Rule.




■ Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments).



To remove an acquisition rule from a property


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whoseproperty you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤

Equipment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whoseacquisition rule you want to remove.

5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button.Select Remove Acquisition Rule.


To override an acquisition property

You can override an acquisition property using the Data Manager or theProperties palette. The following steps describe overriding an acquisitionproperty using the Properties palette.

1 In a drawing, right-click the component whose acquisition rule you wantto override. Click Properties.

2 In the Properties palette, locate the property you want to change. Clickthe field in the right column.

3 Click Acquire Mode. In the flyout menu, click Override Mode.


4 Enter a new value.

5 Close the Properties Palette.

NOTE When you export data from the Data Manager to a Microsoft Excelspreadsheet, you can change the values of properties that are in Acquiremode in Excel. When you import the file into the Data Manager and acceptthe changes, the new values are displayed and the properties are automaticallychanged to Override mode. See Import Modified Acquisition Properties onpage 531

.

To change how an existing property acquisition rule is applied


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whoseproperty you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ InlineAssets ➤ Hand Valves).


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, locate the Size property row. In the Default Value column, clickthe box to display the drop-down list. Do either of the following:

■ To set the property so that it always acquires its value fromPipeLines.Size, click Acquisition (the default).

■ To set the property so that its value is acquired once (when a valve isfirst initialized), click Initialization Only.

NOTE After initialization, the property value of a valve changes to Overridemode. Users can edit the property value.

In the Acquisition column, the valve size is displayed as acquired fromPipeLines.Size. If PipeLines.Size has a value of 3, that value appears in theData Manager for this valve.



Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Set Up Selection Lists and Symbol ListsUse selection lists and symbol lists to enforce standard sizes for items such aspipe specs, pipe sizes, and instrument types, or when you want designers tochoose from a predefined set of options.

Understand Selection Lists

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a set of selection lists. You can add your ownitems or delete items that are not relevant to your drafting environment. Inthe Data Manager, designers can also enter their own values in the lists.

As part of your project setup tasks, you can set up new selection lists or changethe values of an existing list.

The selection lists you configure are added to the P&ID Class Definitions treein the Project Setup dialog box. There, you define the properties of engineeringitems, non-engineering items, pipe line groups, and signal line groups. Thoseproperties are included in the component or line behavior when thecomponent or line is placed in a drawing.

Understand Symbol Lists

Symbol lists are like selection lists because you designate a value for a property.But with a symbol list, you also define the symbol to represent a componentin a P&ID drawing. The symbols that you can select for a symbol list are


assigned to the selected class definition or are inherited from a class definitionfamily.

To create a selection list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component orline class definition (for example: Engineering Items).


5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following;

■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example:Pump_Manufacturers). The name cannot contain any spaces.

■ Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed forthe new property (for example: Pump Manufacturers) in the DataManager or Properties palette.

■ Under Choose a Type, select Selection List.


6 Click OK.

7 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click New Selection List.


8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selectionlist (for example: Manufacturers). Click OK.

9 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click Add Row.

10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: Goulds)and a description of the value, if necessary.

11 Continue adding rows until the selection list is complete.

12 Click OK.

On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, the selection list is displayedfor the selected class definition. The value displayed in the list is thedefault value for that component.

To modify or delete items in a selection list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a class definition(for example: Engineering Items).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, Property Name, select theproperty containing the selection list you want to modify. Click Edit.


5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click the property whose datayou want to change (for example: Manufacturers).

6 Click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value and a description of thenew selection list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK.


In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Value, the new selectionlist entry is added.

8 In the Selection List Property dialog box, select a value (for example:Goulds). Click Delete Row.



To delete a selection list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component orline class definition (for example: Engineering Items).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, select the property youwant to delete. Click Edit.

5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Selection List, click theselection list you want to remove (for example: Manufacturers).

6 Click Delete Selection List.


8 Select another selection list to assign to the current property.


9 Click OK.

To create a symbol list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (forexample: Centrifugal Blower).




■ Click Symbol List.

■ Specify a property name for the component or line (for example:Blower_Manufacturers).

■ Specify a display name for the component or line (for example: BlowerManufacturers).

■ Click OK.

NOTE To create a property that uses a symbol list, you assign more than onesymbol to the component class definition.

6 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, under Property Value, enter the name of thenew symbol list entry (for example: Jackson). Click OK.


8 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, under Property Value, click thenew entry. Under Block Value, in the drop-down list, click a symbol toassign to the property value.

9 Continue adding rows until the symbol list is complete.

10 Click OK.

To modify or delete items in a symbol list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, select the propertycontaining the symbol list that you want to modify. Click Edit.


5 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, click Add Row.

6 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a value for the new symbol list entry(for example: Bechtel). Click OK.

The new symbol list entry is added to the selection list for the selectedproperty.

NOTE If you want to change the property value for an entry, delete theoriginal entry and add a new entry with a new value.

7 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, select the new symbol list entry.Under Block Value, double-click and select the block style.

8 To delete an entry, select the entry (for example: Bechtel) and click DeleteRow.

NOTE If you delete a value that is currently assigned to a component in adrawing, the value is removed from the symbol list, and any componentusing that value is assigned no value. The symbol assigned to the blockremains, however, to maintain visual fidelity.


To modify the standards that support a class definition


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (forexample: Centrifugal Blower).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, scroll down the list andselect the SupportedStandards property name.

5 Click Edit.

6 In the Standards dialog box, select which standards support the selectedclass. Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Set Up Tag Formatting (P&ID)You can set up tag formats to help designers apply tag elements consistentlythroughout a project cycle.

Many projects require specific tag numbering formats for different componentsand lines. You can define different tag numbering formats for your projects.

NOTE You can set the behavior of the Assign Tag dialog box for individualcomponents and lines. To set the tagging prompt, see Set Up Symbol and LineSettings on page 62.

You can set up tag formats for equipment, valves, nozzles, instrumentation,pipe lines, and pipe line groups by creating new tag formats or modifyingexisting formats. You select an existing format on which to base the newformat. You can also create a new tag format.

Tag formats structure specific information for a component or line into a tag.The information is stored in the tag as a property of a component or line. Theinformation can be displayed in an annotation callout when a component orline is annotated. The block used for the annotation style determines whatinformation is displayed in the callout.

Even when an annotation includes a tag property and displays that propertyon the drawing, the result is not a tag, but an annotation. Because the terms


tag and annotation are easily confused, they are described in detail in thistable.

An annotation is:A tag is:

Information about a component or linesegment that appears on a drawing

A unique identifier for a component or linesegment

Text and (optional) shapesData

Located in the drawing areaLocated in the data cache

Not necessarily uniqueUnique

Viewable in the drawingViewable as a property in the Data Man-ager

Not necessarily a single entity per compon-ent or a line segment. (A component or

A single entity for each component or linesegment

line segment can have multiple annota-tions.)

Text defined in the annotation style blockdefinition. This text can include the tag

Not text, but data. Comprised of sub partsas defined by the tag format.

property of a component or line segment.This text is not a tag, but an annotation

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Class

Tag formats are set up for a class definition project-wide. Most of the defaulttag formats tag items at the class definition level (for example: a class definitiontype, such as equipment).

You can use the property of a class, drawing, or project in the tag format. Forexample, a tag for a component can contain a class property such as Spec, adrawing property such as Area, or a project property such as Project Number.

Tag formats are flexible. You can set them up to reflect the specific needs ofyour company.

Set Up Tag Formatting Using Acquiring Properties

Tag formats can include properties that acquire their values from otherproperties. For example, if a line acquires its Unit value from a project-levelproperty, you can use that acquiring property in the tag format. If the Unit


value at the project level changes, all tags with that property as a subpart areupdated to reflect that change.

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Pipe Line Group

Pipes are the only components that are automatically grouped. Although pipeline groups are not physical entities, you set up tag formatting for pipe linegroups just as you would for any other component.

The default tag format for a pipe line group is Line Number. You can add otherproperties as needed (for example: Service).

Understand Default Tag Formatting Templates

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides the following tag format templates for you to useor modify to fit with your company tag formatting standards:

■ Equipment tag (Type-Number). Defined by default with a type propertyand a number (for example: P-100).

■ Equipment tag 2 (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an areaproperty, type property, and number (for example: 25-P-1000).

■ Hand valve tag (Code-Number). Defined by default with two lettersrepresenting a valve code and a number (for example: HV-100).

■ Nozzle tag (N-Number). Defined by default with one or more lettersrepresenting a nozzle code and a number (for example: N-1).

■ Instrumentation tag (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area,type, and loop number (for example: 51-PT-100).

■ Line number tag. Defined by default with a line number (for example:100).

■ Pipeline tag (Size-Spec-Service-Line Number). Defined by default with sizevalue, spec, service, and line number (for example: 6"-C1-P-10014).

Build Tag Formatting Expressions

You can define how tag elements are expressed. For example, you can createan instrument tag of Area-Type-Loop Number_Suffix (for example:25-FE-1002_A). You can control the formatting of the values that can beassigned when tagging a component or line through expressions.

Using expressions, you can designate whether a value must be entered as textcharacters, numbers, or any combination of text characters and numbers(free-style value).


You can also define an expression to generate a value automatically when adesigner adds a component to a drawing. You can set automatic expressionsto a drawing property or project property.

Understand Tag Uniqueness

In general, a tag property must be unique. Even items of different types musthave unique tags. For example, if you assign the tag A-123 to a pump, youcannot assign the identical tag to a tank.

Two exceptions to tag uniqueness are as follows:

■ Line segment tags can be identical. The tag properties of a line group mustbe unique, but the tag properties of the line segments within that line groupcan be the same.

■ A large component that stretches across drawings can have duplicate tags.Duplicate tags can represent different parts of the same item. For example,a line that spans drawings using an off-page connector can have the sametag in each drawing.

To create a tag format


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (forexample: Centrifugal Sump Pump).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, select the tag format typeon which you want to base the new tag format (for example: EquipmentTag [Type-Number]). Click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter thename of the new format (for example: Pump Tag).


6 In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number for how many subpartsyou want in the tag (for example: 3) or click the Up or Down arrow untilthe number is displayed.

TIP Use as many properties as subparts as needed. Use delimiters onlybetween these subparts, not within them. if you place Delimiters in theDelimiter box, they appear between the subparts in a tag. Entering a dashbetween items in the Field box (for example, N-N-N) can produce unexpectedresults.

7 In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties.


■ Under Class, click... Equipment.

■ Under Property, click Type.

■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property.

■ Click OK.


9 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click Select Drawing Properties.

10 In the Select Drawing Property dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Category, click General.

■ Under Drawing Properties, click Area.

■ Click OK.


11 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row, click DefineExpression (the last icon in the row).

12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, click No Expression(Free Style Value). Click OK.

13 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click Define Expression (thelast icon in the row).

14 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Expression, do the following:

■ Click Numbers.

■ Select the Fixed Length check box. In the Fixed Length box, enter anumber or click the Up arrow until the number is displayed.

NOTE If the Expression section is disabled: under Result, clear the check boxfor No Expression (Free Style Value). Then follow the directions in step 14.


15 Click OK.

16 In the Tag Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter whereappropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiterfor General.Area[].

NOTE Do not place a delimiter in the Field box.

17 Click OK.

18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, under Property Name, selectTagFormatName.


19 In the TagFormatName row, under the Default Value column, in thedrop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging thecomponent.

20 Click OK.

You created a new tag format and assigned it to a component. When you usethe component in a drawing, the Assign Tag dialog box prompts you to entertag data for the format you created.

To create a tag format for pipe line groups


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the item you wantto tag (for example: Pipe Line Groups).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format typeon which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Line Number),and then click New.


5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (forexample: PipeLineGroup - Service).

■ In the Name of Subparts box, enter the number of subparts you wantin the tag (for example: 2), or click the Up arrow until the number 2is displayed.

■ In the bottom row of icons, click Select Class Properties (thefirst icon on the left).



■ Under Class, click Pipe Line Groups.

■ Under Property, click a property (for example: Service).

■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property. Click OK.

7 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click OK.

8 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, locate TagFormatName.

9 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, click the tagformat you want to use (for example: select PipeLineGroup - Service).

10 Click OK.

To assign a tag format to a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatwhose class definition you want to assign.



5 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in thedrop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging acomponent or line.

6 Click OK.

To modify a tag format for a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formattingyou want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format youwant to modify.


5 Click Modify.

6 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, make the desired changes to the tagformat. Click OK.

7 Click OK.

To remove a tag format from a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formattingyou want to delete.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, select the tag format youwant to delete.


5 Click Delete.

NOTE If the selected tag format is either in a drawing that is part of theproject or is currently assigned to a component, a message informs you thattag format cannot be deleted.


7 Click OK.

To add automatically generated drawing properties


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component orline class definition (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click New.


■ In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (forexample: Alt_Equip_Tag).

■ In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number or click the arrowsuntil the desired number of subparts is displayed.


■ Click the Expression icon (the last icon in the row).

6 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Autogenerate, do thefollowing:

■ Select the Autogenerate Expression.

■ Click Drawing Field.

■ Click the Drawing icon.

7 In the Select Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.


8 In the New Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, do thefollowing:

■ Under Name, enter the name for the new property.

■ Under Description, enter a description for the new property.

9 Click OK until the Project Setup dialog box is displayed.

In the Project Setup dialog box, under Tag Format, the new tag is added.

To add automatically generated project properties


Project Setup.










6 In the Define Expression dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Autogenerate, select the Autogenerate Expression check box.Click Project Field.

■ Click the Project icon.

7 In the Select Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.


8 In the New Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Name box, enter the name for the new property.

■ In the Description box, enter a description for the new property.

■ In the Last Used Value box, enter the value to use for the last valuefor the new property.

■ In the Increment Value box, enter the increment value for the newproperty.

9 Click OK until all open dialog boxes are closed.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Tag Format (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up AnnotationsYou can use annotations to place text on a drawing to describe a componentor line. AutoCAD Plant 3D provides various annotation types.

You can create an annotation style that is based on an existing annotationstyle or a template, or create a new annotation style. To base an annotationstyle on a template, use AnnotationTemplates.dwg (located in the AutoCADPlant 3D 2010 directory), and select a block from the drawing. The templateblocks contain dynamic block parameters. With these parameters set, anannotation sizes dynamically when placed in a drawing.

Understand Dynamic Sizing Behavior of Annotations

AutoCAD Plant 3D annotations can dynamically size when you add them toa component or line.

When you create dynamically sized annotations, you can use the AssignAnnotation Format dialog box to assign the format string to both the attributeand to any associated dynamic block parameters.

Using any other method (including the Attribute Definition dialog box), youapply the format string to the attribute only. In addition, to enable thedynamic sizing behavior, you would have to update each instance of associateddynamic block parameters. The only reason to use the Attribution Definitiondialog box is to set other attribute properties, such as text style and height.


If you create an annotation using a block you create, you can add dynamicsizing behavior to the block. To understand how AutoCAD dynamic blocksare created, see “Overview of Dynamic Blocks” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Understand Annotation Style Properties

You can change the following styles for annotations:

■ Symbol properties. Sets the name of the annotation style and defines theblock that is displayed when the style is used.

■ General style properties. Sets layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, plotstyle, and lineweight.

■ Other properties. Sets the scale factor used for the symbol, whether theannotation inherits the component properties, whether the annotation islinked to a class, whether the annotation is automatically inserted, andthe X and Y offset distance from a component.

To create an annotation style


Project Setup.



4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click Add Annotation.

5 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and clickSymbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol.



NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol; the block youwant to use must be in the drawing file that you select.

8 In the Select Block dialog box, select a block from the Available Blockslist and then click OK.

9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, change the properties under GeneralStyles Properties and Other Properties as needed. Click OK.


10 Click OK.

To create a block and an annotation style

The following procedure illustrates how to create an annotation without usingan existing block as a template.

1 Create a block (for example: an insulation block).

2 Add an attribute to the block and call it UNASSIGNED.

3 (Optional) Add dynamic sizing behavior to the block attribute by addinga linear parameter to determine sizing behavior as follows:

■ To have the linear parameter automatically size to match the attributetext size, name the distance label of the linear parameter the same asthe attribute definition tag. An example of this dynamic sizingbehavior is the stretching of underlining in the Equipment Tag style.

■ To have the linear parameter automatically size to include the entireX or Y extents of all the evaluated attributes in the block definition,give the linear parameter the names TotalX and/or TotalY. An exampleof this dynamic sizing behavior is a block definition consisting of arectangle enclosing several lines of attributes. The rectangle stretchesor shrinks to accommodate the attributes regardless of their values.

4 Save the block drawing.


Project Setup.



8 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click Add Annotation.

9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and clickSymbol Name. Enter new name for the annotation style.




NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol. The blockyou use must be in the drawing file that you select.

12 In the Select Block dialog box, under Available Blocks, select a block.Click OK.

13 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties andOther Properties, change the properties as needed. Click OK.

14 In the Project Setup dialog box, under Annotation, click Edit Block.

15 On the P&ID Annotation toolbar, click Assign Annotation Format.In the Block Editor window, select the attribute definition.


16 In the Assign Annotation Format dialog box, create each subpart of theformat string as follows:

■ To select a class property, click Select Class Properties.

■ To select a drawing property, click Select Drawing Properties.

■ To select a project property, click Select Project Properties.

■ To define an expression, click Define Expression.

■ Enter a delimiter use between the fields. You can enter text anddelimiters. For example, if you want a pump to have text reflectingthe flow rate data, you could use a field value of #(TargetClass.FlowRate)and a delimiter value of GPH. To add leading text, create the formatstring and add the leading text using the Properties palette or theAttribute Definition dialog box. For example, to create an annotationfor an Exchanger that reads TUBE [pressure] @ [temperature], use theAssign Annotation Format dialog box to create the format string#(TargetClass.TubeDesignPressure)@#(TargetClass.TubeDesignTemperature). Then add the leading textTUBE using the Properties palette or the Attribute Definition dialogbox.

NOTE If you manually add leading text, update any associated dynamicblock parameters to match, using the Properties palette.

17 To create more subparts to the format string, in the Number of Subpartsbox, click the Up arrow or enter a number.

18 In the Assign Annotation Format dialog box, click OK.

19 In the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Save the block.

20 If you want the new annotation style to appear in the component or lineshortcut menu, proceed to step 21.

If you want the annotation placed in the drawing along with a componentor line, you can set the new annotation style as the default. A default


setting is useful when the AutoInsert property is set to something otherthan No Auto Insert. Do the following:

■ On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, locate AnnotationStyleName.

■ In the AnnotationStyleName row, under the Default Value column,in the drop-down list, click the annotation style.

21 Click OK to close the Project Setup dialog box and return to the drawing.

22 In the drawing, right-click the appropriate component or line to makesure that the new annotation is on its shortcut menu.

To assign an annotation style to a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotationstyle you want to assign to a component or line definition.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, locate AnnotationStyleName.

5 In the AnnotationStyleName row, under the Default Value column, inthe drop-down list, click the annotation style you want.

6 Click OK.

To modify an annotation style for a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotationstyle you want to modify.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, in the drop-down list,click the annotation style you want to modify.

5 Click Edit Annotation.


6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, make the desired changes to theannotation style. Click OK.

7 Click OK.

To delete an annotation style from a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotationstyle you want to delete.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, in the drop-down list,click the annotation style you want to delete.

5 Click Remove Annotation.

NOTE If the selected annotation style is either used in a drawing that is partof the project or is currently assigned to a component, you are promptedthat the annotation style cannot be deleted.

6 In the Confirm Delete message box, click Yes.

7 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Annotation (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Off-Page ConnectorsOff-page connectors create a continuance of a line from one project drawingto another. You can use an existing off-page connector to create a new one.

You can change the following styles for off-page connectors:

■ Symbol properties. Sets the name of the symbol and defines the block forthe connector when it is inserted into a drawing.

■ General style properties. Sets layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, plotstyle, and lineweight.

■ Other properties. Sets the symbol scale and whether an off-page connectoris scaled, rotated, and mirrored when it is inserted in a drawing.

To create an off-page connector and add it to the tool palette

NOTE Make sure that the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and thatthe active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new component.


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the off-pageconnector (Non Engineering Items ➤ Connectors ➤ Off Page Connector).

4 Right-click Off Page Connector. Click New.

5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new off-pageconnector.

6 Click OK.

7 Expand the Off Page Connector node, and select the new off-pageconnector.


9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, change the properties that make thenew off-page connector unique (for example, you can change the color).Click OK.

10 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, locatethe style you just created (in this example, OffPageConnectorStyle2).


11 Click Add to Tool Palette.

The new style is added to the active tool palette. It can be used just likethe default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and is included inreports.

12 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Configure Plant 3D DWG SettingsAs part of your Plant 3D DWG setup, you can configure certain behaviors towhich all designers using this project adhere.

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D)Create custom settings for export and import that include any combinationof Plant 3D classes.

Share AutoCAD Plant 3D data with other applications by mapping AutoCADPlant 3D properties to correspond with similar properties in other programs.

NOTE You can export and import Data Manager information only when the DataManager view is configured for object type (class). You cannot export and importwhen the Data Manager view is based on area.


Understand Export and Import Settings

You can export and import data using the default Displayed Data setting. Thissetting exports and imports data for the active node in the Data Manager treeview, with or without child node data.

In some cases, however, you want to be more selective with the data youexport and import. For example, you want to export only nozzles and valves.You can use export and import settings to create custom settings that includeonly the classes you choose.

You can also use export and import settings to move data to and from otherapplications. You use external data mapping to map classes and properties tothe data structure in the other application.

You create export and import settings at the project level in Project Setup.You use one setting for both export and import, which simplifies the processof exporting data, externally editing the data, and importing the data back.After you create an export and import setting, you can later modify or deleteit.

Export to and Import from Other Programs

One common reason to create a custom export and import setting is forexporting and importing data to and from other programs. For example, youwant to export data to AutoCAD Electrical. Because the two programs havedifferent data structures, you map the classes and properties in AutoCAD Plant3D to the classes and properties in the other program.

Set up External Data Mapping

You set up external data mapping in the Export and Import Settings dialogbox when creating or modifying an export and import setting. You specifythe classes and properties to include and enter external class and propertynames. You also identify each property to be used as a unique identifier (UID)for each specified class, and map property values.

A one-to-one mapping between every class and property is not required. ManyPlant 3D objects can be mapped to the same external object. To achieve thismapping, enter the same external object name for all Plant 3D objects thatcorrespond to the same objects in other applications.

For example, AutoCAD Electrical uses a single table called COMP for allequipment. AutoCAD Plant 3D, however, uses numerous tables and objectsto classify the various categories of equipment. While interacting withAutoCAD Electrical, you map every Equipment object to an external object

Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) | 141

called COMP. You then map every equipment property to some commonproperties in COMP.

Export and import share common property value mappings. When you exportdata, the mappings transform data to a format required by the externalapplication. When you import data, the mappings transform the external datainto a format required by AutoCAD Plant 3D. Thus mappings provide atwo-way mechanism for a continuous data exchange between applications.

In some cases, applications can contain erroneous or duplicate data. Theimport and export process uses a unique identifier (UID) to identify specificrecords. If the imported data contains duplicate records, the most recentrecords overwrite the previous records. AutoCAD Plant 3D generally prohibitsduplicate records. However, if AutoCAD Plant 3D encounters duplicate records,it exports them as multiple records and the importing application coordinatesthem.

To create export and import settings


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. ClickExport and Import Settings.

3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click New.

4 In the New Export and Import Settings dialog box, under Name, enter aname for the export and import setting (for example: All Equipment).


5 Under Description, enter a description for the setting (for example: Exportonly Equipment).

6 In the Plant 3D Classes tree view, expand the nodes to display the Plant3D Classes you want to export and import (for example: expand Pipingand Equipment. Select all items under Equipment)

7 If this setting is for exporting to and importing from another program,see “To set up external data mapping.” Otherwise, click OK.

To set up external data mapping

You can map property values when creating export and import settings or bymodifying an existing setting.


Project Setup.




4 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Name, enter a new name (optional).

■ Under Description, enter a new description (optional).

■ In the Plant 3D tree view, expand the classes and select the check boxfor the class you want to configure for external data mapping.

■ Under External Data Mapping, in the External Class Name box, entera name that corresponds to similar classes in the other program (forexample: if the program equates Column with Columns, select theColumns check box in the Plant 3D Classes tree view and enter Columnin the External Class Name box). Repeat this process for each classyou want to configure for external data mapping.

■ Under Properties, in the External Property column, click the externalproperty you want to change. Enter the new name (for example: clickthe ModelNumber external property and enter Model).


Repeat this process for each external property you want to change.

■ To make a property a unique identifier (UID), select the UID checkbox corresponding to the property. PnPID is a UID by default. If theother program recognizes a different identifier, you can change thissetting.

■ In the Value Mapping column, click the cell corresponding to theproperty you want to map. Click the [...] button.

5 In the Map Property Values dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Plant 3D Property column, enter the Plant 3D property values(for example: in the Plant 3D Property ModelNumber column, enterP1, P2, S1, and S2).

■ In the External Property column, enter corresponding property valuesfor the other program (for example: enter Model1, Model2, Model1, andModel2).


6 Click OK.

7 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, repeat the valuemapping process for each property you want to map. When you finishmapping, click OK to close the Modify Export and Import Settings dialogbox.

To modify an export and import setting




3 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, you can:

■ Edit the name of the Export and Import Settings as necessary.

■ Edit the description as necessary.

4 In the Plant 3D Classes tree view, modify the Plant 3D Classes to exportand import. For example, you can clear one or more check boxes.

5 On the External Data Mapping pane, modify the class name in theExternal Class Name box, if necessary. Make other changes, as needed,to the external data mapping settings.

6 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Export and Import Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Plant 3D PathsYou can change the default locations where users access Plant 3D project data(such as models, spec sheets, ortho drawings, and template files).

The Paths panel includes:

■ Plant 3D model DWG directory. Sets the location of the project modelDWG directory.

■ Spec sheets directory. Sets the location of the specification sheets directory.

■ Orthographic output directory (DWG). Sets the location of the orthographicdrawing output directory.

■ Orthographic template file (DWT). Defines the ortho template file that isused when new ortho drawings in a project are created.

■ Equipment templates directory. Sets the location of the equipmentsnapshots directory.

■ Drawing template file (DWT). Defines the template file that is used whennew drawings in a project are created.

To define new project paths


Project Setup.


2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Paths pane, do one of the following:

■ Enter the file paths for the directories you want to change.


4 Click OK.

To set up pipe spec files


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup dialog box tree view, expand 3D Piping DWG Settings.Click Paths.

3 On the Paths pane, under Spec Sheets Directory, enter the path to thelocation of your spec files or click the [...] button to browse to the location.

4 Click OK to close the Project Setup dialog box.

Set Plant 3D Paths | 149

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Paths (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager(Plant 3D)

You can customize the way the Data Manager displays data for projects ordrawings.

You can arrange the tree view in the Data Manager according to yourrequirements. First you specify whether the top-level nodes are areas (thedefault) or object types (classes). Then you specify the properties you want toview at various sub-levels.

For example, you can arrange a tree view with Area at the top level,Manufacturer at the second level, and Model Number at the third level. Oryou can arrange a tree view with Piping Equipment at the top level,Manufacturer at the second level, and Model Number at the third level.

In a KKS environment, you can base a view on a Unit, SystemCode,SystemNumber, EquipmentCode, and EquipmentNumber hierarchy.

To create a customized view for the Data Manager


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click DataManager Configuration.


3 Under Default Data Manager view, do one of the following:

■ To order the tree view by area, click Area (Drawing Property).

■ To order the tree view by object type, click Object Type.

4 Under Customized Views, click Create View.

5 Under A New Customized View, in the Name box, enter a name for yourview.

6 Under A New Customized View, define the scope of your view:

■ To expand the scope of your view to include all project data, clickProject Data.

■ To limit the scope of your view to the current drawing data, clickDrawing Data.

■ Click New Level.


■ Under Class, expand the appropriate node and child nodes to locateand click a class for Level 1 (for example: Piping and Equipment).

■ Under Properties, click a class property (for example: Manufacturer).

■ Click OK.

Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) | 151

8 Click New Level and repeat step 7 to add the number of levels you wantin the customized view. When you finish adding levels to the customizedview, in the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.

NOTE For best results in creating customized views, choose properties that areshared by all Plant 3D objects.

To delete a customized view for the Data Manager


Project Setup.

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click DataManager Configuration.

3 On the Customized Views pane, click the customized view you want todelete. Click Delete View.

4 In the Delete Customized View message, click Yes.

To open a customized view in the Data Manager

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager.

2 In the Data Manager, click the drop-down list and click a customizedview.

The Data Manager tree view displays the customized data.

3 To display relevant details on the right pane, click a node in the tree view.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Data Manager Configuration (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure Settings for Isometric DrawingsYou can specify common project settings for isometric drawing files.

The Isogen settings available for configuration include:

■ File locations for drawings and the line designation table (LDT)

■ Dimensions

■ Sloped lines

■ Labels

■ Title block

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 uses the full Isogen application and exposes the mostcommonly set Isogen configuration options. All Isogen configuration files aresupported.

Set Up File Names and File PathsYou can change the default locations where users access Isogen data (such astitle blocks and templates).

Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 153

You can configure the following paths for each iso type:

■ Template files directory. Contains configuration files for the specified isotype.

■ Isogen title block. Sets the location where title block data is stored for thespecified iso type.

■ Quick iso output directory. Defines the location where quick isometricdrawings are stored for the specified iso type.

■ Production iso output directory. Defines the location where productionisometric drawings are stored for the specified iso type.

■ Line designation table (LDT). (Optional) Activates and defines a worksheetfile that can be mapped to pipelines and their properties.

To set or change isometric drawing file locations


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and IsogenSettings. Click Paths.


3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, under Iso Type, click the isotype you want to change drawing file locations for.

4 Do any of the following:

■ Enter location paths for the template files directory, Isogen title block,quick iso output directory, and the production iso output directory.


5 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Paths (Isogen Settings)

Configure the Line Designation TableYou can use an optional line designation table that specifies a worksheet name,header row, and line number column to pass pipe line data to the isometricdrawing.

You can use a line designation table to specify data (such as design pressure,design temperature, and so on) for use as attributes in the isometric title block.Typical data in a user-defined line designation table includes:

■ Service

■ Maximum pressure and maximum temperature

■ Design pressure and design temperature

To configure a line designation table


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings andIsogen Settings. Click Paths.


3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, under Line Designation Table(LDT), select the Use LDT Data from XLS check box and do the following:

■ Under LDT file, click the [...] button and browse to the location wherethe LDT file you want to use is located. Click the LDT file and clickOpen.

■ Under Line Designation Table (LDT), enter the worksheet name, headerrow number, and line number column from the LDT file.

■ Click View LDT to display a preview of the line designation table.

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Create a New Iso TypeYou can create an iso type based on an existing iso type.

You define a unique name for the new iso type. AutoCAD Plant 3D bases theconfiguration settings for the new type on the existing iso type settings. Aftercreating the iso type, you can change the configuration settings.

To create a new iso type


Project Setup.


2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings andIsogen Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, click New Type.

4 In the Create Iso Type dialog box, under Name, enter a name for the newiso type.

5 In the Base on Existing Type list, click an existing iso type on which tobase the new type.

6 Click Create.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Create Iso Type Dialog Box

Configure the Display of DimensionsYou can change the default dimension style, value location, and gasketdimensions displayed for any isometric type.

You can include or exclude gaskets and configure overall dimensions to stopat branches or go across them.

To set up dimensions


Project Setup.


2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings andIsogen Settings. Click Dimensions.

3 On the Dimensions pane, in the Iso Type list, select the iso type you wantto set dimensions for.

4 Under Dimension Style, click String Dimensions or CompositeDimensions.

5 Under Dimension Value Location, click Inline dimension or Above LineDimension.

6 Under Gasket dimension, click Include Gaskets or Exclude Gaskets.

7 To control whether the iso type displays overall dimensions, underMiscellaneous Options, select the Overall Dimensions check box and dothe following:

■ For each item in the Valve Type column, select a Dimension Style.

■ To control whether elbows are drawn with square corners or roundedcorners, under Elbows select Square or Rounded.

■ To control whether bends are drawn with square corners or roundedcorners, under Bends, select Square or Rounded.

8 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Dimensions Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Configure the Display of Isometric Sloped LinesYou can change the default display for sloped line falls and skews for anyisometric type.

You can configure 2D skews and 3D skews to display as boxes or triangles,and you can specify the maximum number of degrees at which falls display.

To set up sloped lines for an iso type


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings andIsogen Settings. Click Sloped Lines.

3 On the Sloped Lines pane, in the Iso Type list, select an iso type.

4 Under Falls, in the Show Falls as drop-down list, select a falls behavioroption.

5 In the Show as Fall Up to list, click the up and down arrows to specifythe maximum value at which falls display.

6 Under 2D Skews, click Skew Box, Skew Triangle + Normal Dimensioning,or Skew Triangle + Alternative Dimensioning.

7 Under 3D Skews, click 3D Box or 2D Triangle + Fall Indicator.


8 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Sloped Lines Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Set Up Isometric LabelsYou can change the display of annotations for the cut piece list, spool labels,pipe supports, end connection coordinates, and weld numbering.

To set up labels for an iso type


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings andIsogen Settings. Click Labels.

3 On the Labels pane, in the Iso Type list, select an iso type.

4 To control whether the cut piece list is displayed, under Cut Piece List,select the Display Cut Piece List check box. Click As Numeric or AsAlphabetic.

5 To control whether the spool label is displayed, under Spool Label, selectthe Display Spool Label check box. Click As Numeric or As Alphabetic.In the Box Enclosure Style list, click a box enclosure style to enclose thespool label.


6 To control whether pipe supports are displayed, under Pipe Supports,select the Display Pipe Supports check box. Click Without Dimensions,With Overall Dimensions, or With String Dimensions.

7 Under Date, in the drop-down list, click a date format to display. Todisplay the date in four digit year format, select the Use Four Digit YearFormat check box.

8 Under End Connection Coordinates, select check boxes for the ShowCoordinates For options you want.

9 To control whether weld numbering is displayed, under Weld Numbering,select the Show Weld Numbers check box. Click For All Welds, ForFabrication Welds Only, or For Erection Welds Only. In the Box EnclosureStyle list, click a box enclosure style to enclose weld numbering.

10 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Labels Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Configure the Title BlockYou can define the title block for each isometric type.


You have control over the placement and display of specific output for thefollowing items displayed in the title block:

■ Attributes (such as project data) and client information (such as companyname and primary contact)

■ Bill of materials

■ Layers

■ Drawing area, including overall plot area and north arrow setup

You configure each of these items individually for each iso type.

When creating custom iso types, you can base the new type on an existingiso type with configuration settings that most closely match your desiredsettings.

Configure Isometric Title Block LayersYou can configure which layer pipes, fittings, and other components are placedon when an iso is created. You can put this information on any layer that isdefined for the title block.

To configure the title block layers


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings andIsogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block.

3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso typeyou want to configure, and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Layers Setup.

5 In the Isogen Layer Setup dialog box, in the Pipe list, enter values for theMin size and Max Size. For each row in the list, click the Layer drop-downand specify a layer.

■ To add rows to the table, click in the Pipe list title bar.

■ To delete rows from the table, click in the Pipe list title bar.


NOTE Set the first row at min size 0, and the last row at max size max.

In the Fittings Default list, enter values for Min size, Max Size, Layer, andScale.

■ To add rows to the table, click in the Fittings Default list title bar.

■ To delete rows from the table, click in the Fittings Default list titlebar.

NOTE Set the first row at min size 0, and the last row at max size max.

6 In the Fittings Special list, specify a layer and scale for each type.

7 In the Other Items list, specify a layer for each type.

8 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Configure Title Block Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)

Isogen Layer Setup Dialog Box

Configure Isometric Title Block AttributesYou can configure title block format settings such as style, justification, andtext height for the attributes that make up the title block.


Attributes include general properties and custom category data as definedduring project setup.

To configure the title block attributes


Project Setup.


3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso typeyou want to configure and click Setup Title Block.

4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Attributes Setup.

5 In the Insert Title Block Attributes dialog box, in the list, click an attributecategory.

6 Under Attribute Names, click the attribute you want to add to the titleblock.

7 Under format, change the Style, Justify, and Text Height boxes as desired.

8 Click Place.

9 Click in the drawing area to place the attribute.

10 In the Insert Title Block Attributes dialog box, repeat steps 5 through 9to insert additional attributes or click Close.

NOTE You cannot edit previously placed LDT attributes in the title block. Use atext editor to open the *.atr and *.pos files in the iso title block folder and manuallydelete the unwanted attributes.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Insert Title Block Attributes Dialog Box

Configure Isometric Title Block Drawing AreaYou can configure the plot and drawing area of the title block and set northarrow placement.

The drawing area is the region in the drawing to which the isometric graphicsare constrained.

To configure the title block drawing area


Project Setup.



4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Drawing Area Setup.

5 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set Drawing Area, clickDefine Overall Plot Area.


6 Click in the drawing area of the title block drawing to pick the secondpoint of the defining rectangle.

7 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set Drawing Area, clickDefine Iso Drawing Area.

8 In the drawing area, click within the area defined in step 6 to pick thefirst point of the defining rectangle. Click another point in the drawingarea within the area defined in step 6 to define the second point of thedefining rectangle.

9 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set North Direction, clickan arrow button to define the north arrow direction.

10 Select Show Default Arrow Symbol and Use Enclosing Box check boxesif you want to place the arrow symbol in the drawing.

11 Click Place Arrow Symbol.

12 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Set Up Drawing Area Dialog Box

Configure Isometric Bill of MaterialsYou can configure specific properties for the bill of materials.


You can use Type 1 Isogen bill of materials settings or define custom title blockproperties for the bill of materials. For custom title block configuration, youcan specify the text style, sort order, and the field settings for data items.

You can add custom data items to the bill of materials. Standard fields youcan add include BOM part number, quantity, component code, and so on.You can also add user attributes to the list of standard fields, such as the tagor number properties for a specified class definitions.

During setup, you can view a preview of configuration changes you make tothe bill of materials.

To configure general settings for a custom bill of materials


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and IsogenSettings. Click Configure Title Block.


4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click BOM Setup.

5 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, on the General tab, clearthe Use Type 1 Bill of Materials check box.

6 Under Layer, click a layer.

7 Under font settings, do the following:

■ In the Font drop-down list, click a font.

■ Under Text Thickness, click an option.

■ Under Text Height, enter a whole or decimal value (in millimeters).

■ Under Vertical Spacing, enter a whole or decimal value (inmillimeters).

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to specify font settings for each layer.

9 (Optional) To view a preview of configuration changes you made, clickPreview.

10 Click OK.


To configure sort order for a custom bill of materials


Project Setup.





6 Click the Sort Order tab.

7 Click Continuous or Split Fabrication and Erection Components and doone of the following:

■ Under Continuous BOM Settings, in the Direction drop-down list,click Up or Down. In the Maximum Rows box, enter a maximum rownumber. In the Start Position box, click the Pick Point button and usethe pointing device to click an insertion point in the drawing area toindicate the start position.

■ Under Split BOM Settings, in the Direction drop-down list, click Upor Down. In the Maximum Rows box, enter a maximum row number.In the Start Position box, click the Pick Point button and use thepointing device to click an insertion point in the drawing area toindicate the start position.


9 Click OK.

To configure fields to include on a custom bill of materials


Project Setup.






6 Click the Data Items tab.

7 Under Select Fields to Include, select check boxes for the fields you wantto include on the BOM.

8 Under Specify Ordering and Locations, do the following:

■ In the Maximum Characters column, enter the maximum number ofcharacters you want to display for each data item.

■ In the Column Width column, enter a column width or click the PickPoint button and use the pointing device to specify a column widthin the drawing area.

9 Click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to specify the order of data itemson the list.


11 Click OK.

To add a user attribute to the bill of materials


Project Setup.






6 Click the Data Items tab.

7 Under Select Fields to Include, click Add User Attribute.


■ Under Class, expand items in the list and click the desired class.

■ Under Property, click an item.

■ Click OK.

9 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager



Set Up Isogen Bill of Materials Dialog Box

Select Class Property Dialog Box (Annotation Format Setup Dialog Box)

Configure Automated Layer and Color AssignmentsYou can specify an automated scheme for assigning layer and color values topipe lines and associated inline components.

Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments | 171

Layers provide a convenient method for isolating line runs or services in acongested area. You can turn layers on or off to view the specific objects thatinterest you.

You can create layer and color assignment schemes based on any Plant 3Dobject property. Pipe lines and inline components follow the scheme that iscurrently in effect. End of line components, such as pumps or tanks, do notfollow the scheme.

Understand Automated Layer and Color Schemes

Among the many automated layer and color schemes you can set up are thefollowing:

■ Layer by line number and color by pipe size

■ Layer by line number and color by pipe spec

■ Layer by pipe spec and color by pipe size

■ Layer by service and color by pipe size

If you set up an automated scheme, pipes and pipe fittings that you place ina model follow that scheme.

Understand the Effects of Enabling or Modifying an Automated Scheme

Remember the following guidelines when setting up an automated layer andcolor scheme:

■ You can create automated schemes based on a list of pipe properties.

■ You can add to the list of properties by which you can assign colors bycreating a new selection list. For more information, see Set Up SelectionLists on page 210

■ You can change to a different automated layer and color assignment schemethrough the Project Setup dialog box after initially creating a project.

■ Automated schemes affect all Plant 3d objects except end-of-linecomponents such as pumps or tanks.

■ If you change the automated scheme, the changes appear immediately inthe open model. Other project models update when you open them.

■ If you do not enable an automated scheme (if you clear the check box forAutomate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects), thedefault AutoCAD layer and color settings are in effect.


To enable or disable automated layer and color assignments


Project Setup.

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer andColor Settings.

3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, select or clear thecheck box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When CreatingObjects.

4 Click OK.

NOTE When the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments WhenCreating Objects is cleared, default AutoCAD layer and color settings are in effect.

To create an automated layer and color assignment scheme


Project Setup.


3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, do the following:

■ Make sure the check box labeled Automate Layer And ColorAssignments When Creating Objects is selected.

■ Click New.


4 In the New Automation Scheme dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Name box, enter a name for your automated scheme.

■ In the Start With list, click an existing scheme (for example: Default).

■ Click OK.


■ In the Assign Layer By list, click a property (for example: Spec).

■ In the Assign Color By list: click a property or leave the settingunchanged (for example: Nominal Diameter).

■ In the Color column, click the color you want to change. In theAutoCAD Select Color dialog box, click a new color. Click OK.


For more information about the Select Color dialog box, see “Set theCurrent Color” in the AutoCAD Help system.

■ Click Save Changes.

■ To replace the default scheme with the new scheme, click Set Current.

6 Click OK.

The new automated scheme is reflected in all open models. All othermodels in the project reflect this change when you open them.

To change to a different automated layer and color assignment scheme


Project Setup.



■ Make sure that the check box labeled Automate Layer And ColorAssignments When Creating Objects is selected.

■ Under Automation Schemes, click an automated scheme. Click SetCurrent.

4 Click OK.

The new automated scheme is reflected in all open models. All othermodels in the project reflect this change when you open them.

To delete an automated layer and color assignment scheme


Project Setup.




■ Make sure that the check box labeled Automate Layer And ColorAssignments When Creating Objects is selected.

■ Under Automation Schemes, select an automated scheme. Click Delete.

NOTE You cannot delete the scheme that is set as current.

4 Click OK.

To add an option to the Assign Color By list


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click Pipe RunComponent.



■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example:SpecNew). The name cannot contain spaces.

■ Under Display Name, enter the name that you want displayed for thenew property in the Data Manager or Properties palette (for example:SpecNew).

■ Under Choose a Type, click Selection List.


6 Click OK.


8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selectionlist (for example: Spec). Click OK.


10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: CS300)and a description of the value, if necessary.


12 Click OK.


14 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, in the Assign ColorBy list, click the new item.


15 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Layer and Color Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Configure ConnectorsYou can customize the conditions, fittings, and fasteners used to make aconnection.

Connectors are the components and fasteners that you use to join pipe. Youcan set the conditions that allow pipe to connect and identify the componentsand fasteners used to make a connection.

In AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, joint types are either simple, or compound.

A simple joint specifies fasteners (for example: welds or bolt sets) that are usedto hold pipe together. Default simple joint types, such as welded, flanged, andsocketed joints, are provided for connecting pipe with matching nominaldiameter. Parts that support the connection (for example: gaskets) are alsospecified in a simple joint.

A compound joint specifies a connection component or adapter (for example:a weld-neck flange) that allows pipe to connect. Default compound joint typesinclude AutoFlange, which adds a flange connection component when thediameter, pressure class, and facing of the pipe and fitting match.

For example, if you connect pipe with a plain end to a flanged valve there isno simple joint type that can connect PL to FL end types. The AutoFlangecompound joint type adds a Flange connection component to the line, whichis connected at each end by two simple joint types.

Configure Connectors | 179

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 does not support customizing the list of fastenersavailable in a simple joint. In AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 you cannot add to the Plant3D class definitions.

To modify a joint type


Project Setup.

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings ➤ Connections.Click Joint Settings.

3 In the Simple Joints list, click a joint type (for example: Buttweld).

4 Click Modify.

5 In the Modify Joint dialog box, click Add Property.

6 In the Select Class Property dialog box, click a Property (for example: Port ➤ Pressure Class).

7 Click OK.

8 In the Modify Joint dialog box, click Modify.

9 In the Project Setup dialog box, Click OK.

NOTE If you add pressure class match to a buttweld joint, pipe and fittingsmust be the same pressure class to connect. Existing buttweld joints are notmodified.

To add a joint type


Project Setup.

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings ➤ Connections.Click Joint Settings.

3 Click Add.

4 In the Add Joint dialog box, enter a joint name (for example:FlangedGroundStrap).

5 Under connection settings, select one or more End 1 connection types(for example: FL).

6 Select one or more End 2 connection types (for example: FL).


7 Select one or more Fasteners (for example: Gasket, Boltset).

8 Under Property Matches, click Add Property.

9 In the Select Class Property dialog box, under Class, select Port.

10 Under Properties, select Nominal Diameter.

11 Click OK.

12 Repeat steps 8 through 11 to add additional match properties (forexample: Pressure Class, Facing).

13 Click Add.

14 In the Project Setup dialog box, Click OK.

NOTE You can use the Substitute grip to exchange compatible connectortypes. Press the CTRL key to select sub-objects in a compound joint.

Configure Connectors | 181

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

PLANTENDCODES

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Connections - Joint Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Manage Endcode Dialog Box

Add Endcode Dialog Box

Modify Endcode Dialog Box

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and PropertiesYou can customize the default mappings of P&ID and Plant 3D classes andproperties to reflect your company requirements.

You can also add new mappings at any time.

Understand Mapping

You can place the Plant 3D equivalent of a P&ID object in a model if the twoobjects are mapped appropriately. The AutoCAD Plant 3D predefined mappingscheme provides a starting point for any customized mappings you require.

In the following example, the P&ID class Gate Valve is mapped to the Plant3D class Valve (gate). When you insert the Plant 3D Valve (gate), the mappedproperties and their respective values become part of the model and areviewable in the Data Manager.


NOTE In this example, the value Jackson’s is not inserted in the model becausethe Supplier property has no mapping.

Plant 3D Property andValue

P&ID Property andValue

Plant 3DClass

P&ID Class

Valve (gate)Gate Valve

Description: A valve of thegate type

Description: A valve of thegate type

Manufacturer: Roper’sManufacturer: Roper’s

ItemCode: 20303ModelNumber: 20303

Nominal diameterSize:18”

Supplier (no mapping)Supplier (no mapping):Jackson’s

NOTE Some Plant 3D properties are spec-based and thus unavailable for mapping.On the P&ID Mapping pane, under 3D Classes, Property Mapping, spec-basedproperties are marked with an asterisk (*). They are available for validation only.

View P&ID and Plant 3D Object Data in the Data Manager

You can view current P&ID drawing data and the corresponding current Plant3D drawing data in the Data Manager. Following is an example of the P&IDLine List showing drawing contents that you can place in a Plant 3D model.

Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 183

Following is an example of the P&ID valve information from the same drawingas shown in the Data Manager.

Following is an example of the corresponding Plant 3D valve information asshown in the Data Manager after the component has been placed in the model.

NOTE To view this type of comparison, you can set the Plant 3D Data Managerconfiguration to order the tree view by object type instead of area. See ConfigureCustomized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150

Map a P&ID Class to Multiple Plant 3D Classes

You can map a P&ID class to more than one Plant 3D class. For example, inthe default mapping scheme, the P&ID class Vessel is mapped both to the Plant3D class Vessel and to Tank (Vessel).


To edit an existing mapping


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. ClickP&ID Object Mapping.

3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, do the following:

■ Under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click the desired P&ID object(for example: Gate Valve).

■ Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Plant 3D Class Mappings list, click thecurrent mapping (for example: Valve Gate-Inline, Gate-Angle,Gate-3-Way).

■ Click Edit.


4 In the Select Plant 3D Class Mapping dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Plant 3D Classes, expand the tree. Click a class (for example:Valve).

■ Select the Map To All Subtypes of This Class check box, or, under MapTo One or More Specific Subtypes of This Class, select or clearappropriate check boxes.

■ Click OK.

5 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under Plant 3D Classes, in theProperty Mapping table, do the following:

■ In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down lists, click theappropriate values to adjust.

■ To set the validation process to check the property mappings for themapped item, select the check box labeled Check This Item During3D To PID Validation.To set the validation process to ignore the property mappings of thisitem, clear the check box. For more information on mapping and


validation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page360.

■ Click OK.

To delete an existing mapping


Project Setup.


3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, do the following:

■ Under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click a P&ID object (forexample: Gate Valve).


■ Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Plant 3D Class Mappings list, click thecurrent mapping (for example: Valve Gate-Inline, Gate-Angle,Gate-3-Way).

■ Click Delete.

■ When prompted to confirm the deletion, click Yes.

To map a new P&ID object to a Plant 3D object

When a new P&ID object class is introduced during a project, you can mapit to a corresponding Plant 3D object class.


Project Setup.



3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under P&ID Classes, expand the treeand click the new P&ID object (for example: New_Valve).

4 Under Plant 3D Classes, click Add.

5 In the Select Plant 3D Class Mapping dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Plant 3D Classes, expand the tree. Click a class (for example:Valve).

■ Select the Map To All Subtypes of This Class check box, or, under MapTo One or More Specific Subtypes of This Class, select or clearappropriate check boxes.

■ Click OK.


6 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under Plant 3D Classes, in theProperty Mapping table, do the following:

■ In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down list, clickappropriate properties to correspond with properties in the P&IDProperty column (for example: match Manufacturer to Manufacturer).

■ To set the validation process to check the property mappings for themapped item, select the check box labeled Check This Item During3D To PID Validation.To set the validation process to ignore the property mappings of thisitem, clear the check box. For more information on mapping andvalidation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page360.

■ Click OK.


To create a new property mapping

When a new P&ID property is added during a project, you can map it to acorresponding Plant 3D property.


Project Setup.


3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under P&ID Classes, expand the tree,and click the P&ID object to which you have added a property (forexample: Valve).


4 Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Property Mapping table, do the following:

■ In the P&ID Property column, locate the property you have added(for example, Material).

■ In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down list, click thecorresponding 3D property (for example, Material).

5 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


P&ID Object Mapping (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D ObjectsClass definitions specify the attributes and properties of Plant 3D objects.

Class definitions are divided into the following families:

■ P3D Line Group. Includes line groups.

■ Piping and Equipment. Includes equipment, pipe run components, andfasteners.

■ Steel Structure. Includes structure members, railings, ladders, and so on.

Although you cannot add class definitions, you can modify the followingproperties:

■ Properties. The values assigned to a Plant 3D object class definition todetermine how it looks and behaves in a 3D model, and the values thatare attached to a Plant 3D object (such as default value, description,substitution, supported standards, and so on).

■ Tag format. The information that comprises a unique tag for a componentor line.

■ Annotation format. The information that comprises an annotation for aPlant 3D object on an orthographic drawing.

Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 193

To modify a class definition for a Plant 3D object


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you find the item (for example: Pipingand Equipment ➤ Equipment ➤ Heater) whose definition you want tochange.

4 Under Properties, do the following:

■ Change the value for the Display Name property. (This informationis displayed in the Data Manager.)

■ Change the value for the Default Value property.

■ Add or remove custom properties as needed for the class or linedefinition.

■ Change the values of other properties as needed (such as taggingformat, annotation style, and so on).


5 Under Tag Format, add, modify, or remove tagging formats associatedwith the specified class or line definition.

6 Under Annotation, add, modify, or remove annotation styles associatedwith the specified class or line definition.

7 Click OK.

To specify property visibility and read-only status for the Data Manager


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you find the item whose property valuesyou want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment ➤

Heater).


4 Under Properties, do the following:

■ In the Read Only column, select the check boxes for those propertiesyou want presented as read-only in the Data Manager.

■ In the Visible in Area View column, select the check boxes for thoseproperties you want displayed in the Data Manager for tree viewsordered by area. You can right-click and click Select All or Clear Allas needed.

■ In the Visible Object View column, select the check boxes for thoseproperties you want displayed in the Data Manager for tree viewsordered by class (object type). You can right-click and click Select Allor Clear All as needed.

5 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Plant 3D Class Definitions (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)

Set Up Properties (Plant 3D)You can set up properties, which store information about objects in a 3Ddrawing.

Plant 3D objects contain properties that control how the objects look whenplaced into a Plant 3D drawing. These properties also store non-graphicalinformation that can be extracted out of the drawing. Properties for a Plant3D object class definition can be defined as one of the following data types:

■ String. Permits a free-form text value for a property.

■ Numeric. Verifies that only a positive or negative number is entered for aproperty.

■ Boolean. Permits a choice between true and false.

■ Symbol List. (unavailable for Plant 3D objects) Defines a list of choices thatcontrol the symbol for a component in a P&ID drawing. This option isavailable only for P&ID objects when more than one symbol is associatedwith a class.

■ Selection List. Defines a list of property values. If a value is not displayedin the predefined list, it can be entered as free-form text.

■ Acquisition. Defines a rule stating that a component property acquires itsvalue from another property. For example, a rule states that a hand valve


acquires its size from the corresponding property of a line. The source canbe chosen from class, project, or drawing properties.

NOTE When you set up properties for a project, make sure no one else isaccessing that project. If others are working in the project, your changes arenot saved.

To add a property to a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property you want to add.




■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property. The namecannot contain any spaces.

■ Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed forthe new property when using the Data Manager or Properties palette.

■ Under Choose a Type, choose one of the available data types.

6 Click OK.

If you specified Selection List or Symbol List, the appropriate dialog boxis displayed to let you create either a selection list or symbol list.

If you specified Acquisition, the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed,where you specify the source from which the property value is acquired.

7 Click OK.

To modify a property for a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property you want to edit.


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the propertyyou want to edit. Do one of the following:

■ Under Property Description, click the box and enter a new description.

■ Under Default Value, either click the box and enter a new value or,in the drop-down list, click a value. If the default value is Acquisition,in the drop-down list, click an appropriate item.

■ If the property type is List, click Edit to change the selection or symbollist that is assigned to the property.

■ Under Acquisition, click the [...] button and click Add AcquisitionRule. In the Select Data Source dialog box, specify the source wherethe property value is acquired.

NOTE To change the name of the property or its type, delete the propertyand then add it again.

5 Click OK.

To delete a property from a class definition


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property you want to delete.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the propertyyou want to delete. Click Remove.

NOTE You can delete the property only if it is defined at the specified classlevel. If the property is inherited from a parent class, the Remove button isunavailable.


6 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Properties (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Property AcquisitionWhen you specify Acquisition as a property type, you set up a rule statingthat the property acquires its value from another property.

The acquisition source can be another class, project, or drawing property.

Acquisition ensures consistency among component property values. If thesource value changes, all components set to acquire that value change as well.Property acquisition is also useful for maintaining consistent tagging. Whenyou change a source value, tag formats that are based on acquired propertiesupdate automatically throughout the project.


Understand Property Acquisition Rules

You can choose without restriction any drawing property or project propertyas the source of an acquisition rule. Class properties, however, because theyare specification-based, would rarely be set up to acquire values from otherproperties.

If, however, you do specify a class property as the source, make sure that theacquiring class and the source class are connected.

You can set up property acquisition rules when the following relationshipsexist:

■ Pipe Run Component and P3D Line Group

■ Fasteners and P3D Line Group

■ Nozzles and Equipment

The following properties have acquisition rules set by default. You can viewthem when you create a new project:


P3dLineGroup.InsulationThicknessPipeRunComponent.InsulationThickness

P3dLineGroup.InsulationTypePipeRunComponent.InsulationType

P3dLineGroup.ServicePipeRunCompoment.Service

P3dLineGroup.InsulationThicknessFasterners.InsulationThickness

P3dLineGroup.InsulationTypeFasteners.InsulationType

P3dLineGroup.ServiceFasterners.Service

Drawing.General.AreaEquipment.Area

Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode

A property that is set to acquire its value from another property is in Acquiremode. However, you can switch this property into Override mode and editthe value manually. Once a property is in Override mode, its value is no longeracquired from another source.


In the program, an icon next to the property indicates whether the propertyis in Override mode or Acquire mode. The icons appear in the Propertiespalette, the Data Manager, and the Assign Tag dialog box. When the Overrideicon is displayed, you can edit the value.

■ The property is in Acquire mode.

■ The property is in Override mode

Understand Initialization Only

Select Acquisition (the default) to set up a property to acquire its value fromanother property. You can also specify Initialization Only, which sets theacquisition to occur only once (when the component is first initialized). Afterinitialization, the property switches to Override mode. When the property isin Override mode, you can edit the value manually because it is no longeracquired from another source.

To set up a new property acquisition rule


Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definitionwhose property acquisition rule you want to create (for example: Pipe RunComponent ➤ Valve).

4 In the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.



■ Under Property Name, enter the property name (for example:PipelineDescription).

■ Under Display Name, enter the new property name you want displayedin the Data Manager or the Properties palette (for example:PipelineDescription).

■ Under Choose A Type, click Acquisition. Click OK.



■ Under Categories, locate and click an item (for example: P3d LineGroup).

■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: Description). Click OK.


To add an acquisition rule for an existing property


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class containingthe property whose acquisition property you want to change (for example:Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).


4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, click a property (for example: Type).



■ Under Categories, expand Piping and Equipment.

■ Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe).

■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: InsulationType). ClickOK.



To edit an acquisition rule for a property


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whoseproperty you want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ PipeRun Component ➤ Pipe).

4 On the Class Settings pane, Under Properties, locate the property whoseacquisition rule you want to edit.



■ Under Categories, expand Piping and Equipment.


■ Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe).

■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: InsulationType). ClickOK.


To remove an acquisition rule from a property


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whoseproperty you want to change (for example: Pipe Run Component ➤ Valve).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whoseacquisition rule you want to remove.

5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button.Click Remove Acquisition Rule.


To override an acquisition property

You can override an acquisition property using the Data Manager or theProperties palette. The following steps describe overriding an acquisitionproperty using the Properties palette.

1 In a drawing, right-click the Plant 3D object whose acquisition rule youwant to override. Click Properties.

2 In the Properties palette, locate the property you want to change. Clickthe field in the right column.

3 Click Acquire Mode. In the flyout menu, click Override Mode.

4 Enter a new value.

5 Close the Properties Palette.


NOTE When you export data from the Data Manager to a Microsoft Excelspreadsheet, you can change the values of properties that are in Acquiremode in Excel. When you import the file into the Data Manager and acceptthe changes, the new values are displayed and the properties are automaticallychanged to Override mode. See Import Modified Acquisition Properties onpage 531

To change how an existing property acquisition rule is applied


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whoseproperty you want to change (for example: Pipe Run Component Valve).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, locate the InsulationThickness property row. In the DefaultValue column, click the box to display the drop-down list. Do either ofthe following:

■ To set the property so that it always acquires its value fromPipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness, click Acquisition (the default).

■ To set the property so that its value is acquired once (when a valve isfirst initialized), click Initialization Only.

NOTE After initialization, a valve's property value changes to Overridemode. Users can edit the property value.

In the Acquisition column, the valve size is displayed as acquired fromPipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThicknessness. If Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThicknesshas a value of 3”, that value appears in the Data Manager for this valve.



Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Properties (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Selection ListsUse selection lists to enforce standard sizes for items such as piping specs,piping sizes, and instrument types, or when you want designers to choosefrom a predefined set of options.

Understand Selection Lists

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a set of selection lists. You can add your ownitems or delete items that are not relevant to your drafting environment. Inthe Data Manager, designers can also enter their own values in the lists.

As part of your project setup tasks, you can set up new selection lists or changethe values of an existing list.

To create a selection list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D objectclass definition (for example: Piping and Equipment).




■ Under Type, click Selection List.

■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example:Pump_Manufacturers). The name cannot contain any spaces.

■ Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed forthe new property (for example: Pump Manufacturers) in the DataManager or Properties palette.

6 Click OK.



8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selectionlist (for example: Manufacturers). Click OK.


10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: Goulds)and a description of the value, if necessary.


12 Click OK.

On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, the selection list is displayedfor the selected class definition. The value displayed in the list is thedefault value for that Plant 3D object.


To modify or delete items in a selection list


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a class definition(for example: Piping and Equipment).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, click the property containing the selection list you want tomodify. Click Edit.

5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click the property whose datayou want to change (for example: Manufacturers).

6 Click Add Row.

7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value and a description of thenew selection list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK.

In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Value, the new selectionlist entry is added.

8 In the Selection List Property dialog box, select a value (for example:Goulds). Click Delete Row.




Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Selection List Property Dialog Box (Properties)

Set Up Tag Formatting (Plant 3D)You can set up tag formats to help designers apply tag elements consistentlythroughout a project cycle.

Many projects require specific tag numbering formats for different Plant 3Dobject. You can define different tag numbering formats for your projects.

You can set up tag formats for equipment, valves, nozzles, instrumentation,pipe lines, and pipe line groups by creating new tag formats or modifyingexisting formats. You select an existing format on which to base the newformat. You can also create a new tag format.

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Class

Tag formats are set up for a class definition project-wide. Most of the defaulttag formats tag items at the class definition level (for example: a class definitiontype, such as equipment).

You can use the property of a class, drawing, or project in the tag format. Forexample, a tag for a component can contain a class property such as Spec, adrawing property such as Area, or a project property such as Project Number.

Tag formats are flexible. You can set them up to reflect the specific needs ofyour company.


Set Up Tag Formatting Using Acquiring Properties

Tag formats can include properties that acquire their values from otherproperties. For example, if a line acquires its Unit value from a project-levelproperty, you can use that acquiring property in the tag format. If the Unitvalue at the project level changes, all tags with that property as a subpart areupdated to reflect that change.

Set Up Tag Formatting for a Pipe Line Group

Pipes are the only components that are automatically grouped. Although pipeline groups are not physical entities, you set up tag formatting for pipe linegroups just as you would for any other component.

The default tag format for a pipe line group is Line Number. You can add otherproperties as needed (for example: Service).

Understand Default Tag Formatting Templates

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides the following tag format templates for you to useor modify to fit with your company tag formatting standards:








Build Tag Formatting Expressions

You can define how tag elements are expressed. For example, you can createan instrument tag of Area-Type-Loop Number_Suffix (for example:


25-FE-1002_A). You can control the formatting of the values that can beassigned when tagging a component or line through expressions.

Using expressions, you can designate whether a value must be entered as textcharacters, numbers, or any combination of text characters and numbers(free-style value).

You can also define an expression to generate a value automatically when adesigner adds a component to a drawing. You can set automatic expressionsto a drawing property or project property.

Understand Tag Uniqueness

In general, a tag property must be unique. Even items of different types musthave unique tags. For example, if you assign the tag A-123 to a pump, youcannot assign the identical tag to a tank.

Two exceptions to tag uniqueness are as follows:

■ Line segment tags can be identical. The tag properties of a line group mustbe unique, but the tag properties of the line segments within that line groupcan be the same.

■ A large component that stretches across drawings can have duplicate tags.Duplicate tags can represent different parts of the same item. For example,a line that spans drawings using an off-page connector can have the sametag in each drawing.

To create a tag format


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object(for example: Compressor).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format typeon which you want to base the new tag format (for example: EquipmentTag [Type-Number]). Click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter thename of the new format (for example: Equipment Tag [type-number] New).



TIP Use as many properties as subparts as needed. Use delimiters onlybetween these subparts, not within them. Delimiters appear between thesubparts in a tag if you place them in the Delimiter box. Entering a dashbetween items in the Field box (for example, N-N-N) can produce unexpectedresults.

7 In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the first iconon the left).


■ Under Class, click Equipment.

■ Under Property, click Type.

■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property.

■ Click OK.


9 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row of icons,click Select Drawing Properties.



■ Under Drawing Properties, click Drawing Area.

■ Click OK.

11 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row of icons,click Define Expression (the last icon in the row).

12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, click No Expression(Free Style Value). Click OK.


13 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the third row of icons,click Define Expression.


■ Click Numbers.




15 Click OK.

16 In the Tag Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter whereappropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiterfor General.Area[].


17 Click OK.

18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, click TagFormatName.

19 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in thedrop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging the Plant3D object.


20 Click OK.

You created a new tag format and assigned it to a Plant 3D object. When youuse the Plant 3D object in a drawing, the Assign Tag dialog box prompts youto enter tag data for the tag format you created in this procedure.

To create a tag format for pipe line groups


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the item you wantto tag (for example: P3d Line Groups).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format typeon which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Line Number),and then click New.


■ In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (forexample: P3d Line Groups - Service).

■ In the Name of Subparts box, enter the number of subparts you wantin the tag (for example: 2), or click the Up arrow until the number 2is displayed.

■ In the bottom row of icons, click Select Class Properties (thefirst icon on the left).


■ Under Class, click Pipe Line Groups.

■ Under Property, click a property (for example: Service).

■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property. Click OK.

7 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click OK.



9 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-donlist, click the tag format you want to use (for example: select P3d LineGroups - Service).

10 Click OK.

To assign a tag format to a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatwhose class definition you want to assign.


5 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in thedrop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging a Plant3D object.

6 Click OK.

To modify a tag format for a class definition


Project Setup.



3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tagformatting you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format youwant to modify.

5 Click Modify.

6 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, make the desired changes to the tagformat. Click OK.

7 Click OK.


To remove a tag format from a class definition


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (forexample: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tagformatting you want to delete.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format youwant to delete.

5 Click Delete.

NOTE If the selected tag format is either in a drawing that is part of theproject or is currently assigned to a Plant 3D object, a message is displayed,informing you that this tag format cannot be deleted.


7 Click OK.


To add automatically generated drawing properties


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D objectclass definition (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).






■

6 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Autogenerate, do thefollowing:

■ Select the Autogenerate Expression check box.


■ Click Drawing Field.

■ Click the Drawing icon.

7 In the Select Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

8 In the New Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, do thefollowing:

■ Under Name, enter the name for the new property.

■ Under Description, enter a description for the new property.

9 Click OK until the Project Setup dialog box is displayed.

In the Project Setup dialog box, under Tag Format, the new tag is added.


To add automatically generated project properties


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D objectclass definition (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).







6 In the Define Expression dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Autogenerate, select the Autogenerate Expression check box.Click Project Field.

■ Click the Project icon.


7 In the Select Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

8 In the New Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Name box, enter the name for the new property.

■ In the Description box, enter a description for the new property.

■ In the Last Used Value box, enter the value to use for the last valuefor the new property.

■ In the Increment Value box, enter the increment value for the newproperty.

9 Click OK until all open dialog boxes are closed.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Tag Format (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)

Set Up Annotations for Orthographic DrawingsYou can place formatted annotation text on an orthographic drawing.

You can create an annotation format that is based on an existing annotationformat or create a new annotation format.

NOTE Annotations are available for Equipment, Pipe Run Components, and P3DLine Group classes only.

To create an annotation format


Project Setup.


3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object(for example: Valve).

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click the annotation formaton which you want to base the new format. Click New.


5 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box,enter the name of the new format (for example: New Hand ValveAnnotation).


7 In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties.


■ Under Class, click Valve.

■ Under Property, click Material.

■ Click OK.


9 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the second rowof icons, click Select Drawing Properties (the second icon).



■ Under Drawing Properties, click a property (for example: DrawingArea).

■ Click OK.


11 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the second rowof icons, click Define Expression.

12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, select the check boxfor No Expression (Free Style Value). Click OK.


13 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the third row oficons, click Define Expression.


■ Click Numbers.




15 Click OK.

16 In the Annotation Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiterwhere appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as thedelimiter for General.Area[].


17 Click OK.

18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Namecolumn, click AnnotationFormatName.

19 In the AnnotationFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in thedrop-down list, click the annotation format you want to use.


20 Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Annotation Format for Orthographic Drawings (Plant 3D Class Definitions TreeNode)

Point Users to the Project LocationWhen you have completed the project configuration, you are ready to pointusers to the project location to start their designing.

To point users to the project location

The simplest way to notify your users about how to access the project directoryis to send email instructions. At a minimum, the instructions should includethe location of the project and instructions about changing the project filelocations.

Provide users with the following procedure.


Open Project.

2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location of the project, and selectthe project.xml file.

3 Click OK.


Organize Project Drawings

After you have set up the project environment, you can use the Project Manager to assembleand organize project drawings.

Overview: Organize Project DrawingsYou can use the Project Manager to open a project, organize project files, andensure that all project team members have a consistent working environment.

Understand the Project Manager

Using the Project Manager, you can assemble all project drawings and documentsin a centralized storage area. You can copy files into project folders or link themto the project. Linked files can exist elsewhere on the server or on a local filesystem. Either method ensures that all project files are available to projectmembers. You can also publish project drawings from the Project Manager.

3

239

The Project Manager has three tabs, each with a predefined structure thatkeeps various types of files segregated and easy to access. You can create foldersor subfolders within the existing structure.

The Source Files tab includes the following default folders:

■ P&ID Drawings. Contains schematic drawings

■ Plant 3D Drawings. Contains Plant 3D models

■ Related Files. Contains supplemental reference files, includingdocuments, spreadsheets, or generic AutoCAD drawings.

The Orthographic DWG and Isometric tabs provide access to your orthographicand isometric drawings.

Organize the project using these steps:

■ Open a new or existing project.

■ Assemble the files that belong to a project by linking or copying them tothe project. Add or include referenced files, as needed. The resultingproject tree is an organizational tool that helps you find related drawings

240 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

no matter where they reside physically. When you select a parent drawing,xrefs appear as child nodes.

■ If necessary, create new folders and subfolders to organize files in logicalgroupings. By grouping related files in a folder, you can quickly select allfiles for specific tasks.

■ Set properties for drawings. You can set up a drawing number, title, area,author, and description, and any other properties set up by your projectadministrator.

Set Up the Project FilesStart a new project by choosing a template, assembling the project drawings,and organizing the drawings into logical groups.

Create a ProjectStart a project by duplicating an existing project or creating a project from astandard template.

Create a Project Based on an Existing Project

In most cases, project templates are set up by a CAD manager or anotherperson in your company who is responsible for defining drawing standards.The templates are existing projects whose configuration settings meet companystandards. When you start a new project, you can designate another projectas the template, and then set the name and location for your new project.The new project inherits the settings from the project used as a template.

As you start a project, you can also update the properties that are defined forthese templates. Before updating these properties, make sure that you checkwith your CAD manager to find out about your company requirements.

Create a Project

When you create a project, you specify the name, description, and locationof the various project files. If you are creating a P&ID project, you can choosethe appropriate standard (for example, PIP, ISA, ISO, DIN, and JIS/ISO). Tocreate a new project, see Set Up a New Project on page 7. For informationabout specifying these settings, see Create and Configure a Project on page7.

Set Up the Project Files | 241

Include Referenced Drawings (Xrefs)You can attach a drawing to the current drawing as a referenced drawing (xref).

Understand Referencing Drawings

Attached xrefs are linked to a drawing rather than being inserted into it. Forexample, you can create a project drawing that contains little, if any, pipingcontent but has references to many other piping drawings. This drawing is a“master” drawing that shows several individual piping drawings in appropriaterelationship to one another.

You can reference files using two basic methods:

■ Reference a drawing to an existing project drawing.

■ Add a drawing to a project that has xrefs already associated with it.

When you click the drawing to which a referenced drawing is associated, thexref appears as a child node. (If the xref is a drawing that exists in the project,it does not appear as a child node.)

When you attach an xref, follow these guidelines:

■ Make sure that the xref belongs to the project to which it is attached.

■ Attach basic AutoCAD drawings only to P&ID drawings.

■ Make sure referenced drawings share a schema with the host drawing. Forexample, attach an xref to a P&ID drawing only from a P&ID drawing.Attach an xref to a Plant 3D drawing only from a Plant 3D drawing.

■ Attach all xrefs at a 0,0,0 origin for Plant 3D drawings.

■ Do not use the AutoCAD command refedit with plant objects (pipes,fittings, and so on).

■ Attaching a drawing as an xref does not create additional data cache rows.The xref is a reference only.

■ Use the AutoCAD command xref-bind to copy a referenced drawing intoa Plant 3D drawing. This action does create new rows in the data cache.

NOTE Only drawings that adhere to these guidelines can be opened or addedto a Plant 3D project.


If you do not know how to reference a drawing, see “Reference Other DrawingFiles” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Link or Copy Files to the Project FoldersAs you assemble your project files, you can link or copy the files to theirrespective folders on the Source Files tab of the Project Manager.

You can also reference other drawings as xrefs.

Link or Copy Files

You can either link or copy files to a project or use a combination of copyingand linking, depending on your requirements.

When you link a file:

■ The linked file remains in its original location with a reference to it in theproject.

■ If you are referencing many drawings rather than creating new ones, youcan save disk space.

■ The file can be referenced to one project only.

When you copy a file:

■ The copied file is physically placed in the project root folder.

■ It is a separate file, not connected to the original, and can thus belong tomore than one project.

Link or Copy Files With External References (xrefs)

You can either link or copy files with xrefs to a project, but linking is therecommended method.

When you link a file with xrefs:

■ The linked file remains in its original location with a reference to it in theproject.

■ If you are referencing many drawings rather than creating new ones, youcan save disk space.

■ The file can be referenced to one project only.

Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders | 243

■ The process takes a relatively short time.

When you copy a file with xrefs:

■ All xrefs and nested xrefs are copied to the project 3D drawings folder.

■ The host drawing xref links are removed as the drawing now exists in thesame folder as the xrefs.

■ The process takes longer than the linking process.

To link or copy existing drawings to the project

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a destination folder (for example,P&ID Drawings).

2 Click either Link To Drawing or Copy Drawing To Project.

3 In the Select Files dialog box, locate and click the drawing you want tocopy or link to the project. Click Open.

NOTE If you click a drawing with a read-only status, change that status toread-write before opening the file.

4 Repeat these steps until you have copied or linked all project drawings.

To resolve issues that prevent opening read-only files

You cannot add a drawing that has a read-only status. Before you open thedrawing, make sure no one else has opened it, or turn off the Read-Onlyattribute in Windows Explorer.

1 Attempt to link or copy an existing drawing to a project.

If the drawing has a read-only status, the Read-Only DWG Error dialogbox is displayed. Read-only status results from one of the followingconditions:

■ Another designer has the drawing open. Click OK. Request that thedesigner close the drawing and go to step 3.

■ The Read-Only attribute has been set for the drawing. Click OK andgo to step 2.

2 To change the read-only status of the drawing, in Windows Explorer,right-click the file. Click Properties.


3 In the Properties dialog box (Windows), in the Attributes section, clearthe Read-Only check box. Click OK.

To start a new drawing from within a project

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a destination folder (for example,P&ID Drawings).

2 Click New Drawing.

3 In the New DWG dialog box, under Drawing Properties, do the following:

■ In the DWG Number box, enter the number of the drawing.

■ In the DWG Title box, enter the title of the drawing.

NOTE The DWG Number and Title you enter is duplicated in the FileName box.

■ To use a different file name, enter it in the File Name box.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Project Manager tree view, locate and right-click the drawing youcreated. Click Properties.

6 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Area box, enter the plant area documented in this drawing.

■ In the Description box, enter a description of the drawing.

7 Click OK.

To remove a drawing from a project

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want toremove. Click Remove Drawing.

2 To confirm the removal, in the Remove Drawings From Project message,click OK.

The drawing is removed from the project tree, but it is not removed fromyour computer.

NOTE If you intend to reuse this drawing later, make sure that you save thedrawing before you remove the drawing from the project.

Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders | 245

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Organize Project FilesArrange files in the Project Manager to provide easy access to the drawings inyour project.

Use Folders to Organize Drawings

Grouping related drawings into folders within the Project Manager helps youcatalog them for easier reference. The folders you create in the Project managerare virtual folders, defined for your project in the <project name>.xml file.

NOTE The default folders cannot be changed or removed, but you can createadditional nested folders under them. The default folders on the Source Files tabare labeled P&ID Drawings, Plant 3D Drawings, and Related Files.

Understand Absolute Paths and Relative Paths in the Project Manager

How you set up the folder structure depends on how you plan to work. If youare in a multi-user environment where everyone accesses the same networklocations, you can set up absolute paths, which define specific folder locations.

NOTE If you define a folder path on a virtual drive, make sure that all projectmembers map the network location to the same drive letter.

If you plan to transmit project files to someone without access to your network,set up a relative path. A relative path retains the project folder hierarchy whenit is copied to another system.


To create a folder

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click an existing folder. Click NewFolder.

2 In the Project Folder Properties dialog box, enter the folder name.

3 To specify the type of folder path, do one of the following:

■ To specify a relative path, select the check box labeled Create FoldersRelative to Parent Folder Storage Location. The folder paths retain thesame folder hierarchy, even when the project files are moved toanother computer.

■ To specify an absolute path, clear the check box labeled Create FoldersRelative to Parent Folder Storage Location. Under Store New ProjectDWG Files In, click [...]. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, find andclick a folder. Click Open.

4 To specify how default templates are assigned for drawings in the folder,do one of the following:

■ To set a specific template for each folder, clear the Prompt ForTemplate check box. Under DWG Creation Template For Folder, click[...]. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, find and click a folder. ClickOpen.

■ To prompt for a template for each new drawing, select the Promptfor Template check box. Use this option if you use different projecttemplates for different projects.

5 Click OK.

Organize Project Files | 247

To rename a folder

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a folder. Click Rename Folder.

2 In the Project Folder Properties dialog box, under Folder Name, enter anew name for the folder.

3 Click OK.

To remove an empty folder

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the folder you want to remove.Click Remove Folder.

NOTE This option is not available for default folders or folders that contain contentor other nested folders.

To change the order of drawings or folders in a project

■ In the Project Manager tree view, click a folder or drawing and drag it tothe new location in the tree hierarchy.A long bar bounded on either end by arrows indicates the insertionlocation.

To insert a drawing in a folder or create nested folders

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the folder or drawing that youwant to move and drag it directly over another folder.

A single arrow on the right end of the name of the folder or file indicatesthe parent node for the node you are moving.

2 Release the button to place the drawing or folder.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Set Drawing PropertiesYou can update drawing properties, such as title and author.

Set Drawing Properties

You can set properties, which include the drawing title, the drawing number,the author, the project area, and a short description of the drawing.

The drawing title you enter in the Drawing Properties dialog box is displayedin the Project Manager. If you change the title, you do not change the filename.

TIP You can automate the insertion of drawing properties into title blocks. Formore information, see Add Project Data to a Drawing on page 255.

Set Values for Automatic Numbering of Components (P&ID drawings only)

The components you add to your drawing can be sequentially numbered.Using an advanced feature of the program (in the Project Setup dialog box),the system administrator can set which components are subject to numbering.

However, as you assemble drawings for the project, you can also assign thefollowing values in the Drawing Autogen Properties dialog box:

■ A starting ID number for components added to the selected drawing

■ The amount by which each newly signed ID number is increased when acomponent is added to the drawing

Set Drawing Properties | 249

For example, within a project, you can set up batches of numbers. In on projectdrawing, for example, valve numbering starts at 100 and increases by 5 eachtime a valve is added. Another drawing starts at 200, and so on.

To set drawing properties


2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, enter the following information:

■ DWG Title. Displays the name of the selected drawing file as it appearsin the project tree (Project Manager).

■ DWG Number. Sets a value corresponding to the number typicallyplaced on the title block for the drawing.

■ Author. Specifies the name of the person who created the drawing.

■ Description. Specifies information about the contents of the drawing.

■ Drawing Area. Specifies the plant area documented in this drawing.

3 Click OK.

To add a drawing number to a drawing


2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, in the DWG Number box, enter adrawing number.

3 Click OK.


To set values for automatic component numbering (P&ID drawings only)

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a P&ID drawing. ClickDrawing Autogen Properties.

2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, enter the following informationfor each component listed:

■ Last Used Value. Number that represents the starting point for thenumber of that component in the selected drawing.

■ Increment. The amount by which the ID number increases whenevera new component is added.

3 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Set Drawing Properties | 251

252

Work in a ProjectEnvironment

You can create drawings from within a project environment.

The project environment ensures that you and other designers are working with the samedrawing files, data, and templates.

Overview: The Project EnvironmentThe work you do to create and share drawings is initiated from within the ProjectManager.

Work with Project DrawingsBefore you open a drawing, you can preview it, refresh the status to see whoelse is working on it, and add notes and status information.

Open a ProjectThe Project Manager displays the last project you opened. You can start workimmediately, switch to a recent project, or search for another project.

NOTE If you attempt to open a project that was created in a previous version,migrate the project first. For more information, see Migrate Projects and Drawingson page 575.

4

253

To open a project

■ In the Project Manager, open the drop-down list and click the file nameof the project you want to open.

Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager drop-down menu ➤ Open Project

Command entry: OPENPROJECT

Quick Reference

Commands

OPENPROJECT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Get Ready to DesignAs you get ready to design, review the project to make sure that the drawingsare ready for editing.

■ Preview the drawing. Make sure that you are opening the correct drawingby clicking the Preview button in the bottom toolbar.

■ Refresh drawing status. Quickly display the editing status of the drawingsin the project by clicking the Refresh DWG Status button on the Projecttoolbar. The drawing icon in the Project Manager represents the drawingstatus.The drawing status is displayed as follows:

■ Available. The drawing can be opened for editing.

■ Locked. The drawing is already open and you cannot open or editit.

254 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

■ Missing. The drawing has been moved or removed.

To open a project drawing

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open.

To view a project drawing in read-only mode

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click OpenRead-Only.

To preview drawings in the Project Manager

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the drawing you want to preview.

2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Preview.

Quick Reference

Commands

OPENPROJECT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Add Project Data to a DrawingYou can use fields to add and update project data.

Each drawing in your project possesses properties that you can add to yourdrawing title block or other areas of your drawing. Use the FIELD commandto add properties.

Add Project Data to a Drawing | 255

When a field or block containing a field is inserted into a drawing, the fieldautomatically contains data obtained from the properties stored with thedrawing.

To add a drawing status field into to a drawing

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open.

2 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field.

3 In the Field dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Field Category list, click Project.

■ Under Field Names, click CurrentDwgStatus.

■ Under Format, click Title Case.

■ Click OK.

4 Click in the drawing area where you want to display the drawing status.

NOTE The drawing status is displayed as <unassigned> until you assign a

status to the drawing in the Work History dialog box.

To update the drawing status field in a drawing

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing that already containsan inserted field.

2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Work History.

3 Under Status, in the drop-down list, click a status (for example: In Progress,For Review, Revision 1, Revision 2, and so on).

4 Save the drawing.


NOTE If you change the status during a drawing session, save the drawingto update the status field.

To set drawing or project data in a title block

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing that you want touse as the basis for your title block. Click Open.

2 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field.

3 In the Field dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Field Category drop-down list, click Project.

■ Under Field Names, click CurrentDwgTitle.

■ Under Format, click the desired display format.

■ Click OK.

4 Click the area of the title block reserved for the drawing title to positionthe field.

5 Repeat steps 2-4 to place fields for other drawing data (such as the drawingnumber or the project name).

6 Save the drawing.

To use a title block containing field information


2 At the Command prompt, enter insert.

3 In the Insert dialog box, click Browse.

4 In the Select Drawing File dialog box, locate and click a drawing to useas the title block. Click Open.

5 In the Insert dialog box, under Insertion Point, make sure the SpecifyOn-Screen check box is selected. Click OK.

6 Place the title block in your current drawing.

To update fields stored in a title block

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing that containsthe title block you want to update. Click Properties.

Add Project Data to a Drawing | 257

2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, change the drawing properties asneeded. Click OK.

3 At the Command prompt, enter regen.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Add Status Notes About a DrawingYou can add status notes when you open or close a drawing, depending onhow the Work History settings are configured.

The Work History dialog box tracks your comments. It is not a mechanismfor storing, retrieving, or controlling versions of a drawing.

NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or close adrawing, the project was configured with work history prompting turned off. Formore information, see Configure General Settings on page 10.

Your project administrator can configure the Work History dialog box to bedisplayed when you open or close a drawing, or not at all.


To add status and notes to the Work History

1 Under Status, in the drop-down list, select a status.

2 In the Notes box, enter a description of the changes you made or areplanning to make to the drawing.

3 Click OK.

NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open orclose a drawing, the project was configured with work history promptingturned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page10

To view Work History status for a drawing

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing.


Add Status Notes About a Drawing | 259

3 Under Status, view the drawing status.

To refresh drawing status

■ In the Project Manager, on the Project toolbar, click Refresh DWG Status.

The drawing status icons are updated to indicate their current editingstatus:

■ Locked. The file cannot be opened; another designer is editing it.

■ Missing. The drawing has been moved or removed.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Save Project DrawingsYou can save a drawing or the entire project.


Information about the content and organization of project files is stored in aproject.xml file in the location that was designated when the project was created.Any changes you make to project settings are incorporated into this file.

To save a single project drawing

■ In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing. Click Application menu ➤ Save or press CTRL+S.

To save all drawings in a project

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project and click Resave AllProject Drawings.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Manage Work History TrackingUse the work history to record who has worked on a drawing, modificationsmade, and the current review status.

Your administrator sets the timing for the work history status and comments.This setting determines whether work history is updated when the drawingis opened, when it is closed, or not at all.

To manage work history status


Manage Work History Tracking | 261

NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open orclose a drawing, the project was configured with work history promptingturned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page10

2 In the Work History dialog box, in the Status list, click Manage.

3 In the Project Status Manager dialog box, do one of the following.

■ To add a new status, click New. In the New Status dialog box, in theName box, enter a new status name. Click Ok.

■ To rename an existing status, under Refined Statuses, click a statusname. Click Rename.

■ To delete an existing status, under Refined Statuses, click the statusname and click Delete. Click Close.

4 Click OK.

To display and sort the work history for a drawing

1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the drawing whose work historystatus you want to view.


3 To sort the list alphabetically by user or chronologically by date, clickthe appropriate column heading. (You cannot sort the status list.)


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Manage Project Files RemotelyYou can edit a project drawing outside of the project environment andsynchronize it when you return it to the environment.

When you work on drawings at home or at a client location, you do not haveaccess to the project network environment. You can use the Project Managerto remove the file, edit the file remotely, and use the Project Manager againto return it.

You can also copy files using Microsoft Windows Explorer. When you opena file that has been copied using Explorer and edited remotely, you mayencounter a message asking you to resolve discrepancies.

To remove a file from the project environment using the Project Manager

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want toremove. Click Remove Drawing.

To return a file to the project environment using the Project Manager

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project where you wantthe file. Click Copy Drawing to Project or Link to Drawing. For moreinformation about linking or copying, see Link or Copy Files to the ProjectFolders on page 243.

Manage Project Files Remotely | 263

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Share Project DrawingsShare your project drawings by sending them over the Internet, printing them,or publishing DWF or DWFx files.

Package and Transmit a Project

You can package a project so you can send it digitally or include all supportingdocuments in an archive. When creating a transmittal, you designate drawingsand related files, such as external references (xrefs) and fonts, to include inthe transmittal. You can also specify file formats, folder structures, andinstructions to the recipient. You create the transmittal package outside ofthe project environment.

For more information, see “Package a set of Files for Transmission” in theAutoCAD Help system.

Print a Project Drawing

Project drawings can be plotted individually or published outside the ProjectManager environment. However, these operations do not recognize the folderstructure set up in the Project Manager.

For more information, see “Plot and Publish Drawings” in the AutoCAD Helpsystem.

To transmit drawings

1 In the Project Manager tree view right-click a drawing from the projectyou want to share.

2 Click Application menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit.


3 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, on the Files Tree tab, click Add File.

4 In the Add File To Transmittal dialog box, locate and click the files youwant to transmit. To transmit a complete package, include the following:

■ All drawing files

■ All files in the project file location, including ProcessPower.dcfx,Project.xml, and projSymbolStyle.dwg

■ Fonts

5 Click Open.

6 Repeat steps 3-5 until you have added all the project files you want totransmit.

7 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click OK.

8 In the Specify Zip File dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Save In list, specify the location for the zip file.

■ In the File Name box, enter a name for the zip file.

9 Click Save.

To set up a transmittal package

1 In the Project Manager tree view right-click a drawing.

2 Click Application menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit.

3 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click Transmittal Setups.

4 In the Transmittal Setups dialog box, do one of the following:

■ To create a setup, click New.

■ To rename a setup, click Rename. Enter the new name. Click Close.

■ To update an existing setup, select the setup and click Modify.

■ To remove a setup, click the setup and click Delete. In the AutoCADmessage, to confirm the setup deletion, click OK.

5 Click Close.

Share Project Drawings | 265

To unpack a self-extracting executable transmittal package

1 Locate and open the transmittal package file (for example: PIP-01-101.dwf).

2 In the eTransmit dialog box, click Browse to specify the folder where youwant to unpack the transmittal files.

3 If the transmittal package is password-protected, you are prompted toenter the password.


To publish a DWF or DWFx file

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project. Click Publish.

2 In the Publish dialog box, in the Publish To list, click DWF.

3 Under Sheet Name, press the CTRL key and click the drawings to publish.

4 Click Publish.

To set DWF or DWFx output settings

The DWF Output settings you make are in effect the next time you publish aDWF or dWFx file.

1 In the Project Manager, open the drop-down list and click the file nameof the project you want to open.

NOTE DWF output settings can be made only when a project is open.

2 At the Command prompt, enter dwfoutputsettings.

NOTE If you are publishing a Plant 3D model, enter dwfoutputsettings3d.The Plant 3D dialog box is like the P&ID version. You can follow the stepsoutlined here for both types of drawings.


3 In the Output Settings dialog box, on the Object Properties tab, selectthe check box labeled Show Classes With Items Only.

The tree view displays the Plant 3D objects that are used in the currentproject.

4 In the tree view, click a component (for example: Equipment). On theProperties pane, in the DWF Output column, clear the check box for anyproperty you do not want to publish (for example: Weight).


5 Click OK.

To set DWF publishing options

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project. Click Publish.

2 In the Publish dialog box, under Publish Options Information, clickPublish Options.


3 In the Project Publish Options dialog box, under P&ID DWF Options,click the options setting box to display the drop-down list and changethe following settings.

■ P&ID Information. Specifies whether P&ID related information getsincluded with the published DWF file output. Specify Include or Don’tInclude. You can also click this box, click the [...] button, to open theP&ID DWF Output Settings dialog box.

■ Filtering Null Values. Controls the publishing of object or sheetproperties that do not have specified values. Specify On or Off.

■ Granular Pipeline Output. Sets how segment lines behave when youview them in the DWF Viewer. If you leave the Granular PipelineOutput set to Off (the default), the entire segment line is red when


the cursor is placed over it. If you set the Granular Pipeline Outputto On, each section of the segment line is highlighted as the cursormoves over it. Specify On or Off.

4 In the Project Publish Options dialog box, under Plant 3D DWF Options,click the options setting box (on the right) to display the drop-down listand change the following settings.

■ Piping Information. Specifies whether piping-related information isincluded with the published DWF file output. Specify Include or Don’tInclude. You can also click this box, click the [...] button, to open thePlant 3D DWF Output Settings dialog box.

■ Filtering Null Values. Controls the publishing of object or sheetproperties that do not have specified values. Specify On or Off.

5 When you are finished setting DWF publishing options, click OK to closethe Project Publish Options dialog box.

6 In the Publish dialog box, click Publish.

7 If the Specify DWF File dialog box is displayed, do the following:

■ In the Save In list, specify a location to save the DWF or DWFx file.

■ In the File Name box, enter an output file name.

■ Click Select.


Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Audit and Compress ProjectsUsing auditing tools, administrators can perform periodic project maintenance.

Audit Projects

Audit a project to search for errors, such as links between non-existentproperties or discrepancies in the tag registry.

To audit a project, open the project in the Project Manager. Warning messagesare displayed if a project is not currently open or if an open project is lockedby another designer.

A log file describing problems and the actions taken to resolve them is addedto the project directory that contains the data cache.

Compress Projects

Periodically compress a project to optimize performance and efficiency of theproject. Compressing a project defragments the drawing data cache, repairsany inconsistencies, and prevents corruption of the cache.

Warning messages are displayed if a project is not currently open or if an openproject is locked by another designer.

To audit a project

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project. Click Audit Project.

Audit and Compress Projects | 271

To compress a project

■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project. Click CompressDatabase.

NOTE The duration of the compression process depends on the size of the project.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager


Understand the DrawingEnvironment

Before you work in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, it is important that you understand how thedrawing environment is organized and learn some tips for working in this environment.

AutoCAD Plant 3D WorkspacesA workspace is a set of menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbon control panels thatare grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-orienteddrawing environment.

You maximize the screen area available for those interface elements that youwant to display.

When you use a workspace, only those menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbonsthat are relevant to a task are displayed.

Work with the AutoCAD Plant 3D WorkspacesWhen you create 3D piping models, you can use the 3D Piping workspace,which contains only 3D-related toolbars, menus, and palettes.

Interface items that you do not need for 3D pipe modeling are hidden, whichmaximizes the screen area available for your work.

NOTE If you attempt to use a command that is not compatible with the currentdrawing, you are prompted to switch to the workspace that supports the command.

5

273

3D Piping Workspace

The 3D Piping workspace includes the tools required to create a 3D plantmodel. The drawing area displays the 3D piping ribbon and the 3D drawingarea.

P&ID Workspaces

P&ID workspaces include P&ID PIP, P&ID ISO, P&ID ISA, P&ID DIN, and P&IDJIS/ISO. Each of these workspaces is based on a P&ID industry standard usedfor your project. The tool palettes for each workspace contain the symbolsbased on the industry standard for that workspace.

AutoCAD Workspaces

AutoCAD workspaces include 2D Drafting & Annotation, 3D Modeling, andAutoCAD Classic. For more information about these workspaces, see “CreateTask-Based Workspaces” in the AutoCAD Help system.

When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding,or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve thedisplay settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace.

Switch WorkspacesYou can switch to another workspace whenever you need to work on a differenttask.

You can easily switch between workspaces when you want to access tools orcommands that are not accessible in the current workspace.

Opening an existing project of any standard causes AutoCAD Plant 3D toswitch to the workspace for that standard if it differs from the currentworkspace. Also, creating a new project switches the workspace to the standardyou specify in project settings if that standard differs from the currentworkspace.

To switch workspaces

1 On the status bar, click Workspace Switching.

2 In the list of workspaces, click a workspace.

274 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

A check mark indicates the current workspace.

AutoCAD Plant 3D RibbonThe ribbon contains the commands that you need to create and modify apiping model.

The ribbon is composed of a series of panels that are organized into tabs labeledby task. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls availablein toolbars and dialog boxes. By default, the ribbon is displayed horizontallyat the top of the drawing window when you create or open a drawing.

If you drag a panel from a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto anothermonitor, that panel remains where you placed it. The panel remains openuntil you return it to the ribbon, even if you switch ribbon tabs. For moreinformation about using ribbons, see “The Ribbon” in the AutoCAD Helpsystem.

3D Piping Home Tab

The 3D Piping Home tab contains panels with the commands that you needto create and modify a piping model. This tab includes the following panels:

■ Project panel

AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon | 275

■ Part Insertion panel

■ Compass panel

■ Elevation & Routing panel

■ Slope panel

■ Pipe Supports panel

■ Equipment panel

■ Visibility panel

■ View panel

■ Layers panel

The 3D Piping Home tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

For more information about 3D piping, see Create and Modify Piping on page431.

Orthos Tab

The Orthos tab displays options for working with orthographic drawings. Thetab includes the following panels:

■ Ortho Tools panel

■ Dimensions panel

■ Annotation panel

■ Viewports panel

The Orthos tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.


For more information about orthographic drawings, see Generate OrthographicDrawings on page 561.

Isos Tab

The Isos tab displays options for working with isometrics. This tab includesthe following panels:

■ Create Iso panel

■ Isogen panel

■ Export panel

The Isos tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

For more information about isometrics, see Generate Isometric Drawings onpage 551.

Structure Tab

The Structure tab displays options for working with structures. This tab includesthe following panels:

■ Parts panel

■ Modify panel

■ Cutting panel

■ Visibility panel

■ Export panel

■ Views panel

■ Layers panel

The Structure tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon | 277

For more information about creating structure, see Create and Modify Structureon page 393.

P&ID Home Tab

The P&ID Home tab displays options for working with P&ID drawings. Thistab includes the following panels:

■ Project panel

■ P&ID panel

■ Schematic Line panel

■ Line Group panel

■ Validate panel

■ Layers panel

■ Block panel

■ Annotation panel

■ Properties panel

■ View panel

■ Utilities panel

The P&ID Home tab is part of the P&ID PIP, P&ID ISO, P&ID ISA, P&ID DIN,and P&ID JIS/ISO workspaces.

For more information about creating P&IDs, see Create and Modify a P&IDDrawing on page 297.


AutoCAD Tabs

When you switch from an AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 workspace to an AutoCADworkspace, additional AutoCAD ribbons are displayed. Following is an exampleof the 3D ribbon that is displayed when the AutoCAD 3D Modeling workspaceis selected.

The AutoCAD tabs are part of the AutoCAD workspaces, including 2D Drafting& Annotation, 3D Modeling, and AutoCAD Classic.

The Model and Render tabs from AutoCAD are also included as part of the3D Piping workspace.

For more information about using AutoCAD ribbons, see “The Ribbon” in theAutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Project ManagerThe Project Manager provides an organized project environment in which towork.

You can open, add, and create drawings using the Project Manager. You alsoperform other tasks such as exporting and importing data, creating projectreports, including referenced drawings (xrefs), and linking or copying files tothe project folders.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager | 279

The Project Manager contains three tabs; the Source Files tab, the OrthographicDWG tab, and the Isometric DWG tab. For more information about these tabsand other details about the Project Manager, see Overview: Organize ProjectDrawings on page 239.

The Project Manager also provides access to the Data Manager and the ProjectSetup dialog box. For more information about the Data Manager, see ManageData and Generate Reports on page 499. For more information about settingup a project, see your system administrator.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties PaletteThe AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties palette provides quick access to componentand line data.


In the Properties palette, you can change the data of an object (such as a pipespecification, an insulation type or thickness, and so on). The Properties palettealso allows access to the Assign Tag dialog box, where you can alter taginformation.

Some of the ways you can access the Properties palette include:

■ Double-clicking an object in a drawing

NOTE When you double-click an annotation, the Edit Annotations dialog boxis displayed instead of the Properties palette.

■ Selecting an item in the drawing and pressing CTRL+1

■ Right-clicking an item in the drawing and clicking Properties

■ At the Command prompt, entering PROPERTIES

AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette | 281

For more information about the Properties palette, see “Display and Change theProperties of Objects” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Data ManagerYou can view, modify, import, and export drawing and project data, andgenerate various reports using the Data Manager.

Using the Data Manager, you can export data for drawings and projects, modifythe data externally, and import it back into the Data Manager.

You use a hierarchical tree in the Data Manager to filter and view data, andto generate reports.


You can export data and reports that contain P&ID and Plant 3D data, andexport to Microsoft® Excel®, comma-separated value (CSV), or PCF (PipingComponent Format) files.

You can zoom directly to a Plant 3D object from its record in the Data Managerdata table.

In P&ID drawings, you can drag annotations from the Data Manager datatable into the drawing area.

For more information about the Data Manager, see Manage Data and GenerateReports on page 499.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec ViewerYou can add pipe or pipe fittings to a model using the Spec Viewer.

The Spec Viewer uses spec files to control part size, selection, and routingpriorities. After opening a spec file in AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can view specsheets, add items to a 3D model, and customize tool palettes.

You can insert a sized part or an unsized part. If you use an object snap toconnect to an open port, the size of the port is used. You can set AutoCADPlant 3D to update a 3D model when changes are made to the spec file.

For more information about using the Spec Viewer, see Use a Spec in a Plant3D Model.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer | 283

AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool PalettesThe AutoCAD Plant 3D tool palettes display standard and custom componentand line symbols that you place to create your drawings.

The standard you choose when you create a project dictates which tool paletteis displayed when you start the program. For example, if you create a projectusing the ISA standard, the initial tool palette displayed is the P&ID ISA palette.

You can switch to another tool palette by right-clicking the tool palette titlebar and selecting a tool palette. However, not all P&ID symbols that areavailable in one standard are the same in other standards.

For example, you have created a project using the PIP standard and have begunadding lines and components from the P&ID PIP tool palette. If you changeto the P&ID ISA tool palette and attempt to add a 4-way valve, you receive awarning in the status bar stating that the ISA 4-way valve symbol cannot be


found in the current palette. To add a 4-way valve, return to the P&ID PIPtool palette and select the 4-way valve from that set of symbols.

NOTE If you are working in a project using the ISA standard, you can add linesand components from the PIP standard. Also, if you are working in a project usingthe DIN standard, you can add lines and components from the ISO standard. Inboth cases, you might receive a warning for specific lines or components, but youcan use most symbols without restriction.

You can also create your own custom tool palette by right-clicking the titlebar of the tool palette and clicking New Palette. You can then add tools to thepalette. For more information about creating a tool palette, see “Customize ToolPalettes” in the AutoCAD Help system.

You can add individual items from a spec sheet to a custom tool palette. Formore information, see Use a Spec in a Plant 3D Model.

NOTE If you do not see the P&ID workspace interface elements in your drawingarea, it is likely that you are not displaying a P&ID workspace. Verify that you areusing a P&ID workspace by clicking Workspaces on the status bar and clicking aP&ID workspace.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick PropertiesQuick Properties provide access to commonly used properties for an object ora set of objects.

Quick Properties are enabled by default. When you select an object, you canview and modify a list of properties for the selected object.

For more information about using or disabling Quick Properties, see “Workwith Object Properties” in the AutoCAD Help system.

You can easily customize the Quick Properties for any object in the CustomizeUser Interface (CUI) editor. To customize the display of Quick Properties, see“Customize User Interface Elements” in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties | 285

AutoCAD Plant 3D Shortcut MenusWith shortcut menus (also called right-click or context menus), you canperform tasks that are related to the selected component or line.

For example, when you right-click a schematic line, a shortcut menu isdisplayed for quick access to relevant schematic line editing tasks.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Substitution PalettesYou use substitution palettes to substitute one component or line for anotherin a drawing.

The palettes are displayed after you place certain components or lines. Youcan switch to a similar component or line by clicking the Substitution arrowand selecting an item from the palette. All the components grouped underthe same class are available for substitution on the substitution palette.

NOTE You cannot successfully substitute all components under the same class foreach other. If two components of the same class have attachment points at differentorientations compared to their placement on a line, they do not substitute correctly.


AutoCAD Plant 3D GripsYou use grips to perform actions on objects in a drawing.

Grips are displayed at strategic points on objects when you select them. Youcan click these grips to perform the actions described in the following table.

DescriptionGrip SymbolGrip Name

Starts or continues routing pipe.Continu-ation grip

Moves a pipe line up or down to set anelevation.

Elevationgrip

Displays the compass and allows a com-ponent to be rotated.

Rotationgrip

Appears at the midpoints of schematicline segments; it moves a line orthogon-ally.

Stretch grip

AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips | 287

DescriptionGrip SymbolGrip Name

Lengthens or shortens a schematic line.Endline grip

Connects a schematic line or pipe line toa component, pipe line, or anotherschematic line.

Connectiongrip

Breaks a schematic line between the gapsymbols.

Gap grip

Flips a component in the opposite direc-tion.

Flip grip

Displays a palette with similar compon-ents that you can substitute for the oneyou originally placed.

Substitutiongrip

AutoCAD Plant 3D TooltipsTooltips are descriptive messages that are displayed near the cursor when ithovers over a ribbon, toolbar, panel button, or menu item.

Tooltips provide pop-up information for the commands associated withinterface elements. Initially, a basic tooltip is displayed. If you allow the cursorto hover over the interface element, the tooltip may expand to display a secondlevel of descriptive information for the command.


You can customize the display and content of a tooltip. For more informationabout customizing the display of tooltips, see “Display Tab (Options Dialog Box)”in the AutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing TooltipsAfter you add a component or line segment to a drawing or 3D model, youcan perform a quick query of component or line segment data by moving thecrosshairs over it.

When you position the crosshairs over a component, the values stored in theClass Name and Tag fields for the component are displayed in a tooltip.

If you position the crosshairs over a line segment, the Pipe Line Type, Tag,and To and From data are displayed in a tooltip.

Objects in 3D models that have data assigned to them or the capability tohave data assigned to them display a tooltip with whatever data is currentlyassigned. If there is no data assigned to an object, the tooltip displays onlythe object name.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips | 289

AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and ToolbarsThe Application menu and toolbars provide access to many frequently usedcommands.

Using the Application Menu

The Application menu, located in the top-left corner of the program, replacesthe traditional menu structure you might be familiar with in previous releasesof AutoCAD Plant 3D.

Instead of a horizontal menu display across the top of the program, theapplication menu presents the menus in a vertical list. You click theApplication button to display the menus within.


For more information about using menus, see “The Application Menu” in theAutoCAD Help system.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars | 291

Using Toolbars

You can use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars,and display tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars. Thereare no AutoCAD Plant 3D-specific toolbars, but you can access AutoCADtoolbars from the Quick Access Toolbar Tools menu.

For more information about toolbars and other AutoCAD tools such as thestatus bar and the classic menu bar, see “Other Tool Locations” in the AutoCADHelp system.

Understand the Work History Dialog BoxIf your administrator activates the Work History option, the Work Historydialog box is displayed either when you open a drawing from the ProjectManager or when you close the drawing.

You are prompted to provide details about the drawing file that you or anotherdesigner can refer to at a later date (such as revision information, review status,and so on).

For more information about the Work History dialog box, see Manage WorkHistory Tracking on page 261.


Understand the Assign Tag Dialog BoxIf your administrator has set up tag formatting, the Assign Tag dialog boxdisplays when you add a component or line that requires a tag.

You add components and lines to a drawing or model from a ribbon or toolpalette. If you do not know the tagging data at the time you insert acomponent or line, you can add the data to a 3D model later by clicking Hometab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Assign Tag and clicking the component orline.

For more information about assigning tags to components and lines, see TagComponents and Lines on page 335.

Control the Display of the Drawing SpaceBy controlling the display of dockable windows and toolbars, locking theposition of toolbars and dockable windows, and using two monitors, you canoptimize your drawing environment.

Control the Display of Dockable Windows

Many windows, such as the Project Manager, the tool palettes, and the DataManager, are dockable. Each window can be docked, anchored, or floating.

Commands for changing the display of dockable windows are available on ashortcut menu. You can change the following options for dockable windows:

■ Size. You can change the size of a window and resize the panes.

Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box | 293

■ Allow Docking. Dock or anchor a dockable window. A docked windowadheres to one side of the application window, causing the drawing areato be resized.

■ Anchor. Attach, or anchor, a dockable window or palette to the left orright side of the drawing area. An anchored window rolls open and closedas the cursor moves across it. When an anchored window is open, itscontent overlaps the drawing area. An anchored window cannot be set tostay open. The Allow Docking option must be selected before you cananchor a window.

■ Auto-hide. Display a floating window that opens and closes as the cursormoves across it. When this option is cleared, the window stays open.

■ Transparency. Display a window as transparent so that it does not obscureobjects under it. This option is not available for all windows or whenhardware acceleration is turned on.

Control the Display of Toolbars

You can display or hide toolbars and control whether they are docked orfloating in the drawing area.

A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. You can resize,and reposition undocked toolbars.

Lock the Position of Toolbars and Dockable Windows

After you have arranged toolbars and windows the way you want to displaythem, you can lock their positions. Locked toolbars and windows can still beopened and closed, and items can be added and deleted.

Use Keytips to Access Common Tools

You can use the keyboard to access the Application Menu, Quick Access toolbar, and ribbon.

Press the ALT key to display shortcut keys for common tools in the applicationwindow.

When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool.

Use Dual Monitors to Optimize the Drawing Area

To create a larger drawing space, you can use two monitors. For example, youcan use one monitor to display the drawing area, while the other monitor


displays the tools for working in the drawing area such as the tool palette,Project Manager, Data Manager, and so on.

For more information about setting up dual monitors, see the instructionsprovided with your monitors.

Control the Display of the Drawing Space | 295

296

Create and Modify a P&IDDrawing

With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can easily create and edit P&ID drawings by placing dynamiclines and components.

Understand P&ID Components and LinesBy combining various types of components (such as pumps, tanks, and valves)and lines (such as pipe lines and signal lines), you create a dynamic P&IDdrawing, from which you can produce and edit data reports.

Each P&ID component and line has an assigned layer name, color, scaling factor,tagging behavior, and other properties that are set up as part of your project sothat you are not required to assign properties each time you place a componentor line in a drawing.

Understand P&ID Component and Line Symbols

AutoCAD Plant 3D includes a set of component and line symbols that are basedon P&ID industry standards. The symbols are available for you to place, connect,move, stretch, and tag. You can also create reports on the symbols.

Symbols used for AutoCAD Plant 3D components and lines are based on thePIP (Process Industry Practices), ISA (Instrument Society of America), ISO(International Organization for Standardization), and DIN (Deutsches InstitutFur Normung e. V.) standards.

P&ID components include:

■ Equipment (such as pumps, tanks, and vessels)

■ Nozzles (such as flanged or flow)

6

297

■ Instruments (such as control valves, flow meters, and instrument bubbles)

■ Inline components (such as valves and reducers)

■ Non-engineering items (such as connectors, flow arrows, and other itemsthat are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data)

P&ID schematic lines include:

■ Pipe lines (such as primary line segments, secondary line segments, andjacketed pipe segments)

■ Signal lines (such as electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic)

The P&ID tool palette provides a visual library of the symbols, or componentsand lines, that you use to create and document your P&ID drawings. Yousimply click a symbol on the tool palette and click in the drawing area whereyou want to place the symbol.

NOTE You can also drag a symbol from the tool palette and drop it in a drawing,but you may not be able to place the symbol as precisely as clicking the symbolon the tool palette and then clicking in the drawing.

298 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Understand Component and Line Creation

If you use components and lines that are not part of the symbol librariesprovided with the program, it is likely that your administrator created thosesymbols and added them to the tool palette while setting up your project.

Rather than creating your own components and lines, you should use eitherthe default symbols or those symbols provided by your administrator.Otherwise, you cannot be sure that the symbols comply with your companystandards or are included in your tool palette and in reports.

If you must use an AutoCAD object in your P&ID drawing, you can convertthe AutoCAD object to a P&ID component or line. For more informationabout converting, see Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&IDComponents or Lines on page 342.

Understand P&ID Components and Lines | 299

Place, Tag, and Annotate Components and Lines

Typically, you place a component or line, tag it, and then annotate it. Not allcomponents and lines require tagging and annotation, but in general youwant to make sure all three tasks are completed as you build your P&IDdrawings.

■ Place a component or line. The P&ID tool palettes provide a simple wayto view and place all available components and lines. You click an itemon the tool palette, and click again in the drawing area to place it.

■ Assign a Tag to a component or line. For some components and lines, youare prompted to enter tag information when you place the item in adrawing. You can enter tag information and annotations when promptedor at a later time. For more information, see Tag Components and Lineson page 335.

■ Annotate a component or line. For some components (such as relief valvesand instruments), you are prompted to annotate them when you placethem in a drawing. For other items (such as pumps and tanks), you choosewhether to annotate them. You can annotate most components and linesby right-clicking the item and clicking Annotate on the shortcut menu.

Create a Drawing FileWhen you start drafting in AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can add a drawing file toyour project and add a drawing number, a title, and the name of the designerto that drawing.

To create a drawing file and add drawing properties

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.

2 If the correct project is not already open, open it now.


3 Click New Drawing.

4 In the New DWG dialog box, do the following:

■ Under DWG Number, enter a drawing number (for example, PIP-1001).

■ Under Author, enter the designer’s name.

■ Under DWG Title, enter a title for the drawing. (for example,Drawing1).

As you enter the DWG Number and DWG Title, the File Name field isautomatically populated.

5 Click OK.

Create a Drawing File | 301

Add Components to a P&ID DrawingComponent is a general term that includes all P&ID symbols except schematiclines.

P&ID components include:

■ Equipment (such as pumps, tanks, and vessels)

■ Nozzles (such as flanged and flow)

■ Instruments (such as control valves, flow meters, and instrument bubbles)

■ Inline components (such as valves and reducers)

■ Non-engineering items (such as connectors, flow arrows, and other itemsthat are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data)

Add Equipment to a P&ID DrawingP&ID equipment includes pumps, compressors, blowers, heat exchangers,tanks, vessels, furnaces, mechanical drivers, mixing equipment, and othermiscellaneous pieces of equipment. Some types of equipment are placed ona drawing before lines and inline instruments. Other types of equipment areadded to existing lines on a drawing.

Equipment such as tanks and heat exchangers are typically placed at the endof a line. After these items are placed on a drawing, lines are added to connectthe equipment, and then valves and inline equipment are placed on the lines.


Some types of equipment are regularly inserted into pipe or signal line andare often moved along the line. When their join types are set to break segmentgroups, ISO and DIN symbols for pumps, compressors, and blowers can beadded directly to existing lines in AutoCAD Plant 3D.

When inserted onto a line, inline components break the line into two linegroups with different line numbers. If you remove a piece of inline equipmentfrom a line, you can join the segments to form a single segment or leave thesegments as they are with different data. If you join the line segments, youcan choose to retain the line data of either the original line segment or thenew line segment. For more information about line segments and line groupssee Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking Behavior on page 328.

Equipment symbols are displayed on the Equipment tab of the tool palette.

To add equipment to a drawing

1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettespanel ➤ Tool Palettes.

2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Equipment tab. Click the componentyou want to place.

3 Click the location in the drawing area where you want to place thecomponent.

4 If you are prompted to specify a scale factor (for example, when you placea tank), do one of the following:

■ Press ENTER to accept the default scale.

■ Move the cursor vertically to increase or decrease the componentheight.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to increase or decrease the componentwidth.

5 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following:

■ If you know the tag data you want to enter, add the information, andthen click Assign.

■ If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. Youcan add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing | 303

To add equipment to a pipe line


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Equipment tab. Click the componentyou want to place.

3 Click a line in the drawing area to specify a location for the component.


■ If you know the tag data you want to enter, add the information, andthen click Assign.


NOTE Only equipment with join type set to segment group breaker can beadded to pipe lines. Equipment with endline join type will overlap with theline.

To reapply a graphical style to a component

1 Open the drawing file containing the component whose graphical styleyou want to apply.

2 Double-click the component (for example: a pump).

3 In the Properties palette, change the properties (for example: in the Layerlist, change the layer from Equipment to Instrument).

4 In the drawing area, right-click the component. Click Reapply GraphicalStyle.

Add Nozzles to a P&ID DrawingYou use nozzles to connect pipes. When you move a piece of equipment, thenozzle moves with it.


Nozzles are added to a drawing in one of two ways: you add them manuallyby placing them in the drawing from the Fittings tab of the tool palette orthey are automatically created when you connect a line segment to anequipment item (such as a tank).

You can assign tag numbers to nozzles, just like other items in a P&ID drawing,but the tag number assigned to a nozzle must be unique per equipment item.Different pieces of equipment in a P&ID drawing can have nozzles with thesame nozzle tag. For example, each equipment item can have a nozzle taggedN-1.

As your schematic drawing changes, you can copy and move nozzles fromone item to another within the drawing. Based on where the nozzle is copiedor moved, the tag of the nozzle will be affected in different ways.

You can choose from the following types of nozzles:

■ Flanged

■ Single line

■ Double line

■ Assumed nozzle

■ Front facing

Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing | 305

To add a nozzle to a component


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Fittings tab.

3 On the Fittings tab, under Nozzles, click a nozzle.

4 Click the component on which you want to attach the nozzle.

5 On the component, specify an insertion point.

6 Specify a rotation angle, or press ENTER to indicate no rotation.

Add Instruments to a P&ID DrawingInstruments are assigned and associated with a specific layer and color, as wellas tag or data information.

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a basic set of instrument symbols, which include:

■ Control valves

■ Relief valves (such as pressure and vacuum relief valves)

■ Inline instruments (such as a flow nozzle, rotameter, or weir)

■ General instruments (bubbles)

You can substitute the control valve or topworks after adding an instrumentto a drawing.

You can view the list of instruments in your drawing by accessing the DataManager. For more information about using the Data Manager, see ManageData and Generate Reports on page 499.

Instruments are displayed on the Instruments tab of the tool palette.

To add a control valve to a drawing


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Valves tab.

3 On the Valves tab, under Control Valves, click a control valve.


4 Do one of the following:

■ If you are adding a control valve to a project for the first time, theControl Valve Browser dialog box is displayed. Select a control valvebody and an actuator and click OK. In the drawing area, click to placethe control valve. When prompted, click again in the drawing to placethe annotation.

■ If a preview of the currently active control valve body and actuatoris displayed, change the body type or actuator. Right-click and selectChange Body or Actuator. Click in the drawing area to place thecontrol valve. When prompted, click again in the drawing area toplace the control valve annotation.


■ If you know the tag data you want to enter, enter the informationyou want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.


6 To include an annotation, double-click inside the instrument bubble.

7 In the Edit Annotation dialog box, in the Type drop-down list, select aninstrument type. Under LoopNumber, enter a loop number.

To convert a hand valve to a control valve

1 In the drawing area, right-click the hand valve you want to convert. ClickConvert to Control Valve.

2 In the Actuator Browser dialog box, under Classes, click an actuator type.Click OK.

The actuator (topworks) is added to the valve, converting the hand valveto a control valve.




Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing | 307

4 When prompted to select an annotation location, click to place theannotation.

To add a relief valve instrument to a drawing


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Instruments tab.

3 On the Instruments tab, under Relief Valves, click a relief valve.

4 When you move your cursor to the drawing area, you are prompted tospecify an insertion point. In the drawing area, click where you want toplace the valve.


■ If you know the tag data you want enter, enter the information youwant displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.


6 You are prompted to select an annotation position. Move your cursor toposition the annotation, and click where you want to place it.

To add an instrument bubble to a drawing


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Instruments tab.

3 On the Instruments tab, click an instrument bubble.

4 When you move your cursor to the drawing area, you are prompted tospecify an insertion point. In the drawing area, click where you want toplace the valve.





To substitute a control valve or topworks in a drawing

1 In the drawing area, click the control valve whose type you want tochange.

Two substitution grips are displayed: one for the control valve and onefor the topworks.

2 Do either of the following:

■ To change the control valve type, click the lower substitution grip,and in the substitution palette, click an item.

■ To change the topworks type, click the upper substitution grip, andin the substitution palette, click an item.

The substituted items are now displayed in the drawing area.

Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components toa P&ID Drawing

Inline components such as gate valves, globe valves, check valves, and reducersare placed on pipe lines.

Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing | 309

Place inline components from the tool palette, using either the Valves tab orthe Fittings tab. To expedite your design, use attachment points to help youplace inline components precisely on the lines.

To adjust the placement of an inline component, reposition the componentusing grips. Inline components move when you move lines to which they areconnected.

If you change the size of a pipe line that is attached to a reducer, the reducerautomatically reorients to display with its larger size attached to the line withthe larger diameter, and its smaller size attached to the line with the smallerdiameter.

Graphic DisplayAction

A reducer is placed on a schematic line 4 inches indiameter. The line now has two segments, each 4inches in diameter.


Graphic DisplayAction

The diameter of the line segment to the right of thereducer is changed to 3 inches. The small size of thereducer is oriented to the right.

The diameter of the line segment to the left of thereducer is changed to 3 inches, and the diameter ofthe line segment to the right is changed to 4 inches.The small size of the reducer is automatically orientedto the left.

For inline components (such as valves and inline instruments), you may needto show the type of end connection or its open or closed state. You can setthe end connection or the open or closed state from the Data Manager, theshortcut menu, or the Properties palette of a selected valve.

When end connections are set, the symbol automatically displays the changein the end connection. Set end connection states as follows.

Graphic displayEnd connection states

Flanged

Socket Welded

Welded

Unspecified (default)

If the tool palette contains a symbol for an open or closed state, the symbolautomatically updates as changes are made. Otherwise, the open or closed


state is reflected in the Properties palette. You can set the open or closed statesas follows.

Property palette settingOpen or closed states

Normally Open (default).Fluid can flow throughwithout someone having tomanually open a valve. Anormally open state can al-ways be set to closed.

Normally Closed. Fluid can-not flow through. A normallyclosed state can always be setto open, but it must be setmanually.

Lock Open

Lock Closed

Car Sealed Open

Car Sealed Closed

If either state is set, and you need to substitute the valve (for example, if youneed to change a flanged gate valve to a flanged ball valve), the substitutingvalve maintains the end connection and the open or closed state of theprevious valve.

To place a valve on a line


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Valves tab. Click a valve.

3 Click a line in the drawing area to place the valve on the line.


To set the end connection or the open and closed state of a valve

1 Open a drawing that contains a valve.

2 Right-click a valve in the drawing area. Click Set End Connections, andselect an end connection type (for example: Flanged).

3 Right-click the valve. Click Set Open/Closed State, and select a state (forexample: Car Sealed Open).


You can also set end connections and open or closed states from the Propertypalette or the Data Manager.

To place a reducer on a line


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Fittings tab.

3 On the Fittings tab, under Piping Fittings, click a reducer.

4 Click a line in the drawing area to place the reducer on the line.

Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and OtherNon-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing

Items that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data arecalled non-engineering items. Non-engineering items include off-pageconnectors, pins, flags, flow arrows, gaps, actuators, annotations, spec breaks,and so on.

All non-engineering items are displayed on the Non-Engineering tab of thetool palette.

Understand Connectors

Connectors maintain continuity of lines that span across drawings. Off-pageconnectors are used in pairs: in the originating drawing and in the connectingdrawing. A line leaving a drawing requires a To connector. The same line inthe second drawing requires a From connector. The same connector symbolis used for both the To and From connectors.

To connectors are placed pointing outward in the drawing:


From connectors are placed pointing inward:

Both connectors should have the same connector number to visually identifythe continuity between drawings. It is recommended that you number theFrom connector before you connect it to a To connector. If a pair of connectedconnectors do not have a connector number, it is recommended that youassign the same number to the two connectors.

Connectors can also show the drawing numbers (for easy tracking), and tagdata.

The following table describes how you display data for an off-page connector(using the From connector example in the previous illustration).

Where data is enteredRepresentsItem in “FromConnector” ex-ample

In the drawing, click the line towhich the connector is attached.

Pipe line group serviceCC

Right-click and click Assign Tag. Inthe Service drop-down menu, clickCC.

Double-click the connector, and inthe Properties palette, ConnectorNumber field, enter 50011.

Connector number50011

Double-click the connector, and inthe Properties palette, Origin or

Origin or destinationFrom Tank T-201

Destination field, enter the name ofthe component that the connectororiginates from, in this case, FromTank T-201.

Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing | 315

Where data is enteredRepresentsItem in “FromConnector” ex-ample

In the Project Manager, right-clickthe drawing the connector comes

Drawing number of theconnected drawing

PID-111

from, and click Properties. In theDWG Number field, add PID-111.

Understand the Rules for Adding Off-page Connectors Between Drawings

Keep the following rules in mind when you use off-page connectors:

■ If one line already has a line number defined, the second line inherits thenumber.

■ If both lines have their line numbers defined, a line connection cannotbe made, or the line numbers must be reconciled.

■ If neither line has a line number defined, the lines are grouped and theconnectors are added. A line number can be added later.

■ If an off-page connector is connected to a pipe line, and you are creatinga connection between drawings, you can filter drawings that do not containpipe lines that belong to the same line group as the connected line.

■ You can connect two off-page connectors that are in the same drawing,as long as you connect a To connector to a From connector.

Understand Pins

On the Non-engineering tab of the P&ID DIN tool palette are two pin-shapedsymbols that you use to identify a segment break. In the KKS tagging standard,pins can identify a change in Unit Number or System Code.

A pin can either be open (no-fill) or closed (black fill):

■ Open pins. Open pins mark the boundaries of a group with a commonproperty. For example, between open pins, a pipe line has the same Unit


Number. However, simply placing the pins on a line does not change theproperties. You must manually change the properties of the lines beyondthe open-pin boundary.

■ Closed pins. Closed pins identifies a break in piping sub-systems orbranches in a pipe line. For example, a Unit Number might change at thisbreak. The insertion of the closed pin does not automatically change theUnit Number in this example; you must change it manually.

Pins act like segment breakers. When you insert a pin into a straight schematicline, the pin breaks the line into two segments. However, if you insert an openpin at the end of the line, it does not break the line.

Understand Flow Direction Flags

A flag symbol, like an arrow symbol, indicates the direction of the flow. Theflag symbol contains the line number annotation. In your drawings, you canuse arrow symbols, flag symbols, or both.

Follow these guidelines when using flags:

■ If you change the direction of flow of a line, the flag symbol adjusts toindicate the new direction of flow. The text adjusts to read from left-to-rightor from bottom-to-top. Changing the flag direction does not alter the flowdirection of the pipe line.

■ In a KKS environment, the tag number for the pipe line appears on twolevels in the flag symbol. On the first level, within the flag, are the Unit,System Code, and System Number properties. On the second level, betweenthe flag and the pipe line, are the Function Key Code and ComponentNumber. Regardless of the orientation and position of the flag on the line,the component identification code and component number always appearclosest to the pipe line.

To create a line connection between two drawings


Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing | 317

2 In the P&ID tool palette, Non-Engineering tab, under Connectors, clickOff-Page Connector.

3 In the drawing area of the first drawing, click near the end of a line toselect a location for the first of two off-page connectors. The off-pageconnector snaps to the end of the line.

4 Click the off-page connector. At the pointed end of the connector, clickthe connector grip. Click Connect To.

5 In the Create Connection dialog box, click the drawing that contains theline you want to continue, and do the following:

■ To create a new connection in the second drawing, in the Off-pageConnectors section, click Create New Connection in Selected Drawing.Click OK. In the drawing area of the second drawing, click thebeginning of the line to place the connector.

■ To override an existing connection in the second drawing, in theOff-page Connectors section, click Connect to Existing Off-pageConnector. Click OK. In the drawing area of the second drawing, clickthe connector on a line to place the new connector data. At the Theoff-page connector you selected is already connected to another connector.Overwrite the existing connection? prompt, select Yes.

6 To display only those drawings that contain pipe lines belonging to thesame line group as the connected line, select Only Show Drawings ThatContain Line Segments in Line Group n.

7 Click OK.

To view an existing line connection between two drawings

■ In the drawing area, click the off-page connector whose connection youwant to view. At the pointed end of the connector, hover over theconnector grip, and click Go to Connector.In the drawing where the line connection is established, the display iszoomed in on the off-page connector.

To add a miscellaneous symbol, connector, or trim symbol to a drawing


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Non-Engineering tab.

3 On the Non-Engineering tab, click an item.


4 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the non-engineeringitem.

NOTE If the symbol you are inserting is a pin, remember that, although itbreaks the line, you must update the properties appropriately.

Quick Reference

Commands

OFFPAGECONNECT

System Variables

No entries

Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While RetainingIts Data

Edit an existing P&ID component by changing the geometry of the componentand then saving the new geometry.

You might find a component in the tool palette that almost matches acomponent that you use in your drawings. Rather than creating a newcomponent, you can change a single instance of a component by editing itsgeometry in the block editor. Only the geometry is edited. Annotations andother component data is preserved.

For example, if the P&ID tool palette contains a tank that is similar to oneyou want to use but is not as tall as you need it to be, you can edit thecomponent and stretch the lines to create a new instance.

To edit the geometry of a P&ID component while retaining its data


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the tab that contains the component youwant to edit. Click the component.

3 Click in the drawing to place the component.

4 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Edit Block.

Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its Data | 319

5 Select the component to open it in the block editor. Modify the geometryas needed.

6 In the Edit P&ID Object’s toolbar, save changes and exit the block editor.

Quick Reference

Commands

PIDEDITBLOCK

System Variables

No entries

Create and Use AssembliesAssemblies are combinations of connected components that are placed in adrawing at the same time.

Assemblies can include P&ID components and lines. For example, a levelgauge assembly might contain an instrument and five valves, including twoball valves.

When you place an assembly created in a P&ID drawing, the data andconnection behavior is retained for the components and lines that make upthe assembly. For example, if you added a manufacturer and model numberto a valve before you made the valve part of the assembly, that data is retainedin the assembly.

Tagging information is also retained. A question mark is added to the end ofthe tag, indicating that the tag must be adjusted to avoid duplication. Afteryou insert the assembly parts, you can change the tags and assign uniquevalues where necessary.

To create an assembly and place it in a P&ID drawing

1 In a P&ID drawing, place components and lines to create an assembly.

2 At the Command prompt, enter wblock.

3 In the Write Block dialog box, select Objects.

4 Click Select Objects.


5 In the drawing, select the objects that make up the assembly. Press ENTERto complete object selection.

6 In the Write Block dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Base Point, click Pick Point to specify a point in the drawing,or enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.

■ Under Destination, enter a file name and path for the new drawing,or click the [...] button to browse to a location.

■ Click OK.

7 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert.

8 In the Insert dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Name list, click the assembly you just created, or click Browseto locate the drawing.

■ In the lower-left corner, select Explode.

■ Click OK.

9 When you move your cursor to the drawing, you are prompted to specifyan insertion point. In the drawing, click where you want to place theassembly.

10 Change the tagging information for individual components and lines asneeded.

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID DrawingSchematic lines are dynamic lines that represent pipes lines or instrumentlines. They connect to components, and contain valves and other items. Theyare similar to AutoCAD lines, but they contain additional information suchas flow direction, tag information, and line size.

Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing | 321

The two types of schematic line groups in AutoCAD Plant 3D are pipe linesand instrument lines. Each line type has its own set of properties (such aslayer, linetype, thickness, linestyle, color, and tag information).

At the end of each line segment, the arrow indicates the flow direction. Theflow direction is determined by the direction you move the line as you createit.

You can change the direction of flow, using the shortcut menu. For moreinformation about changing the flow direction of a line, see Define theDirectional Flow of Schematic Lines on page 329

Understand Line Groups, Line Segments, and Linked Line Segments

Schematic lines are represented in the program in two ways: as line groups,which are conceptual representations (or types) of lines (such as sewage linesor hot water pipes), and as line segments, which are actual purchasable pipes.

You can link a line segment to another line segment. When a line is linked,it assumes the tag information of the line to which it is linked. If you link aline belonging to one group to a line in another group, the line leaves itsoriginal group and joins the new group.

NOTE You can link lines only within a drawing. To link lines across drawings, usean off-page connector. For more information, see Add Off-page Connectors, FlowArrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing on page 314.

Each time you add a line to a drawing, you are prompted to continue the linegroup, start a new line group, or link the line to another line segment.


The following chart explains the important differences between the threechoices. See also SLINE.

Data ManagerResult and TagActionPrompt

The new line segmentassumes the tag of

You areprompted to

Continuesline group

■ No change to the pipeline group

the selected linegroup

select an exist-ing line group

■ A new row is created forthe new pipe line seg-mentto which the

new line seg-ment will beadded

A new group is cre-ated, and the new

The new linesegment be-

New slinegroup

■ A new row is created forthe new pipe line group

line segment tag isempty

comes part ofa newly cre-ated group

■ A new row is created forthe new pipe line seg-ment

The new line seg-ment:

You areprompted to

Link slinesegment

■ No change to the pipeline group

■ assumes the tagof the selectedline segment

select an exist-ing line seg-ment to which

■ No new row; the newsegment is representedby the same row as the

the new line segment to which it islinked

■ is added to selec-ted segment’sgroup

segment willbe linked

■ assumes the tagof the line group

Segments in a group inherit properties from that group. By default, a pipe linesegment tag gets its service and line number from its pipe line group. Theuniqueness of pipe line segments and groups is controlled by the pipe linegroup tag.

Understand To and From Line Information

To and From line information is automatically created and stored for the pipelines represented in your P&ID drawings. You can’t manually change theinformation stored in the To or From fields for a line segment. The From field


indicates where the line segment originates, and the To field indicates a linesegment’s destination. As you make changes to a P&ID drawing by movingline segments or adding components, the To and From information isconstantly being updated.

The following list explains the different situations in which information isreported for the From field on a line segment:

■ If the line segment originates from an equipment item, the Equipment tagis reported.

■ If the line segment originates on another pipe segment, that line segment’stag is reported.

■ If the line segment originates from multiple pipe segments, the multipletags are separated by commas and are reported.

■ If the line segment originates on a tagged inline item (such as a controlvalve), the tag from the inline item is reported. This happens only if theinline item is being used as the endline item.

■ If the segment originates on a reducer or other segment breaker (SpecBreak), the pipe line segment tag on the other side of the reducer/breakeris reported.

■ If the segment originates on a non-tagged item (such as a pipe cap), thecomponent’s description is reported.

■ If the segment does not originate on a component, inline tagged item, ornon-tagged item, no value is reported; the field is blank.

The information for the To field on a line segment is reported the same wayit is for the From field.

NOTE Off-page connectors are not used to determine the values for the To andFrom fields for a line segment. When a line segment is attached to an off-pageconnector, the To or From field is reported based on what the terminatingcomponent, inline tagged item, or non-tagged item is on the other drawing.

To add a line to an existing line group

The following procedures are valid for both pipe lines and signal lines.


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line.


3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of theline.

4 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point of the line.

5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in thedrawing area.

NOTE All lines drawn from the start point to end point (when you pressEnter) form one segment and have one data record.

6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, selectContinue Sline Group.

7 When prompted, click the group you want the new line to join.

8 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and join the specifiedgroup.

To add a line to a new line group



3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of thepipe line.


5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in thedrawing area.


6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select NewSline Group.

7 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and place the new linesegment in a new line group.


To add a line and link it to an existing line



3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of theline.


5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in thedrawing.


6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select LinkSline Segment.

7 When prompted, click the line to which you want the new line to link.

8 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and link the line.

Quick Reference

Commands

SLINE

System Variables

SLINEORTHO

Interface Reference

No entries

Connect Schematic Lines to ComponentsSchematic lines are primarily used to connect components, although they canalso connect to other schematic lines.


When a P&ID schematic line is connected to a component or other schematicline, it displays a connection grip at the end of the line when the line isselected.

When a schematic line is not attached to a component, an endline grip isdisplayed at the end of the line when the line is selected.

For more information about grips and other AutoCAD Plant 3D interfaceelements, see Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273.

To connect a schematic line to a component



3 In the drawing area, move the cursor near the outside of the componentwhere you want the line to connect. When an attachment point isdisplayed, click to connect the line and component.

4 To create more line segments, continue clicking in the drawing area.


■ Press ENTER to end the schematic line.

■ Move the cursor to another component’s edge, and click when theattachment points are displayed.

Connect Schematic Lines to Components | 327

NOTE If you move the schematic line, the component you added to it moves withthe line.

To connect a component to a schematic line



3 Click in the drawing area to specify the first point of the line.


5 To create more line segments, continue clicking in the drawing area.

6 In the P&ID tool palette, click the tab that contains the component youwant to add. Click the component.

7 In the drawing area, click the end of the schematic line where anattachment point is displayed, and if prompted, follow the on-screeninstructions to place the component.

NOTE If you move the schematic line, the component you added to it moves withthe line.

Understand Schematic Line Grouping and LinkingBehavior

When you add a schematic line to a drawing and choose to either continuethe line group, create a new line group, or link the line, you can see the groupsand line segments through visual cues. You can also examine how the groupsand lines are represented in the Data Manager.

To view a schematic line group

■ In the drawing area, hover the mouse over the schematic line whosegrouping you want to view.The line segment is displayed with dashed lines and is highlighted. Theentire line group is displayed with dashed lines.

To select a schematic line segment

■ In the drawing area, click a schematic line to select the active line segment.


To select all schematic linked line segments

■ In the drawing area, press CTRL+~ (tilde) while selecting the linkedsegments.

To select a schematic line group

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Schematic Line panel ➤ Sline GroupSelect.

2 Click a schematic line in the drawing area.

Command entry: SLGROUPSELECTShortcut menu: Select Group

Define the Directional Flow of Schematic LinesSchematic lines use flow arrows to display the flow direction. Most signal linesdo not have flow arrows because the flow direction is not relevant to the P&IDdrawing.

Flow arrows are located at the end of each schematic line segment. You caneasily change the direction of the flow arrows.

To change the flow direction of a schematic line

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit.

2 In the drawing area, click the schematic line whose directional flow youwant to change.

3 In the Schematic Line Edit list, click Reverseflow.

To delete or move a flow arrow

1 In the drawing area, click the schematic line arrow that you want to deleteor move.

2 Click the Flow Arrow grip and delete it or move it to another locationon the schematic line.

Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines | 329

Quick Reference

Commands

SLEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Edit Schematic LinesAfter you have placed a schematic line in a drawing, you can perform a numberof editing tasks on the line. You can also use grips to edit a line.

The Schematic Line Edit list includes the following options:

■ Attach. Programatically attaches a line to a component, although the lineand component may not be attached visually. Use this option when spaceon the P&ID drawing is limited.

■ Detach. Programatically detaches an attached line from a component.

■ Gap. Adds a gap and gap symbols where a line crosses a component. A linewith a gap in it is still a single line. The gap is visual only.

■ uNgap. Removes a gap and the gap symbols from a line, and automaticallymends the line.

■ Straighten. Straightens a non-orthogonal line to a selected anchor pointon the line. Straightens a curved sline to a straight line.

■ Corner. Adds a corner segment to a line. The direction and length of thecorner segment are determined by points you specify. When this operationis performed on a curved sline, the corresponding portion of the arc isremoved to create the corner.

■ Reverseflow. Reverses the flow of the line, and flips the arrows to the newdirection.

■ Join. Joins two separate lines on the same or different axis to form a singleline.

■ Break. Creates two separate lines from one line.

■ Link. Links two separate lines.

■ Unlink. Unlinks two lines that were previously linked.


■ eXit. Closes the Schematic Line Edit list.

You can perform other editing tasks on lines, including:

■ Trimming a line when it extends over other lines or components (use theTRIM command).

■ Extending a line to connect it to other lines or components (use theEXTEND command).

■ Continuing or shortening a line (use the Endline grip on the line).

■ Stretching a line to move assemblies connected to the line and nozzles onattached tanks (use the STRETCH command).

To attach a schematic line to a component

1 In a drawing, right-click a schematic line and click Schematic Line Edit ➤ Attach to Component.

2 Select the schematic line that you want to attach.

3 Select the component to which you want to attach.

4 Press ENTER.

To detach a schematic line from a component

1 In a drawing, right-click a schematic line and click Schematic Line Edit ➤ Detach from Component.

2 Select the schematic line that you want to detach.

3 Select the endpoint closest to the component from which you want todetach.

4 Press ENTER.

To add a gap on a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line where you want to add thegap

3 At Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click Gap.

4 Click a point in the schematic line where you want to add a gap.

Edit Schematic Lines | 331

5 Click the second point to create the gap.

6 Press ENTER.

To remove a gap on a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a point on the schematic line where you wantto remove the gap.

3 At the Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click uNgap.

4 Press ENTER.

To straighten a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic Line Editlist prompt, click Straighten.

3 Click an endpoint to use as the point of alignment.

To add a corner to a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic Line Editlist prompt, click Corner.

3 Click another point for the corner segment.

4 Click another point where you want to add the corner.

To join schematic lines


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic line Editlist prompt, click Join.

3 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point.

4 Click the next point or press ENTER to end the series of schematic linesegments.


To break a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic line Editlist, click Break.

3 Click the point where you want to break the schematic line.

4 Click another break point or press ENTER to exit.

To link a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic Line Editlist, click Link.

3 Click the line segment to which you want the line linked.

4 At the warning prompt, press the Down arrow to select Yes and link theline.

To unlink a schematic line


2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic line Editlist, click Unlink.

3 At the warning prompt, press the Down arrow to select Yes and unlinkthe line.

To trim a schematic line

1 At the command line, enter trim.

2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use as the cutting edges.

3 Press ENTER.

4 Click the part of the line you want to trim.

To extend a schematic line

1 At the command line, enter extend.

Edit Schematic Lines | 333

2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use for the boundingedges.

3 Press ENTER.

4 Click the part of the line you want to extend.

To shorten a schematic line

1 Click the schematic line you want to shorten.

2 Select the Endline grip on the line segment where you want to shortenthe line, and move the cursor to decrease the line’s length.

3 Click to set the new line length.

To continue a schematic line

1 Click the schematic line you want to continue.

2 Select the Endline grip on the line segment where you want to extendthe line, and move the cursor to increase the line’s length.

3 Click to set the new line length.

To stretch a schematic line

1 At the command line, enter stretch.

2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use for the boundingedges.

3 Press ENTER.

4 Click the part of the line you want to stretch.


Quick Reference

Commands

SLEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Tag Components and LinesYou can assign tags to your components and lines.

Understand the Difference Between a Tag and an AnnotationA tag is data and never appears on a drawing. An annotation, however, oftenincludes a tag property and displays that property on a drawing. The result isan annotation, not a tag. Because the terms tag and annotation are easilyconfused, they are described in detail in this table.

An annotation is:A tag is:

Information about a component or linesegment that appears on a drawing

A unique identifier for a component or linesegment

Text and (optional) shapesData

Located on the drawing paneLocated in the data cache

Not necessarily uniqueUnique

Viewable in the drawingViewable as a property in the data manager

Not necessarily a single entity per compon-ent or line segment. (A component or linesegment can have multiple annotations.)

A single entity for each component or linesegment

Text defined in the Annotation Style's blockdefinition

Comprised of subparts as defined by theTag Format

Text that can include the tag property ofa component or line segment. This text isnot a tag, but an annotation.

Tag Components and Lines | 335

Add and Modify Tags

You can tag components and lines to identify them as unique items in aproject.

Depending on how your administrator set up your project, you may beprompted to assign tag information as you place components or lines.However, if you do not know all of the tagging data at that time, you candismiss the prompt and tag a component or line whenever you have the dataavailable.

You can assign or modify tag information to a component or line by usingthe ribbon, the Properties palette, the shortcut menu, or the Data Manager.

For more information about the Data Manager, see Edit Data Properties in theData Manager on page 507.

NOTE Do not use Find and Replace to modify tag information.

Components such as equipment, nozzles, valves, instruments, and pipe lineshave the following default tag formatting:








If your tag formats are different than those listed above, your administratormay have changed the formatting. For more information about the tag formatsthat are set up for your company, see your administrator.


When you copy a component or line, or create a new line by insertingequipment into an existing line, the new item is assigned a temporary tagthat contains a question mark to differentiate it from the original tag. Forexample, if the original tag for a component is P-100, the temporary tag mightbe P-100?.

Check for Existing Tags

As you assign tags to components and lines in a P&ID drawing, you can checkto see which tags are already used in the drawing. When you are tagging anozzle, only the equipment item attached to the nozzle to is scanned forexisting tagged nozzles. The entire project is not scanned.

You can use the listed tag references to either find the next available tag or tocopy the values of a tagged item to the tag fields of the item you are tagging.Once you copy a tag, you make the necessary changes to it to make sure it isunique within the drawing.

Understand Temporary Tags

When you copy a component or line, or create a new line by insertingequipment into an existing line, the new item is assigned a temporary tagthat contains a question mark to differentiate it from the original tag. Forexample, if the original tag for a piece of equipment is P-100, the temporarytag might be P-100?.

To tag a component or line when placing it in a drawing


2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the component you want to place. Clickin the drawing area to place the component.

3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, enter the required data.

4 Click Assign.

To add a tag after a component or line is placed in a drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

2 In the drawing area, click the component whose tagging data you wantto add or modify.

3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, change the required data.

Tag Components and Lines | 337

4 Click Assign.

To add a tag to a nozzle

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.

2 In the drawing area, click the nozzle whose tagging data you want to addor modify.


4 (Optional) To the right of Existing Nozzles, click the arrow, and in theexpanded list below, do either of the following:

■ To ensure that a unique tag is used, view all the nozzles that arecurrently attached to the equipment item of the nozzle you selected.

■ To populate the tagging fields for the nozzle, double-click one of thelisted nozzles. Use the existing data as a basis for the new tag.

5 Click Assign.

To add a tag to an instrument

1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click the instrument whose tagging data youwant to add or modify.

2 Click Assign Tag.


4 (Optional) To the right of Existing, click the arrow, and in the expandedlist below, do either of the following:

■ To ensure that a unique tag is used, view all the inline instrumentsthat are currently in the project.

■ Double-click one of the listed inline instruments to populate thetagging fields for the inline instrument. Use the existing data as abasis for the new tag.

5 Click Assign.

To add or edit a tag using the Data Manager


2 In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Show Selected Items.


3 In the drawing area, click the item you want to tag.

In the Data Manager, the item is selected.

4 Scroll to locate the Tag field, and double-click the field.

5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, add or change the required tag data. ClickAssign.

6 Repeat steps 4-6 for other items you want to tag, or close the DataManager.

To add or edit a tag using the Properties palette

1 In the drawing, double-click the item you want to tag.

2 In the Properties palette, P&ID section, to the right of Tag, click [...].

3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, add or change the required tag data. ClickAssign.

Quick Reference

Commands

PIDTAG

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Assign Tag Dialog Box

Annotate Components and LinesYou can annotate components and lines at any time.

Add Annotations

Annotation is text placed in a drawing to describe a component or line. Itdisplays the properties or tag data of a component or line.

Annotate Components and Lines | 339

You can annotate a component or line using any of the following methods:

■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Annotate.

■ Right-click a component or line, and click Annotate.

■ At the Command prompt, enter pidannotate.

■ In the Data Manager, you can annotate components and lines from theproperties displayed in the Data Manager.

For more information about the Data Manager, see Place Annotations in aP&ID Drawing from the Data Manager on page 510.

Following is an example of a horizontal centrifugal pump annotated with apump tag and a pump InfoTag:

Annotations are linked to the properties, or data, of the component or line.If the data changes, the annotation updates accordingly. However, not allannotations are linked visually to the component or line. You can addfreestanding annotations, which do not move in the drawing when you movea component or line, or linked annotations, which move with the item. Linkedannotations might include an instrument bubble or an equipment InfoTag.

Some annotations (such as valve size) are displayed automatically, and somerequire that you place them in a drawing.

Components and lines are not required to have tag data before you annotatethem. For example, you can annotate an item with its size, manufacturer, andso on.


To annotate a component or line

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Annotate.

2 In the drawing area, click the component or line you want to annotate.

3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, enter the tagging data. Click OK.

4 Select an annotation type.

The annotation choices displayed depend on the component or line youselect.

5 If prompted, click in the drawing to place the annotation.

To convert a linked annotation into a freestanding annotation

1 In the drawing, right-click the linked annotation.

2 Clear the Moves with Parent check box to turn off the linking behavior.

To convert a freestanding annotation into a linked annotation

1 In the drawing, right-click the freestanding annotation.

2 Click Moves with Parent.

To move an annotation from its parent component or line

1 In the drawing, right-click the annotation you want to move.

2 Click Place from Parent.

3 Move and place the annotation in the drawing.

To edit an annotation

1 In the drawing, right-click the annotation you want to edit, and clickEdit.

2 In the Edit Annotation dialog box, modify the annotation data, and clickOK.

Annotate Components and Lines | 341

Quick Reference

Commands

PIDANNOTATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Assign Tag Dialog Box

Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&IDComponents or Lines

You can identify AutoCAD objects as AutoCAD Plant 3D components or linesby converting the objects.

You can also add the converted object to the tool palette for use in the currentproject.

Convert an AutoCAD Object to a P&ID Component

An AutoCAD block or a group of AutoCAD lines is converted to a specific classdefinition in the P&ID schema. For example, you can convert a group ofAutoCAD lines to a component of the “vessel” class definition.

This group of lines is converted into a single AutoCAD Plant 3D component.It contains the same data and graphical properties as an original AutoCADPlant 3D component. The vessel is referenced in the Data Manager and inrelevant reports (such as an Equipment List report).

In addition, the converted object has the same grip behavior and dynamicbehavior as AutoCAD Plant 3D components.

Convert an AutoCAD Object as a P&ID Schematic Line

You can convert AutoCAD lines and polylines (including splines or polylineswith arcs) into line class definitions that are recognized as P&ID data.Converting an AutoCAD line adds a record for that line in the Data Manager,and includes it in reports. You can specify P&ID line properties such as size,service, and spec.


NOTE An AutoCAD line that is converted to an AutoCAD Plant 3D line does nothave the same dynamic behaviors of P&ID schematic lines. For example, aconverted line does not automatically break when inline components are insertedin the line. It does not have flow direction properties.

Add a Converted Object to the Tool Palette

Once you convert objects to P&ID components or lines, you can add theconverted objects to a P&ID tool palette. The object becomes a tool on thetool palette, and can be placed in project drawings like any other P&ID tool.

You should understand the following when using converted objects as toolson the tool palette:

■ The drawing file that contains the converted object must be saved to thecurrent project.

■ The converted object is available for all drawings in the current project,but only on the workstation where it was created.

■ Converted objects that become part of your tool palette are not added tothe project components and lines.

To convert a component

1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD object and click Convert toP&ID Object.

2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a component (forexample, a Centrifugal Pump) in the tree view.

3 Click OK.

4 In the drawing, if prompted, specify an insertion base point.

To convert a line

1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD line and click Convert toP&ID Object.

2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a line type in the treeview.

3 Click OK.

Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or Lines | 343

To add a converted object to the tool palette

1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD object and click Convert toP&ID Object.

2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a line or component typein the tree view.

3 Click OK.

4 Save the drawing file.

5 On the tool palette, click the tab where you want to place the new tool.

6 Click and hold the converted object, and drag it to the tool palette.

Quick Reference

Commands

PIDCONVERT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Convert to P&ID Object Dialog Box

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCADExport a P&ID drawing file to an AutoCAD drawing file format without losingthe visual fidelity of the P&ID drawing.

The exported drawing retains all P&ID components and annotations asAutoCAD blocks. All P&ID schematic lines are retained as AutoCAD lines. Youcan then use AutoCAD to open, view, edit, and plot the exported P&ID DWGfiles.

Avoid Proxy Graphics

You can use AutoCAD and AutoCAD P&ID to open and view drawing files inthe DWG file format. However, you cannot use AutoCAD to edit customobjects created in P&ID, such as pipe lines, nozzles, and other equipment.


AutoCAD treats such custom objects as proxy graphics. You cannot edit ormodify proxy graphics using AutoCAD.

To open a P&ID drawing in AutoCAD, first export the drawing file to AutoCAD.Exporting the drawing ensures that the AutoCAD drawing looks identical tothe P&ID drawing. Moreover, the custom objects in P&ID are converted toAutoCAD blocks and lines instead of proxy graphics. You can then edit theseblocks and lines in AutoCAD.

For more information about proxy graphics, see “Work With Custom and ProxyGraphics” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Maintain Visual Fidelity

In an exported drawing, components (equipment, nozzles, instruments, inlinecomponents, and non-engineering items) look exactly like those in the originalP&ID drawing. All the information that is displayed in the drawing (such ascolor, position, and size) is retained in the exported drawing.

For schematic lines, all visual information (such as color, linetype, line weight,and so on) is retained in the AutoCAD lines.

Annotations placed on components and lines are exported as AutoCAD blocks.They retain their position, size, and orientation in the drawing.

Save, View, Edit, Plot as AutoCAD Files

To export a P&ID drawing file, save it in one of the following AutoCAD fileformats:

■ AutoCAD 2010 Drawing (*.dwg)

■ AutoCAD 2007/LT 2007 Drawing (*.dwg)

After exporting the P&ID drawing to AutoCAD, you can view, edit, and plotthe drawing as you would any AutoCAD drawing.

All the layers in a P&ID drawing are retained in the AutoCAD file format.

Similarly, all model space, paper spaces, and any user-created layouts areavailable in the AutoCAD file format.

NOTE It is recommended that you use the EXPORTTOAUTOCAD command toexport layouts correctly. Using an AutoCAD command, such as EXPORTLAYOUT,does not export all P&ID layers correctly and might result in lost data or explodedobjects.

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD | 345

To export a P&ID drawing to AutoCAD

1 If the Project Manager is not already open, click Home tab ➤ Projectpanel ➤ Project Manager.

2 If the correct project is not already open, open it now.

3 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want toexport to AutoCAD. Click Open.

4 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing. Click Exportto AutoCAD.

If the drawing is not saved, you are prompted to save it.

NOTE You cannot edit read-only drawings. AutoCAD P&ID does not promptyou to save a read-only drawing when you try to export it.

5 In the Unsaved Drawing dialog box, click Yes to save the drawing andcontinue with the export process.

NOTE You cannot export a P&ID drawing when it is not open.

6 In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, browse to the location where youwant to save the drawing. In the File Name box, specify a file name.


NOTE If a drawing file with the same name already exists in the specifiedlocation, an error message is displayed. You can overwrite the existing file oruse a unique file name. If the existing drawing file is a P&ID project drawing,you cannot overwrite it. You must specify a unique name for the drawingfile.

7 In the Files of Type box, specify one of the following file formats for thedrawing:

■ AutoCAD 2010 Drawing (*.dwg)

■ AutoCAD 2007/LT 2007 Drawing (*.dwg)

8 Click Save.

Quick Reference

Commands

EXPORTTOAUTOCAD

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Export To AutoCAD Dialog Box

Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD | 347

348

Work with AutoCAD P&IDDrawings in AutoCADPlant 3D

You can place Plant 3D equivalents of P&ID objects in your 3D model to minimize data entry.

You can validate the model to make sure that it is synchronized with the P&ID drawing.

OverviewP&ID drawings and Plant 3D models represent many of the same objects indifferent forms.

Piping and inline equipment such as fittings and valves, whether they arerepresented schematically or in 3D, are closely related. If you have createdAutoCAD P&ID drawings for a project, you can use these drawings to minimizedata entry when creating a 3D model. With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can takeadvantage of the relationship between the two drawing types to perform thefollowing tasks:

■ Create a project that contains both P&ID drawings and Plant 3D models.For more information about the Project Manager, see Work with ProjectDrawings on page 253.

■ Use data from P&ID objects to assist in creating Plant 3D objects.

■ View P&ID and Plant 3D data in the Data Manager.

7

349

Understand the Mapping of Classes and Properties

P&ID classes and properties are mapped to corresponding Plant 3D classesand properties by default. Your administrator makes sure that P&ID objectsare mapped to their 3D counterparts appropriately.

For more information about the mapping process, see Understand Mappingon page 182.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIDLINELIST

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

P&ID Line List


Understand the P&ID Line ListYou can use the P&ID Line List to view the lines and components availablein a P&ID drawing.

The P&ID Line List window displays all line segments and associated fittings,valves, and inline components in a P&ID drawing. Pipe line group numberdetermines the order of lines. You can select any available P&ID object andplace its mapped Plant 3D counterpart in the Plant 3D model. When you placea Plant 3D object in a model, the property values of the P&ID object are copiedto the Plant 3D model as well.

NOTE A P&ID object must be mapped to a Plant 3D object before you can placean equivalent Plant 3D object in the model. In the list, unmapped items areunavailable for placement.

When you place the mouse over the various tree nodes, the tooltip displaysthe item name and its mapping.

350 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

To open the P&ID Line List

1 Open a Plant 3D model.

2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID LineList.

3 In the P&ID Line List window, in the drop-down list, click the P&IDdrawing you want to open.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIDLINELIST

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

P&ID Line List


Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line NumbersYou can click a line segment in the P&ID Line List to place its mappedcounterpart in the model.

Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers | 351

The P&ID Line List presents the line segments and related components thatappear in a specified P&ID drawing. You can click any available line segmentand place its Plant 3D counterpart in the 3D model.

To place a line in a Plant 3D model


2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID LineList.

3 In the P&ID Line List window, do the following:

■ In drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing whose lines andcomponents you want to view.

■ In the tree view, expand the Pipe Line Group. Click a line segment.

■ Click Place.


■ If the size and spec match, go to step 5.

■ If the size or spec do not match, in the Select Size and Spec dialogbox, do the following:

■ Under Spec, click a spec (for example: CS150).

■ Under Size, click a size (for example: 4”).

■ If you are sure that your choice is accurate for all situations, selectthe check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size].(The spec is not saved along with the size.)


■ Click Select.

NOTE If the size you want is not available, you can specify a substitutethat you can correct later. Unless you are sure that your choice isaccurate, do not select the check box labeled Always Substitute theSelected Size For [size]. See Edit Size Mappings on page 357

5 In the drawing area, click the location for the start point of the pipe.

6 Click the next point of the pipe.

7 Continue clicking additional points of the pipe.

8 Press ENTER.

Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers | 353

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIDLINELIST

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

P&ID Line List


Select 3D Class Dialog Box

Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline EquipmentYou can choose valves, fittings, and inline equipment from the P&ID LineList and place mapped Plant 3D counterparts in the model.

Valves, fittings, and inline equipment are listed under each line segment. Youcan click any available component and place it in the Plant 3D model. Onlythose P&ID objects that have been mapped to corresponding Plant 3D objectsare available for placement. Mapping ensures that the Plant 3D model has thesame property values as the corresponding P&ID object.

If a P&ID object is mapped to more than one Plant 3D object, you can specifythe Plant object when you place it in your drawing.

To place valves, fittings, or inline equipment based on P&ID data in the 3Dmodel


2 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line List.

3 In the P&ID Line List window, do the following:

■ In the drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing whose lines andcomponents you want to view.

■ In the tree view, expand the Pipe Line Group. Click an item (forexample: Gate Valve).


■ Click Place.


■ If the size and spec match, go to step 5.

■ If the size or spec do not match, in the Select Size and Spec dialogbox, do the following:

■ Under Spec, click a spec (for example: CS150).

■ Under Size, click a size (for example: 4”).

■ If you are sure that your choice is accurate for all situations, selectthe check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size].(The spec is not saved along with the size.)

■ If the size you want is not available, click Edit Size Mappings toedit the default mapping file. For more information, see Edit SizeMappings on page 357.

■ Click Select.

Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment | 355


■ If the P&ID object class is mapped to a single Plant 3D class, go step6.

■ If the P&ID object class is mapped to multiple Plant 3D classes, in theSelect Plant 3D Class dialog box, in the 3D Classes list, click a Plant3D class. Click Place.

6 In the drawing area, click a point on a pipe to specify the location forthe inline equipment.

7 Press ENTER.

For more information, see Place Valves on page 471


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIDLINELIST

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

P&ID Line List


Edit Size MappingsIf the sizes in a P&ID drawing do not match the sizes available for a Plant 3Dmodel, you can edit the default mapping file.

Understand Size Mapping

If the size (or spec) information of the P&ID object is not found in thecorresponding Plant 3D information, you can supply this information. Forexample, if a P&ID valve specifies a size that does not exist for any Plant 3Dvalve, you are prompted to supply the correct size. If you specify, for example,4”, you are offered the opportunity of saving that size as a match.

You can also edit the default mapping files to modify or add sizes. Consultyour system administrator if you have size-mapping questions.

To edit size mappings



Edit Size Mappings | 357

3 If you have attempted to place an object and the Select Size and Specdialog box is displayed, click Edit Size Mappings.

■

■ If you want to edit size mappings but the Select Size and Spec dialogbox is not displayed, at the Command prompt, enterplantpidsizemapping.

4 In the Size Mapping dialog box, click Imperial or Metric, depending onyour needs. In the P&ID Size column, click a size (for example: 3/8”).Inthe 3D Size column, in the drop-down list, click an appropriate matchingsize (for example: 3/8 inch”).Continue mapping sizes as needed. To adda new mapping, click Add Row.Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIDLINELIST

PROJECTSETUP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

P&ID Line List


Validate the 3D ModelYou can validate a model and step through the Validation Summary to corrector flag detected discrepancies.

Understand Validation Settings

Plant 3D objects based on P&ID data are not linked to their P&ID counterparts.Therefore, changes made to the P&ID drawing are not reflected in the model.However, you can validate the model against a P&ID drawing at any time tofind any mismatches that exist between the two and correct them. For moreinformation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page 360.

You can configure validation settings to check for specific discrepancies. Forexample, you can check for the following mismatches between a Plant 3Dmodel and a P&ID drawing:

■ Tagged inline items that exist in one and not the other

■ Items with the same tag that are different types

■ Properties that have different values

■ Inline items that are on different pipe lines

■ Equipment that has more (or fewer) nozzles

Validate the 3D Model | 359

Understand the Role of Tags During Validation

Using mapping, you can place Plant 3D objects in your model with all P&IDproperty value information intact. If the mapped properties are not part of atag format, the match is straightforward. If, however, the mapped propertiesare included in the P&ID tag, these properties must also be included in thePlant 3D tag.

Equivalent Tags

During validation, if a P&ID object and a Plant 3D object have the same tagvalues, the objects are considered equivalent. If the tag values are not thesame, the objects cannot be evaluated during a validation check. If the tagsmatch, other comparison tests can take place (matching type, matching line,and so on).

Here is an example of tag equivalence:

■ The P&ID property paint code is mapped to the Plant 3D property color.

■ The tag format for the P&ID object includes paint code (p-paint code).

■ An equivalent tag format for the Plant 3D object includes color (p-color).

Mismatched Tags

Make sure to map every property that you use as a subpart of a P&ID tagformat. Otherwise, the value is not copied when you place the Plant 3D objectin the model.

For example, if you have a P&ID object with a tag format that includesmanufacturer, color, and supplier, but supplier is unmapped, only the valuesfor manufacturer and color are included in the model. A question mark appearsin the Plant 3D tag. Thus, the tags do not match and the objects are notcompared during validation.

NOTE If you change a default mapping or set up a new mapping, make sure thatassociated tag formats match.

Understand the Validation Process

For best results when validating a Plant 3D model against a P&ID drawing,adhere to the following guidelines:

■ Make sure that the P&ID drawing is the most recent version.

■ Do not validate a model if P&ID information is unavailable.


■ Do not validate a model if you are using placeholder parts. Placeholderparts are ignored.

For more information about the validation process, see Validate ProjectDrawings on page 591.

To specify error types to flag

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the P&ID Drawings folder.Click Validate Config.

2 In the P&ID Validations Settings dialog box, in the Error Reporting treeview, expand 3D Model to P&ID Checks. Select the check boxes for theerror types you want examined during validation.

3 Click OK.

To validate a 3D model against a P&ID drawing

1 In the Project Manager, right-click the project node. Click Validate Project.

Validate the 3D Model | 361

2 When the Validation Progress dialog box is closed, do one of thefollowing:

■ If none of the drawings have validation errors, the ValidationComplete message is displayed. Click OK.

■ If there are errors in one or more drawings, the Validation SummaryWindow is displayed. Go to the next step.

3 To view information about each error, in the Validation Summary tree,click an error node. The drawing zooms to the problem object.

4 Perform the error action displayed in the Details pane.

Quick Reference

Commands

VALIDATE

VALIDATECONFIG

VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Validation Progress Dialog Box

P&ID Validation Settings Dialog Box

Validation Summary Window

Correct Validation ErrorsYou can correct errors identified during validation.

After you validate the drawings, a list of flagged errors is displayed in the

Validation Summary window. The following symbol identifies errors:


To zoom to specific errors, click the name of the error. Error and statusinformation is displayed in the Details area.

You can ignore the error or fix it manually. Errors flagged as Ignored can behidden by changing the setting in the Validation Summary window.

Error Validation Reference

When you validate a model, you can flag and correct the following errors.

Inline Component Missing from P&ID Drawing or from Model

Possible reasons for a mismatch include the following:Example:

■ Both items are correctly modeled, but one is mis-tagged.

■ One of the items is missing from the P&ID drawing.

■ One of the items is missing from the Plant 3D model.

Either the tag assigned in the P&ID drawing is not found in the Plant3D model or the reverse is true.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Make the necessary adjustments so that the tags match or addthe missing part.

■ Ignore the error.

Correct Validation Errors | 363

Mismatch Between Class Types

The P&ID class is Valve; the Plant 3D class is pump.Example:

The tags in the P&ID drawing and the Plant 3D model match, buttheir class types differ from the types that were mapped.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Research and correct the mapping. Or substitute the part withanother type that matches.


Property Mismatch

The P&ID property for valve manufacturer is Gordon and the Plant3D valve manufacturer is Hopkins Manufacturing.

Example:

The tags for the paired items match, but the properties values donot.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Change the property values to match.


Tagged Inline Equipment on a Different Line in 3D Model

A P&ID valve is on different lines in the P&ID drawing and the Plant3D model.

Example:

Inline equipment is not on the same line in the model as its coun-terpart in the P&ID drawing.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Move the equipment to the correct line.


Nozzle Mismatch

A tank in the P&ID drawing has two nozzles and in the Plant 3Dmodel, the same tank has three nozzles.

Example:


The model has a component with an extra nozzle or a missing nozzlewhen compared to its corresponding component in the P&IDdrawing.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Add or remove the nozzle in question.


Quick Reference

Commands

VALIDATE

VALIDATECONFIG

VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Validation Progress Dialog Box




366

Create and Modify a Plant3D Model

With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create a 3D model of piping systems. You can add pipe,equipment, structural components, and pipe supports to the model.

When you route pipe in a 3D model, fittings are automatically added when you changerouting direction or pipe size. 3D pipe objects connect to adjacent objects on the same pipeline.You can modify these objects as a group.

You use a pipe spec when routing to provide information about the pipe and available fittings.The pipe spec also determines which parts to use by default for a branch connection.

You can add equipment from a library of items including pumps, tanks, vessels, heatexchangers, and so on. When pipe is connected to a nozzle fittings and fasteners (for example:bolts and gaskets) are added automatically.

You can add pipe supports such as shoes, trunnions, trapeze bars, or dummy legs from alibrary. If you create an isometric drawing from the model it includes pipe supports.

You can create structural elements, such as AISC steel members, structural trim, stairs, andrailing. You can cut and arrange beams into structures such as a pipe rack.

367

368

Create and ModifyEquipment

In AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create and modify 3D models of plant equipment such astanks, pumps, boilers, and filters.

When modeling equipment, you define its physical dimensions, location, orientation, andother details. You can also create templates from equipment and add nozzles to connect pipesto equipment.

Create EquipmentIn AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create equipment from parametric patterns oruser-fabricated models, or add custom equipment to a drawing by convertinga 3D DWG model from another program.

When you create an equipment model, you define its geometric information,location, orientation, and non-geometric information (such as an equipmenttag or description).

Create Equipment From Parametric PatternsAutoCAD Plant 3D includes patterns for some equipment types. You can usethese patterns as a starting point for your own equipment.

Using equipment patterns, you can create your own piece of equipment simplyby changing the dimensions, placement parameters, and placement locationin the drawing area.

For example, you can create a centrifugal pump from an existing pattern witha modification to one of the values. In the illustration on the left, the positionfor the nozzle discharge (PF1C) of the centrifugal pump is offset to the right by

8

369

4 inches. The illustration on the right shows the nozzle discharge set to 0", orcentered on the pump.

The following parametric equipment patterns are provided with the program(you can also create new equipment for any of the following items):

■ Heaters. Includes Box Type Heater, Cylindrical Heater.

■ Heat Exchangers. Includes Breech Lock Heat Exchanger, Plate Frame HeatExchanger, Reboiler, Vertical Down Heat Exchanger, and Vertical Up HeatExchanger.

■ Pumps. Includes Sump Pump, Hose Pump, Horizontal Splitcase Pump,Horizontal Splitcase Turbine Pump, Vertical Inline Pump, Vertical InlinePump (dual arm), Centrifugal Pump, and Turbine Centrifugal Pump. Theshapes for pumps are fixed.

■ Strainer Equipment. Includes Strainers. The shapes for strainers are fixed.

■ Tanks. Includes Horizontal Tank and Vertical Tank.

■ Vessels. Includes Horizontal Vessel and Vertical Vessel.

You can also create a pattern by stacking individual shapes onto each otherand changing the default dimensions and placement parameters of each shape.For more information, see Create User-Fabricated Equipment on page 375.

To create equipment from an existing pattern

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Create.

370 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

2 In the Create Equipment drop-down list, click an equipment class (forexample: Vessel). In the flyout menu, click an existing equipment type(for example: Horizontal Vessel).

3 (For all equipment types except pumps and strainers) Under Shapes, clickAdd to add available shapes for this equipment type, or click Remove todelete an existing shape. Use the Up and Down arrows to change thestacking order of the shapes.

NOTE In the Shapes list, for vertical equipment, the top-most shape is listedfirst, and the bottom-most shape is listed last. For horizontal equipment, thefront is listed first and the end is listed last.

4 Under General, do the following:

■ (Optional) To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. Inthe Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type (for example:V for Vessel). In the Number box, enter a unique numeric identifier.Click Assign.

■ To assign a description for this piece of equipment, in the LongDescription box, enter a description (for example: Vessel-Custom).

■ To assign an elevation (the vertical distance from the insertion pointto the bottom of the first shape), in the Elevation box, enter a value.

Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns | 371

5 Under Shapes, click a shape. Under Dimensions, enter dimension values.Repeat this step for each shape dimension you want to change.

NOTE When you click a shape to change its dimension, the shape and itsdimension values are displayed in the preview image.

6 To add a nozzle to or modify an existing nozzle on the equipment shapeyou defined, under Shapes, click the shape. On the Nozzles tab, do thefollowing:

■ To the right of the equipment image, select an existing nozzle or clickAdd to add a nozzle to the selected equipment shape.

NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs that areincluded in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for aVertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4,Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing= RF.

■ Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click the part. In the Select Partdialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, andnominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select.

NOTE If no nozzles are displayed under Description, the combination ofnozzle type, end type, and nominal size you defined is not in the partscatalog. Try again.

■ Under Parameters, to the right of Location, select the nozzle location(Top, Bottom, or Radial). To the right of L, add a number to representthe nozzle length (the program defaults to inches). Add otherparameter information (R = radius, A = angle, L = length, P =perpendicular, I = inclination, N = rotation, O = offset, H = height,and T = twist) as necessary.


NOTE When you click a nozzle type, the position of the nozzle is displayedin the preview image.

7 On the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer,Material, Size, and so on).

Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns | 373

8 (Optional) To use this piece of equipment and its data as a template forother equipment pieces, do the following:

■ Click Templates.

■ In the drop-down list, click Save Current Settings as Template.

■ In the Save Template As dialog box, navigate to the location whereyou want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a templatename. Click Save.

NOTE The file extension for an equipment template is .peqs.

9 In the Create Equipment dialog box, click Create.

10 In the drawing area, click to place the equipment model or entercoordinates at the desired insertion point.

11 To orient the equipment model, do one of the following:

■ To orient the model to the desired position, enter rotation values oruse the compass tool. Press Enter.

■ Press Enter to accept the default position. You can use AutoCADcommands such as move, rotate, or 3drotate to further position theequipment.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTCREATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Create Equipment Dialog Box

Create User-Fabricated EquipmentFor less common pieces of equipment (such as turbine compressors), you canbuild your own equipment by selecting and assembling shapes along a verticalor horizontal axis.

You define the stacking order of the shapes along the axis, and specify thedimensions and placement parameters for the equipment. Depending on theshapes, you can also define the number, location, and dimensions of nozzles.

NOTE The shapes for pumps and strainers are fixed. You cannot add, delete, orchange the shape of these equipment types. However, you can change theirdimensions.

As the following illustration shows, you can create a vertical column by placinga large cylinder at the bottom, a cone stacked above it, a narrow cylinder ontop of the cone, and a dish head on the top. You specify the height,dimensions, and other parameters as you add each shape.

Create User-Fabricated Equipment | 375

For vertical equipment, shapes are stacked along a vertical axis, from top tobottom. For horizontal equipment, shapes are stacked along a horizontal axis,from left to right.

The following table lists the shapes that are available for creating user-fabricatedequipment.

DimensionsDescriptionPreview ImageShape

Diameter (D)A dished, spherical headwith a flange.

2:1 TorisphericHead

Diameter (D)A dished, spherical headwith no flange.

TorisphericHead



OrientationRound-to-Rect-angle Depth (D1)

Width (W)Height (H)Diameter (D2)Eccentricity (E)Rotation (A)

OrientationPyramidBottom Depth(D1)Top Depth (D2)Width (W)Height (H)

Diameter (D)A head that is one-half ofa sphere. The depth is

Halfsphere

equal to half the diameter.Used for high-pressurevessels due to its inherentstrength. Expensive tomanufacture because ofthe higher surface area, soit is only used when neces-sary.

Diameter (D)A head that is in the shapeof an ellipse, such that the

2:1 EllipticalHead Straight Flange

Height (SF)long axis is twice thelength of the short axis.The head depth is one-quarter the diameter. Hasa flange.



Diameter (D)A head that is in the shapeof an ellipse, such that the

Elliptical Head

long axis is twice thelength of the short axis.The head depth is one-quarter the diameter.Does not have a flange.

Diameter (D)CylinderHeight (H)

OrientationConeBottom Diameter(D1)Top Diameter (D2)Height (H)Eccentricity (E)Rotation (A)

Depth (D)CubeWidth (W)Height (H)

To create fabricated equipment

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Create.


2 In the Create Equipment drop-down list, click an equipment class (forexample: Vessel). In the flyout, click New <equipment type> (for example:New Vertical Vessel).

NOTE For most equipment types, you create a piece of equipment that buildson a vertical or horizontal axis.

3 Click Add to add available shapes for this equipment type. Use the Upand Down arrows to change the position of the shapes.

4 Under General, do the following:

■ (Optional) To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. Inthe Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type (for example:V for Vessel). In the Number box, enter a unique numeric identifier.Click Assign.

■ To assign a description for this piece of equipment, in the LongDescription box, enter a description (for example: Vessel-Custom).

■ To assign an elevation (the vertical distance from the insertion pointto the bottom of the first shape), in the Elevation box, enter a value.

5 Under Shapes, click a shape. Under Dimensions, enter dimension values.Repeat this step for each shape dimension you want to change.


NOTE When you click a shape to change its dimension, the shape and itsdimension values are displayed in the preview image.

6 To add a nozzle to an equipment shape you defined, under Shapes, clickthe shape. On the Nozzles tab, do the following:

■ To the right of the equipment image, click Add to add a nozzle to theselected equipment shape.

NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs, which areincluded in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for aVertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4,Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing= RF.

■ Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click the part. In the Select Partdialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, andnominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select.


■ Under Parameters, to the right of Location, select the location whereyou want to place the nozzle (Top, Bottom, Radial, or Line). To theright of L, add a number to represent the nozzle length (the programdefaults to inches). Add other parameter information (R = radius, A= angle, L = length, P = perpendicular, I = inclination, N = rotation,O = offset, H = height, and T = twist) as necessary.


NOTE When you click a nozzle type, the position of the nozzle is displayedin the preview image.

7 On the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer,Material, Size, and so on).





■ In the Save Template As dialog box, navigate to the location whereyou want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a templatename. Click Save.


9 In the Create Equipment dialog box, click Create.

10 In the drawing area, click to place the equipment model or entercoordinates at the desired insertion point.

11 To orient the equipment model, do one of the following:

■ To orient the model to the desired position, enter rotation values oruse the compass tool. Press Enter.

■ Press Enter to accept the default position. You can use AutoCADcommands such as move, rotate, or 3drotate to further position theequipment.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTCREATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Create Equipment Dialog Box

Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D EquipmentYou can convert any 3D DWG model to an AutoCAD Plant 3D equipmentmodel.

To convert a 3D DWG model to an AutoCAD Plant 3D equipment model

1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the Plant 3D Drawings folder.Click Copy Drawing to Project.

2 In the Select Drawings to Copy to Project dialog box, navigate to andselect the DWG file containing the objects you want to convert. ClickOpen.

3 In the Project Manager, double-click the drawing that contains the 3Dmodel you want to convert.

4 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ ConvertEquipment.

5 In the drawing area, select the objects you want to convert.

6 When you are finished selecting objects, press Enter.

Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment | 383

7 In the Convert to Equipment dialog box, click the equipment class youwant to assign to the object (for example: Compressor) so that theconverted object is identified in the Data Manager, on the Propertiespalette, and in reports. Click Select.

8 To specify the insertion base point, click to place the item in the drawingarea.

9 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, do thefollowing:

■ To create a description for the equipment, in the Long Descriptionbox, enter a description.

■ To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In the AssignTag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type. In the Expression box,enter a unique numeric identifier. Click Assign.

10 (Optional) To add nozzle metadata to a nozzle you specified in theequipment object you defined, on the Nozzles tab, do the following:

■ Click Add to add a nozzle to the converted object.


NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs, which areincluded in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for aVertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4,Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing= RF.

■ Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click to select a part. In theSelect Part dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, endtype, and nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select.


■ Under Parameters, to the right of Location, click Mark.

11 In the drawing area, click a location on the converted object where youwant to place the center of the nozzle. Select a second point.

12 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Data tab, add relevant datafor items (such as Manufacturer, Material, Size, and so on).

Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment | 385




■ In the Save Template To dialog box, navigate to the location whereyou want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a templatename. Click Save.


14 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTCONVERT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Convert to Equipment Dialog Box

Modify EquipmentYou can modify equipment models created in AutoCAD Plant 3D or convertedfrom another program.

When modifying an equipment model, you can change all values exceptequipment type and equipment class.

You can modify custom equipment (equipment converted from anotherprogram), but you can change only its tag data and nozzle values. You cannotchange dimensions or other geometric parameters.

To modify equipment

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ ModifyEquipment.

2 In the drawing area, click the equipment model you want to modify.

3 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, edit the tagdata, description, or dimension values as needed. Add or remove shapesas needed.

4 Click Apply to see the changes reflected in the drawing without closingthe dialog box.

5 On the Nozzles tab, edit the nozzle data as needed.

6 Click OK.

Modify Equipment | 387

To modify custom equipment

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ ModifyEquipment.

2 In the drawing area, click the custom equipment model you want tomodify.

3 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, modify thetag data and description as needed.

4 Click the Nozzles tab and modify the nozzle data as needed.

5 When you are finished making changes, click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTMODIFY

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Modify Equipment Dialog Box

Position and Manipulate Equipment in a DrawingAfter you create an equipment model, you define its position and orientationin the drawing.

Reorient Equipment in a DrawingAfter an equipment model is placed in a drawing, you can reorient theequipment using standard AutoCAD commands (such as MOVE or ROTATE).

You can also use grips to reorient equipment.

NOTE Nozzles on equipment are fixed and cannot be moved independently ofthe equipment. To move nozzles, select the equipment item and on the ribbon,click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify Equipment.


To reorient or move equipment in a drawing

1 In the drawing area, click the equipment model you want to move orrotate.


■ Click the Move grip. Drag the equipment to the desired location.

■ At the Command prompt, enter move. Follow the instructions on thecommand line.

■ At the Command prompt, enter rotate. Follow the instructions onthe command line.

Copy EquipmentYou can create an equipment model by copying an existing one.

All settings for the copied equipment model are the same as the original,except that the tag contains question marks.

To copy equipment

1 In the drawing area, select the equipment item you want to copy.

2 At the Command prompt, enter copy, and follow the instructions on thecommand line.

Attach Graphics to EquipmentYou can add graphics to equipment, making them part of the equipment.

Attached graphics may include objects such as brackets, davits, clips, boots,domes, or integral railings.

Copy Equipment | 389

Once you add a graphic to an equipment model, it becomes part of the model,and is moved, copied, or deleted along with it.

To edit an attached graphic, first detach it from the equipment. After editing,you can attach it again.

To attach graphics to equipment

1 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach Equipment.

2 In the drawing area, click the equipment model to which you want toattach objects.

3 Click the objects you want to attach to the equipment.

4 When you are finished selecting objects to attach, press Enter.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTATTACH

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Detach Graphics from EquipmentYou can detach previously attached graphics from equipment.

Detach a graphic from an equipment model to either edit the graphic orremove it.

To detach a graphic from equipment

1 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Detach Equipment.

2 In the drawing, click the equipment model that contains an attachedgraphic.

3 Click Yes to detach all graphics from the equipment model.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTDETACH

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Create and Modify Equipment Reserve SpaceReserve space is empty space that you designate when an open area is neededfor service or maintenance of a piece of adjacent equipment.

You can define reserve space using standard AutoCAD commands. Then, youcan attach the reserve space object to an equipment model. The reserve spaceobject is marked with a special flag and is placed on a separate layer.

To add reserve space to a piece of equipment

1 Create an AutoCAD object (such as a box or a sphere) to use as reservespace.

2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ AttachEquipment.

3 In the drawing area, click to select the equipment model to which youwant to attach reserve space.

4 At the Command prompt, enter S (attach reServe space), and click theobject to set it as the equipment reserve space.

To modify reserve space

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ DetachEquipment.

2 In the drawing area, click to select the equipment model that has reservespace attached to it.

3 Click Yes to detach all objects.

Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space | 391

4 Change the object being used as the reserve space.

5 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ AttachEquipment.

6 In the drawing, click to select the equipment model.

7 At the Command prompt, enter S (attach reServe space), and click theobject to set it as the equipment reserve space.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTEQUIPMENTATTACH

PLANTEQUIPMENTDETACH

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries


Create and ModifyStructure

You can create a structural model in your AutoCAD Plant 3D drawing.

Understand Structural Modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3DAutoCAD Plant 3D provides lightweight structural modeling capabilities.

You can use AutoCAD Plant 3D to create structural objects. When put togetherwith piping, equipment, and other objects, the structural tools in AutoCADPlant 3D can help you detect issues such as interference in your plant models.Including structural objects also enables client reviews for hazards andapproximates structural design on piping plans and other orthographic drawings.

Set the Structural Model RepresentationYou can set the structural model representation that controls the display ofstructural objects.

The structural model representation applies to all structural objects in a drawing.You can change the model representation at any time.

9

393

The following list describes model representation options in increasing levelof complexity and detail.

DescriptionModel Representa-tion

Model RepresentationName

This model is best for tasks that do notrequire extensive detail, such as creat-

Line Model

ing a member. In line model, objectsare represented as lines, and you caneasily select insertion points for newobjects.

This model is best for quickly makingsmall changes or additions to a largeproject.

Symbol Model

This model is best for output files andmeasuring distances. Insertion points

Outline Model

are not easy to see in this model, so itis not the recommended representa-tion for creating objects.

This model displays objects at theiroriginal dimensions.

Shape Model

To set the structural model representation

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Line Modeldrop-down.

394 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

2 Click one of the available model representations: Line Model, SymbolModel, Outline Model, or Shape Model.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELSETREP

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Work With Structural GridsBefore placing structural objects, you can create a structural grid in the drawingarea.

Grids are optional, but make it easier to create a structural model in 3D space.When you create a grid, you specify the grid name, X, Y, and Z positions, anda coordinate system. Structure units default to the base unit (Imperial or Metric)specified for the project.

Work With Structural Grids | 395

You can create a grid using the world coordinate system (WCS), user coordinatesystem (UCS), or 3 points. If you use the 3 Points option, you specify the originand direction of the three axes that define the grid.

You can specify relative coordinates, which are based on the last point entered.Use relative coordinates when you know the location of a point in relationto the previous point specified.

To specify relative coordinates, precede the coordinate values with an @ sign.For example, entering @3,4 specifies a point 3 units along the X axis and 4units along the Y axis from the last point specified.

To create a structural grid

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Grid.

2 In the Create Grid dialog box, in the Grid Name box, enter a name forthe grid.

3 Under Coordinate System, click WCS, UCS, or 3 Points to set thecoordinate system for creating the grid. If you choose 3 Points, specifythe origin and direction of the three axes of the grid.

4 To specify the axis value, do one of the following:

■ In the Axis Value box, enter the desired coordinate values. Use an @sign to enter point coordinates either relative to the origin or relativeto values.

■ Click to specify points in the drawing space. Press Enter whenfinished.


5 To specify the row value, do one of the following:

■ In the Row Value box, enter the desired values.


6 To specify the platform value, do one of the following:

■ In the Platform Value box, enter the desired values.


7 Click Create.

To edit a structural grid

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit.

2 In the drawing, click the grid to edit.

3 In the Edit Grid dialog box, modify values as needed. Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELGRID

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Create Grid Dialog Box

Edit Grid Dialog Box

Work with Structural MembersA structural member is a 3D structural object, such as a beam or column.

Work with Structural Members | 397

You can specify member settings, create and edit structural members, andmanipulate structural members in various ways.

Specify Member SettingsMember settings are default values for new structural members. You can changethese settings as needed.

Structural member settings focus mainly on shape, size, and orientation. Whenyou create a new structural member, it derives its properties from the currentmember settings. For example, if member settings are currently set to ANSIstandards, Pipe - Shapes ASTM shape type, and 2” shape size, then all newstructural members you create have these settings by default.

You can edit individual structural members. Suppose you need several structuralmembers with most of the same properties, but at slightly different sizes. Youcan specify the member settings, create the structural members, and editindividual members to change the size as needed.

To specify member settings

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤

Member Settings.


2 If a member exists in your drawing that has the properties you want touse for all new members, click Match Properties and select the memberin the drawing area. The Member Settings dialog is populated with theappropriate values. Modify the values if needed, as described in thefollowing steps. When finished modifying values, skip to Step 10.

3 In the Member Settings dialog box, in the Shape Standard list, click ashape standard.

4 Under Shape Type, click the desired shape type in the list. To search fora shape type, enter the entire shape type name or part of the shape type

name in the box, and click .

5 In the Shape Size list, click the desired shape size. The available sizesdepend on the currently selected shape type. To search for a shape size,enter the entire shape size or part of the shape size name in the box, and

click .

Specify Member Settings | 399

6 In the Material Standard list, click the desired material standard to usefor newly created members.

7 In the Material Code list, click the desired material code to use for newlycreated members.

8 Under Angle, enter the desired angle value, or click a value in the list.

You can click to increase the current value by 90 degrees.

9 Optionally, do any of the following to change member orientation:

■ Click a point in the Orientation preview image to define a justificationpoint.

■ Select the Flip About Y Axis check box to orient the Y axis in theopposite direction.

■ Select the Align Y Axis with Z UCS to align the Y axis of the memberwith the Z UCS.

10 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

No entries

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Member Settings Dialog Box

Create a Structural MemberYou can create a structural member by specifying its start point and end point,or by aligning the member with a line that you select in your drawing.

When you create structural members, you are prompted to specify points onthe structure. You can set properties such as shape and size before creatingthe structure.


To create a structural member by specifying start and end points

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Member.

2 In the drawing area, specify the start point.

3 In the drawing area, specify the end point.

4 The prompt is redisplayed to enable you to create multiple members.Press Enter when finished creating members.

To create a structural member by aligning with a line in the drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Member.

2 At the command prompt, enter l (Line).

3 In the drawing area, click a line to align the member to.

4 The prompt is redisplayed to enable you to create multiple members.Press Enter when finished creating members.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELMEMBER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Edit a Structural MemberYou can edit an individual structural member to change its settings.

When you edit a structural member, you can change the same settings thatyou specify in member settings. If you want to change settings for all newstructural members, use member settings instead.

You can also use the Properties palette to edit member properties.

Edit a Structural Member | 401

To edit a structural member


2 In the drawing area, select the member object you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Member dialog box, edit the values as needed. Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Edit Member Dialog Box

Change the Length of a Structural MemberYou can make a structural object longer.

You can change the length of a member using plantsteellengthen or bydragging the grips. You can use any of the following options when usingplantsteellengthen:

■ Delta. Specify the number of increments by which to increase or decreasethe length.

■ Total. Specify the total absolute length from the endpoint that is closestto the point where you selected the member.

■ Disregard prompts and click a member in the drawing area to display thecurrent length of the member.

To change the length of a structural member incrementally

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ LengthenMember.

2 In the drawing area, select the member you want to lengthen or shorten.

3 At the Command prompt, enter d to specify the new length in increments.

4 At the Command prompt, enter a positive value to lengthen the member,or a negative value to shorten the member. The distance is measuredfrom the end point that is closest to the selection point.

Change the Length of a Structural Member | 403

To change the length of a structural member using absolute length

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ LengthenMember.


3 At the Command prompt, enter t to specify the absolute length.

4 At the Command prompt, enter a positive value to indicate the totalabsolute length of the member, as measured from the end point that isclosest to the selection point.

To change the length of a structural member using grips


2 Select a stretch grip on the member.

3 Move the pointing device and click to specify the stretch point.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELLENGTHEN

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Cut a Structural MemberYou can cut a structural member with respect to the boundaries of anotherstructural member.

You can cut a structural member in one of two ways:

■ Cut the member to the boundary of another member.

■ Cut two members to the boundaries of each other.


After you cut one or more members, you can specify the gap between the cutmember and the member boundary.

To cut a structural member to the boundary of another member

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Back Member.

2 At the command prompt, enter b (Both).

3 In the drawing area, click the first structural member whose boundariesyou want to cut a second member to.

4 Click the other member you want to cut.

To cut two structural members to the boundaries of each other

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Back Member.

2 At the command prompt, enter b (Both).

3 At the command prompt, enter o (One).

4 In the drawing area, click the limiting structural member (the memberwhose boundaries you want to cut another member to).

5 Click the member you want to cut.

Cut a Structural Member | 405

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELCUT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Miter Two Structural Members TogetherYou can fit two structural members together in a miter joint.

You can miter two members together in one of two ways:

■ Use a bisector cut.

■ Align the profile edges.

After performing a miter cut, you can select additional members to miter cutand you can specify a gap between members.

To miter two structural members together

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Miter CutMember.

2 In the drawing area, click the first member to miter.


3 Click the second member to miter together.

To align the edges of two structural members


2 (Optional) To specify a gap between the two structural members, at thecommand prompt, enter g (Gap). Specify a distance or positive value andpress Enter.

Miter Two Structural Members Together | 407

3 At the command prompt, enter a (Align edges).

4 In the drawing area, click the first member to align.

5 Click the second member to align.

To create a bisector cut between two structural members


2 (Optional) To specify a gap between the two structural members, at thecommand prompt, enter g (Gap). Specify a distance or positive value andpress Enter.

3 In the drawing area, click the first member on which to apply a bisectorcut.

4 Click the second member on which to apply a bisector cut.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELMITER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Trim or Extend a Structural MemberYou can trim or extend a structural member to meet a plane.

You can specify the intersection plane that defines the boundary for trimmingor extending the member.

To trim a structural member

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Trim Member.


2 In the Trim to Plane dialog box, Under Intersection Plane, click a planeto use as the boundary. Click OK.

3 In the drawing area, click the member to trim.

NOTE To switch to plantsteelextend, hold down SHIFT and click the memberyou want to extend.

To extend a structural member

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Extend Member.

Trim or Extend a Structural Member | 409

2 In the Extend to Plane dialog box, under Intersection Plane, click a planeto use as the boundary. Click OK.

3 In the drawing area, click the member to extend.

NOTE To switch to plantsteeltrim, hold down SHIFT and click the member youwant to trim.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELEXTEND

PLANTSTEELTRIM

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Trim to Plane Dialog Box

Extend to Plane Dialog Box

Edge Cut a Structural MemberAn edge cut trims multiple structural members according to the edge of anothermember.

You can specify a gap value between the cut member and boundary.

To edge cut a structural member

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut MemberEdges.

2 At the prompt, enter a positive value to indicate the gap between themember you intend to cut and the boundary.

3 In the drawing area, select one or more members. The members aretrimmed at both ends.

Edge Cut a Structural Member | 411

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELEDGECUT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Restore a Structural MemberYou can restore a structural member to its original condition.

The endpoint that is closest to the selection point is restored. You can makerepeated selections to restore multiple objects.

To restore a structural member

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Restore Member.

2 In the drawing area, select the member that you want to restore.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELRESTORE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Work with Structural TrimYou can add structural trim to your 3D models, including railings, stairs, andladders.

Use structural trim in your model for interference detection, client reviews ofhazard and other operations, and showing approximate design on pipingplans.

Work with RailingsYou can add railings to your structural models.

Specify railing settings to provide default values for all new railings. Whenyou create a railing, its settings come from these railing settings. You canchange the railing settings or edit an individual railing.

To specify railing settings


Railing Settings.

Work with Structural Trim | 413

2 In the Railing Settings dialog box, enter the desired geometry values. Tochange shape values:

■ Under Shape click the [...] button that corresponds with the railingshape (Handrail, 1st Mid Rail, Kick Plate, or Post) you want to change.


In the Railing Settings dialog box, make desired changes and clickSelect.

■ To specify a continuous middle rail, under Shape, select the MiddleRail (Continuous) check box.

3 Click OK.

To create a railing

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Railing.

2 In the drawing area, click to specify the start point of the railing.

3 Specify the end point of the railing. Press Enter.

To create a railing and align it with another object

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Railing.

2 At the command prompt, enter o (Object).

3 In the drawing area, click to specify the object you want to align therailing to.

To edit a railing


2 In the drawing area, select the railing to edit.

Work with Railings | 415

3 In the Edit Railing dialog box, modify the geometry values as needed. Toedit shape values:

■ Under Shape click the [...] button that corresponds with the railingshape (Handrail, 1st Mid Rail, Kick Plate, or Post) you want to change.


In the Railing Settings dialog box, make desired changes and clickSelect.

■ To specify a continuous middle rail, under Shape, select the MiddleRail (Continuos) check box.

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELRAILING

PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Railing Settings Dialog Box

Edit Railing Dialog Box

Work with StairsYou can create steps or a staircase in your structural model.

Use stair settings to specify default values for all new stairs that you create.After you create stairs, you can edit individual steps or staircases to changethe settings as needed.

Stairs do not include handrails, but you can add handrails after the stairs havebeen placed. For more information about handrails, see Work with Railingson page 413.

To specify stair settings


Stair Settings.

Work with Stairs | 417

2 In the Stair Settings dialog box, enter the desired geometry values.

3 To change step data:

■ Under Shape, Step Data click the [...] button, In the Select Step dialogbox, make desired changes and click OK.

4 To change stair shape:

■ Under Shape, Stair Shape click the [...] button, In the Select Stair Shapedialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

5 Click OK.

To create stairs

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Stairs.

2 To select the first point of the stairs, click in the drawing area.


3 To select the next point of the stairs, click in the drawing area again. Tocreate a series of contiguous stair segments, continue clicking in thedrawing area to specify each segment. Press Enter when finished.

To edit stairs


2 In the drawing area, select the stairs you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Stair dialog box, modify the geometry values as needed.

4 To edit step data:

■ Under Shape, Step Data click the [...] button, In the Select Step dialogbox, make desired changes and click OK.

Work with Stairs | 419

5 To edit stair shape:

■ Under Shape, Stair Shape click the [...] button, In the Select Stair Shapedialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

6 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELSTAIR

PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Edit Stair Dialog Box

Stair Settings Dialog Box

Work with LaddersYou can add ladders to your structural model. Optionally, the ladder can havea cage.

Specify ladder settings to control the properties of all new ladders. If needed,you can then edit each individual ladder.

To specify ladder settings


Ladder Settings.


2 In the Ladder Settings dialog box, Ladder tab, under General, click a type.Under Description, enter the desired description for the ladder.

3 Under Geometry, enter desired geometry values.

4 To change shape values, do any of the following:

■ Under Shape, Ladder Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select LadderShape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

■ To rotate the ladder shape by 90 degrees, select the Switch X and Yaxes check box.

Work with Ladders | 421

■ Under Shape, Rung Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select RungShape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.

5 Click the Cage tab and do any of the following:

■ Under General, click the Draw Cage check box to specify a cage, ifdesired. Under Description, enter the desired description for the cage.

■ Under Geometry, edit geometry values as needed.

6 Click OK.


To create a ladder

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Ladder.

2 To specify the bottom point of the ladder, click in the drawing area.

3 To specify the top point of the ladder, click again in the drawing area.

4 To specify the orientation of the ladder, click a third time in the drawingarea. Press Enter.

To edit a ladder


2 In the drawing area, select the ladder you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Ladder Settings dialog box, Ladder tab, under General, makedesired changes.

4 Under Geometry, modify geometry values as needed.

5 To change shape values, do any of the following:

■ Under Shape, Ladder Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select LadderShape dialog box, edit values as needed and click Select.

■ To switch X and Y axes, select the Switch X and Y axes check box.

■ Under Shape, Rung Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select RungShape dialog box, edit values as needed and click Select.

6 Click the Cage tab, and do any of the following:

■ Under General, modify settings as needed.

■ Under Geometry, edit geometry values as needed

7 Click OK.

Work with Ladders | 423

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELLADDER

PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Ladder Settings Dialog Box

Edit Ladder Dialog Box

Explode Structural Trim ObjectsYou can explode structural trim objects into individual members.

Railings, stairs, and ladders are complex structural objects made up of multiplestructural members. If you want to edit parts of the object in a way that is notpossible by editing the complete object, you can explode the object intoindividual members.

To explode a structural object

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structural Explode.

2 In the drawing area, click a structural trim object to explode.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELEXPLODE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Work with FootingsWhen you create a structural footing in your model, you can specify its length,width, and depth.

You can specify footing settings to determine the values for all new footings.Then you can customize the settings by editing individual footings as needed.

To specify footing settings


Footing Settings.

2 In the Footing Settings dialog box, enter the values to use for newfootings. Click OK.

Work with Footings | 425

To create a footing

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Footing.

2 To specify the insertion point of the footing, click in the drawing area.

To edit a footing


2 In the drawing area, click the footing you want to edit.

3 In the Edit Footing dialog box, modify the values as needed. Click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELFOOTING

PLANTSTEELEDIT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Footing Settings Dialog Box

Edit Footing Dialog Box

Work with PlatesYou can add a plate or grate to a structural model.

When you create a plate, you specify its type, materials, placement, shape,and other information.

To create a plate

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Plate.

2 In the Create Plate/Grate dialog box, in the Type list, click Plate or Grating.

3 In the Material Standard list, click the material standard to use.

4 In the Material Code list, click the desired material code.

5 In the Thickness list, click the desired thickness for the plate or grating.

6 For gratings only, in the Hatch Pattern list, click the desired hatch pattern.

7 For gratings only, in the Hatch Scale box, enter the desired hatch scalevalue.

8 Under Justification, specify the reference point.

9 Under Shape, specify a rectangular or polyline shape. Click Create.

10 To specify the corner of the plate, click the drawing area.

11 To specify the opposite corner of the plate, click the drawing area again.

Work with Plates | 427

To edit a plate

➤ In the drawing area, select the plate to edit.

■ To change plate size, click a stretch grip and move the cursor toincrease or decrease size.

■ To change other properties, right-click the plate. In the PropertyPalette, change properties as needed.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTSTEELPLATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Create Plate/Grate Dialog Box

Export Structural Objects to SDNFYou can select structural objects in a drawing and export them to SteelDetailing Neutral Format (SDNF).

Structural objects you can export to this format are:

■ Structural members

■ Railings

■ Ladders

■ Stairs

■ Plates

When you export railings, ladders, and stairs to SDNF, they are exploded intoindividual members. Ladder cages are not included in an export.


To export structural objects to SDNF

1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Export panel ➤ SDNF Export.

Export Structural Objects to SDNF | 429

2 In the SDNF Export dialog box, under Output File, click the [...] buttonto select a location for export.

3 In the Export SDNF File dialog box, navigate to and select a folder forstoring the exported file. In the File Name box, enter a name for theexported file. Click Save.

4 In the SDNF Export dialog box, under Title Packet Information, enterinformation about the project.

5 To select objects to export, under Objects, click Select Objects.

6 In the drawing area, select the objects to export.

7 Click Export.

Quick Reference

Commands

SDNFEXPORT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

SDNF Export Dialog Box


Create and Modify Piping

Route piping and place valves in the 3D model. You can also create and place specialty itemsand instruments, add insulation, and set the pipe spec and line number.

Select a Pipe SpecUse pipe specs when routing pipe, fittings, and valves in the 3D model.

When you are routing pipe, pipe fittings, or valves to an AutoCAD Plant 3Dmodel, you start with a pipe spec.

A pipe spec indicates which fittings to use when you change pipe size, changepipe direction, or branch. For example: use socket weld fittings for pipe under3”.

A 3D piping model is spec-driven. A spec-driven model references pipingcomponents listed in a pipe spec. When you work with piping in a 3D model,the pipe spec provides the material, rating, and connection details. For moreinformation about pipe specs, see Introduction to the Specs and Catalogs Editor.

You can set pipe spec, size, and line number in the ribbon before routing pipein the model, or change them while routing.

In combination with the project’s joint settings, the pipe spec determines whichfittings and fasteners are used when connecting and routing pipe. Each pipesegment and fitting in the model originates from a pipe spec, except for customparts.

10

431

Before routing pipe in the model, you can select a spec file to be used as thepipe spec. Spec files are created using the Specs and Catalogs Editor.

The spec sheets folder is set in the Project Manager. For more information,see Set Plant 3D Paths on page 148.

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D includes sample spec files that are used in the proceduresof this guide.

To select a pipe spec

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Selectordrop-down list.

2 In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

To view a pipe spec

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Viewer.

2 In the Spec Viewer, in the Spec list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

432 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Set Line NumbersYou can assign a line number to group pipe segments and fittings in the 3Dmodel.

Pipe segments and fittings are grouped based on a line number. You can assigna line number before routing pipe.

Line numbers are formatted using project manager the same way tags areformatted. Any Plant 3D object can have a tag. Pipe lines and fittings alsohave line numbers.

You can use the P&ID Line List to create pipe using a line number. The linenumber is assigned in the model if the line number tag formats are compatible.For more information, see Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers on page351.

You can assign line numbers globally, by name, using the Data Manager torename the line number. You cannot rename to a line number that alreadyexists in the project, and you must have exclusive project access rights.

Items do not have to be connected to belong to the same line group. However,some features do not operate if the line group is not connected.

You can use the line number to select pipe in the model. For more information,see Select Piping on page 466.

When you create pipe that is assigned to a line number you can set the layername that the pipe is created on to include the line number in the name. Formore information, see Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignmentson page 171.

If you remove the last item that is assigned to a line number from the model,the line number is removed from line number lists.

Set Line Numbers | 433

Understand the Line Number Format

The default line number format includes only the line number property (forexample: 101).

You can set the line number format in the P3d Line Group class. For moreinformation, see Set Up Tag Formatting on page 214. If you set the line numberformat to Spec-Service-Line, you can assign the following line number:CS300-P-101.

Pipe lines in a P&ID drawing and a model are independent of each other andare not linked. You can check for property differences by validating matchingline numbers, but the values are not linked. For more information, see Validatethe 3D Model on page 359.

Compare P&ID Line Groups and Line Numbers in the Model

In a P&ID drawing, the line number is a property of the line group. Any pipeline segment or component that belongs to the same line group has the sameline number.

P&ID line groups are managed as a unit. You can add lines and componentsto the group (for example: using SLGROUPEDIT). When you change the linenumber of a group in a P&ID drawing, the line number changes for all linesand components in the group.

In a Plant 3D drawing, if you select a single piece of pipe and change its linenumber, connected pipe and fittings do not change. To help avoid accidentallyadding disconnected pipe into the same group, the Properties palette does notallow you to set a line number if selected items are not connected.

To change a pipe line number

1 In a Plant 3D drawing, select one or more pipe components that areconnected end to end.

2 Right-click in the drawing area. Click Properties.

3 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Tag ➤ Line Number Tag.

NOTE The Line Number Tag list cannot be set in the Properties palette if theselected pipe is not connected.

4 In the LineNumber list, click New.


5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the box labeled TargetObject.Number,enter the line number (for example: 105).

6 Click Assign.

Set Line Numbers | 435

To rename a pipe line number

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab > Project panel > Data Manager.

2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Current Drawing Data.

3 In the tree view, expand Area. Click Pipe Lines.

4 In the data view, double-click in the Tag column of the line number thatyou want to change.

5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the box labeled Number, enter the linenumber (for example: 105).

6 Click Assign.

NOTE Exclusive project access is required to change the line number usingData Manager. Renaming a line number can modify more than one projectdrawing.


Create PipingYou can route pipe in a model by specifying the start point and end point ofa pipe segment.

By default, the points you specify are on the center line of the pipe, but youcan choose from a number of alignments (for example: bottom of pipe). Formore information about aligning pipes, see Offset Pipe Placement on page447.

Fittings (for example: elbows) are added automatically when you changedirection while continuing to route pipe from the previous end point.

In addition to specifying the end point in the model, you can type a distanceto specify the position of the next fitting. For more information about thetools and procedures that help you place pipe at exact locations see PrecisionLocation on page 448.

Create Piping | 437

When you change direction, you can pick a point that aligns with the nextpipe segment. Pipe length is automatically cut back for the fitting.

As you add pipe segments, the pipe spec provides a list of fittings available tomake the connection. If more than one fitting is available, a default fitting isselected based on the part use priority. For more information about fittingpriority, see Modify a Spec Sheet.

You can attach pipe to equipment nozzles using node object snap. Connectionhardware (for example: a weldneck flange, gaskets, and bolts) is added fromthe pipe spec, based on the size and type of the nozzle.

You add a pipe using the ribbon, a Continuation grip, the spec viewer, thetool palette, or the plantpipeadd command.

Insert Pipe Using the Ribbon

You can use the ribbon to set a pipe spec, pipe size, and set the line numberbefore routing pipe in the model.

You can route pipe using either a new or existing line number.

For more information, see 3D Piping Home Tab on page 275.

Route Pipe with the Continuation Grip

You can continue a route or create a branch using a Continuation grip.Continuation grips are available from pipe, pipe fittings, and nozzles.


Equipment nozzles have Continuation grips.

When you use a Continuation grip, the initial pipe size and direction areassumed. When continuing from a pipe or pipe fitting, the pipe spec and linenumber are also assumed.

Continuation grips are available at open ports, and at default branch locations(For example: the middle of a pipe segment). A continuation grip does notappear if the port is in an xref, or the port is connected to from another projectdrawing as an xref.

If a nozzle is incompatible with the current pipe spec an error message displaysand a connection is not made. When you change the pipe size, a reducer isinserted, if one is listed in the pipe spec.

Place a Piping Component from the Spec Viewer

If you want to choose a specific part before adding it to the model you canuse the Spec Viewer.

Create Piping | 439

If you connect to a pipe component in the model, you do not pick the partsize in the Spec Viewer. The part size is set based on the component that youconnect to.

Create a Tool Palette from a Spec

You can add frequently used parts to the tool palette. Before you can insertparts from the tool palette, you first add the parts to the tool palette.

For information on placing parts, see AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes on page284.

You add parts to the tool palette using the Spec Viewer or by dragging a partfrom the model to the tool palette. You can also create a tool palette for theparts by right-clicking an existing tool palette and clicking New Palette.

See Work With Spec Files in a Plant 3D Model to add parts to the tool palette.

Route Pipe and Change Settings using the Command Line

You can route pipe using the plantpipeadd command.

You can set command options using the shortcut menu when routing pipe.

If you do not want to use a fitting when connecting to a branch, you can setStub-in mode at the command prompt. If you want to switch betweenhorizontal and vertical routing easily, you can change the routing plane.

AutoCAD Plant 3D does not support adding valves or fittings from thecommand line.

To create a pipe line

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Pipe Spec list.

2 In the list, click Route New Line.


3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, do the following:

■ In the box labeled TargetObject.Number, enter the line number (forexample: 101).To create an unassigned pipe line, leave this box blank.

■ In the Spec list, click a spec (for example: CS300).

■ In the Size list, click a size (for example: 6”).

■ Click Assign.

4 In the drawing area, click to specify the location for the start point of thepipe.

5 Click to specify the next point of the pipe.

6 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.

Create Piping | 441

To route pipe using ribbon settings

1 If the pipe spec, size, or line number are not set in the ribbon, do thefollowing:

■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ SpecSelector drop-down list.

■ In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

■ In the Pipe Size Selector drop-down list, click a pipe size (for example:4”).

■ In the Line Number Selector drop-down list click a line number (forexample: 101 or Unassigned).

2 On the ribbon, click Route Pipe.

3 In the drawing area, click to specify a location for the start point of thepipe.

4 Click to specify the next point of the pipe.

5 Continue clicking in the drawing to specify any additional points of thepipe.



To begin routing from an equipment nozzle

1 If the pipe spec or line number are not set in the ribbon, do the following:

■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ SpecSelector drop-down list.

■ In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).

■ In the Line Number Selector drop-down list click a line number (forexample: 101 or Unassigned).

2 In the drawing area, select an equipment object that has a nozzle.

3 Click the Continuation grip.

Create Piping | 443

4 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the pipe.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIPEADD

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Route PipingYou can position pipe and pipe fittings in your model by choosing precisesegment and fitting locations or by setting up the program to calculate thefitting type and location.


A number of placement tools and settings are available to help you positionpipe and pipe fittings, including pipe grips and the compass.

Use Pipe Grips

You can route pipe from the open port of selected pipe using a Continuationgrip. You can also use a Move grip to locate and stretch pipe.

Use the Move grip at the end of a pipe segment to change the length of theselected pipe.

In addition to routing pipe, you can use the Continuation grip at an openport to add an elbow. If you use a Continuation grip that is not at an openport, a branch is created.

Pipe segments have a branch Continuation grip in the middle of the segment.Pipe fittings also have branch Continuation grips. For example: an elbow hasa branch Continuation grip that allows you to convert the elbow into a tee.

For more information about grips, see Plant 3D Grips on page 287.

Route Pipes Using the Compass

Use the compass to route pipe at precise angles. When you are prompted toindicate a pipe routing direction, the compass is displayed in the drawingarea. When the compass is displayed you can snap to the angle indicated onthe compass.

NOTE The points that you specify using the compass are restricted to the routingplane. You can disable the compass to specify a point that is not on the routingplane.

The compass displays tick marks on a circle. You can set the angle betweentick marks, change the size of the compass, or turn off the compass .

Route Piping | 445

The compass helps you specify a precise angle at a specified interval. You canset the compass tick marks and the compass snap angle to different values.

NOTE The compass snap increment is also used in response to the Specify RotationAngle prompt (for example: when using the rotation grip). You can disable thecompass angle snap to use the exact rotation specified.

When you add a fitting, the compass tick marks are set to match the availablefitting angles in the pipe spec.


You can set a tolerance angle to allow for slight angle variations whenconnecting pipe end to end, or adding a fitting. For example: you can specifya 91 degree angle using a 90 degree elbow.

If you turn the tolerance angle on, the compass displays tolerance angletickmarks. By default, the tolerance angle is off.

Offset Pipe Placement

When routing pipe, you can specify eight offset directions in addition to thecenter line. If you set the offset to Bottom of Pipe (BOP), you can then specifysupport locations directly.

Offset is relative to your routing direction: it is not absolute. When you routepipe in a vertical direction, the BOP alignment is relative to a wall. You can

■ Set the alignment and the offset in the ribbon before routing pipe.

■ Set or change alignment from the command line while routing pipe.

Route Piping | 447

If you want to use object snap while offset routing to specify a point on a pipe,but do not want to connect to the pipe, you can turn off plantoffsetconnect.

Precision Location

You can specify precise object snap points when Continuation grips are notavailable or not at a desired location.

In general, if you want to connect to pipe when you are routing you use objectsnap. Use object snap to specify an exact location and indicate that you wantto make a connection.

You can use node or end object snaps to connect to the end of another pipe.If you want to connect to pipe at a right angle use the perpendicular objectsnap. Use the near object snap to specify a point that is on the pipe centerline.

NOTE Use Node object snap to connect to nozzles.

For more information on object snaps, see Snap to Locations on Objects (ObjectSnaps).

You can use tracking to specify a point that aligns with another point. Formore information, see Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking).

You can enter a distance (pipe length) to specify the next point. For moreinformation, see Enter Direct Distances.


If you want to snap to an object and maintain your current elevation,you can use Elevation Snap. For example, you can connect to vertical pipe.

Use Routing Solutions

If you specify connection and the endpoints are not in-line, AutoCAD Plant3D can route pipe and add fittings automatically to complete the connection.You can choose from multiple solutions if multiple paths are available.

To set node object snap mode for pipe routing

1 On the status bar, right-click Object Snap.

2 In the shortcut menu, click Settings.

3 Check Node.

When you click in the drawing to specify a point near a pipe end orequipment nozzle, you will snap to the center of the port.

4 Click OK.

To continue a pipe line

1 In the drawing area, select a pipe that has an open port.

2 Click the Continuation grip at the end of the selected pipe.

Route Piping | 449

3 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the pipe.


To finish a route at an open port

1 This procedure begins with pipe routing in-progress.

If you are not at the Specify Next Point prompt do the following:

■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

■ In the drawing, click to specify a start point.


2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node.

3 Move your mouse over an open port. Click the Node object snap.

If a path to the open port cannot be found, you cannot continue thisprocedure. You can use precision placement to align the pipe route withthe port (For example: route the pipe to a matching elevation) and startthis procedure again.

4 If multiple solutions are available do the following:

■ At the command prompt, enter n (Next).

Route Piping | 451

■ Continue pressing ENTER until the solution that you want to usedisplays.

■ At the command prompt, enter a (Accept).

To change elevation while routing

1 This procedure begins with pipe routing in-progress.

If you are not at the Specify Next Point prompt do the following:

■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

■ In the drawing, click a start point.


2 On the ribbon, in the Elevation & Routing Line panel, click the downarrow to expand the panel.

3 In the Elevation box, enter an elevation (for example: 36).

4 In the drawing, click to specify a point at the new elevation.

5 Continue clicking in the model to specify any additional points of thepipe.


To route with offset alignment

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Elevation & Routing Line ➤ Center(current alignment).

Route Piping | 453

2 Click a justification from the drop-down list (for example: Bottom Left).

3 On the ribbon, in the horizontal Offset box, enter a horizontal offset (forexample: 24).

You can use a negative number to offset in the opposite direction.

4 On the ribbon, click Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

5 In the drawing, click to specify a start point that is aligned with anotherobject (for example: at a wall).

6 In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the pipe (for example,at a wall corner).

7 At the command prompt enter p (plane). In the drawing, click to specifythe next point of the pipe.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTCOMPASS

System Variables

PLANTOFFSETCONNECT

Interface Reference

No entries

Route pipe at a slopeApply slope as you route horizontal pipe.

When you specify points for a pipe route at the same elevation, AutoCADPlant 3D can roll or cutback elbows to automatically apply a desired slope.

You can apply slope to pipe that is in the model using the plantpipeslopecommand.

To route new pipe at a slope

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Slope panel ➤ Slope Rise.

2 In the Slope Rise box, enter a slope rise (for example: 1).

3 In the Slope Run box, enter a run length (for example: 120).

Route pipe at a slope | 455

4 On the ribbon, click Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

5 In the drawing, click to specify a start point.

6 In the drawing, click to specify a point at the same elevation.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIPESLOPE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Edit Slope dialog box

Create a BranchCreate or connect a branch segment to a header.

You can use the Continuation grip in the middle of a header pipe segment tobegin routing a branch.

You can create a branch using object snap to route into another pipe.

For precise placement of the branch segment, you can select and move thebranch fitting up or down the header. The connected branch moves with thefitting.

The branch table in the pipe spec identifies the fittings (if any) and fastenersthat are used when you connect to another pipe. For example: a tee whenconnecting to a pipe of the same size, or an o-let when branching to a smallerpipe. For more information, see Work with the Branch Table.

To create a tee branch

1 In the drawing, select a pipe.


2 Near the middle of the pipe, click the Continuation grip.

3 In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the branch.


To create a stub-in branch

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.

2 In the drawing, click to specify a start point.

3 At the command prompt, enter st (STub-in).

4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an objectsnap (for example: Perpendicular).

5 In the drawing, click to specify a point on the pipe header.

Create a Branch | 457

To create an o-let branch


2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select an o-let (for example: sockolet).

3 In the Pipe Spec Viewer, click Insert in Model.

4 If the insertion point is not located at the desired port, press CTRL.

5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an objectsnap (for example: Midpoint).

6 Click to specify a point on the pipe line to snap to.

7 Click an o-let rotation or press ENTER for zero.

8 Press Enter.

9 In the drawing area, click the o-let to select it.

10 Click the Continuation grip on to create a branch.

11 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the branch.



To branch from fittings

1 In the drawing area, click a fitting (for example: an elbow).

2 Click a branch Continuation grip.

A Continuation grip that is not located at an open port is a branchContinuation grip.



Create a Branch | 459

To branch from a precise distance down a header


2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click From.


4 Click to specify a point at end of a header.

5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Nearest.

6 Move your mouse over the header to display the osnap glyph (do notclick).

You are now tracking down the header.

7 Enter a distance to create the branch (for example: 24).




Modify PipingAfter pipe and pipe fittings have been placed in the drawing, you can moveconnected pipe and change part properties.

If you modify the location, spec, or size of pipe, AutoCAD Plant 3D will attemptto retain pipe connections. If you make a change that cannot be resolved, theconnection is marked with a property-mismatch glyph, or it is disconnected.

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a number of tools you can use to modify pipe.

Substitute Parts

You can use the Substitution grip to replace compatible parts.

A compatible part has the same size and type (for example: you can substitutea gate valve with a ball valve).

Using Alignment Lines to Help Move Pipe

You can use alignment lines as visual tools. When you select pipe in thedrawing, alignment lines display along the axis of connected pipe.

Modify Piping | 461

Alignment lines help you to identify connected pipe, and to determine whichdirection you can move the pipe.

When you use a Move grip, you move the pipe axis and all connected partsthat share the axis. Conceptually, this is the same as stretching alignmentlines with Ortho mode on.

Changing part Properties

You can use the properties palette to change pipe and fitting properties.

You can change a part in the drawing by modifying the size or spec property.If you change a part, AutoCAD Plant 3D can retain connections by adjustingadjacent fittings. For example: changing the pipe size adds (or removes)reducers.

You can change the property value of multiple items at once. Selecting allconnected items before you change size or spec allows you to avoid temporaryincompatibilities that can add unnecessary fittings or cause disconnections.

For more information on selecting connected pipe, see Select Piping on page466.

You can also change properties using the Data Manager.

Update a Pipe Spec

You can update the drawing when a change is made to a spec (extension .pspx)file.

Fitting geometry, material properties, and connection type (endcode) are setin the pipe spec. If a part is unavailable in a spec, a placeholder part is used.


For more information, see Update a Spec in a Plant 3D Model.

To move pipe using grips

1 In the drawing area, click an elbow to select it.

Alignment lines display on connected pipe.

2 Click a move part grip.

3 Specify a location to move the elbow to (for example: to the left).

Modify Piping | 463

You can move the elbow only in a direction that is perpendicular to analignment line.

To connect adjacent piping

1 At the command prompt, enter plantconnectjoint.

2 In the drawing area, select a part with an open port.

3 Select a second part that has an open part at the same location.

The disconnect glyph no longer displays.

To change pipe size or spec

1 In the drawing area, select one or more pipe or fitting objects.

2 Right-click in the model.

3 In the shortcut menu, click Properties.

4 If you want to change the pipe spec do the following:

■ In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D group ➤ Spec.

■ In the Spec list, click a pipe spec.


5 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D group ➤ General ➤

NominalDiameter.■

■ In the NominalDiameter list, click a different size.

Lock Pipe PlacementYou can lock pipe after it has been positioned to meet your designrequirements.

If you move pipe, connected pipe that is locked does not move.

Lock Pipe Placement | 465

A locked part displays a lock glyph when the part is selected orhighlighted. If you move a connected part the axis of the locked part doesnot change. Locked pipe can be shortened (or lengthened) to accommodatenew fittings, but the axis does not change.

Locking a part does not prevent you from making changes directly to the part.For example, you can move a locked part using its Move grip.

To lock or unlock piping

1 In the drawing area, click to select one or more Plant 3D objects.


3 In the shortcut menu, click Lock/Unlock Placement.

A lock glyph displays or hides in the model.

Select PipingYou can select connected pipe, or select pipe using the line number.

You can select all parts that have the same line number, or all connected partsthat have the same line number. For information on setting a line number,see Set Line Numbers on page 433.

To select connected pipe

1 In the drawing area, click to select one or more pipe components.


3 In the shortcut menu, click Append to Selection ➤ Connected Parts ➤

All Connected Parts.

Place Pipe FittingsPipe fittings are added as you route pipe, or you can select and insert a pipefitting.


When you route, elbows are automatically added when you change direction.Tees, o-lets, and other fittings are added when a branch is created. Flanges areadded to pipe when connecting to another flanged fitting.

Fittings are chosen based on current spec file, and the joint settings in theproject. The spec file provides the list of available fittings, the priority orderin which compatible fittings are selected from the list (if there are multipleoptions), and the branch table.

You can place in-line pipe components such as valves after first selecting thecomponent from the Spec Viewer or the Tool palette.

Pipe fittings must belong to the pipe spec or must be created using the CustomParts dialog box. AutoCAD Plant 3D does not support attaching AutoCADobjects, such as block references, into a pipe line.

Using Fitting Grips

Fittings have a flip and rotation grip, in addition to all the grips available ona pipe segment. You can orient a fitting by flipping and rotating using grips.For more information about grips, see Plant 3D Grips on page 287.

Erasing Connected Fittings

When you erase pipe or pipe fittings, the fittings and fasteners that wereautomatically placed are also erased.

To delete only the selected fittings, hold the CTRL key when erasing.

Automatic Placement

Pipe fittings are selected and placed at joints when routing pipe. The type andplacement of fittings are determined by:

■ Geometry

■ Adjacent parts

■ Pipe Spec

■ Project settings - Connections

■ Ribbon values

The pipe spec and project connector settings determine how fittings areselected when routing. The pipe spec provides the part detail (including endtype). The connector settings control what joint is used to connect the parts.For more information, see Configure Connectors on page 179.

Place Pipe Fittings | 467

Understand Endcodes and Joint types

An endcode describes the open end (port) of piping and equipment nozzles.For example, the endcode of a buttweld elbow is BV (for Beveled). The endcodeof an equipment nozzle is typically FL (for Flanged).

You can use the Properties Palette to view the endcodes of piping and nozzlesin the drawing. You cannot change the endcode using the Properties Palette.

In general, you do not manipulate endcodes directly. They are a Read-onlyproperty of the part used in the pipe spec or the equipment nozzle.

Default Endcodes

Example Joint (Match)DescriptionEndcode

Socket Weld (SWF)Plain End, Socket MalePL

Butt WeldBeveled EndBV

Threaded (THDF)Threaded MaleTHDM

Threaded (THDM)Threaded FemaleTHDF

Socket Weld (PL)Socketweld FemaleSW

FlangedFlangedFL

Wafer flanged (FL)WaferWF

Collar Lapped (PL)LapLAP

Grooved (PL)GroovedGRV

Slip on weld (PL)Slip OnSO

FusionweldPlastic PlainPPL

Glue (PPL)Plastic Socket FemalePSW

Lined FlangeLFL

Lined LapLLP

Flanged (FL)LugLUG


Default Endcodes

Example Joint (Match)DescriptionEndcode

Bell and spigot (SPIG)BellBELL

Bell and spigot (BELL)SpigotSPIG

Tap (PL)TapTAP

Pipe adapts to different end connections. Plain, beveled, threaded male, andgrooved end types are all compatible and adjust to match the joint. Forexample, if a threaded elbow is connected to a pipe that has a Port Propertyof PL for EndType1, the pipe end type connects as THDM.

To add an elbow


2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select an elbow (for example: ELL 90 LR).




6 In the drawing area, click to specify an open port on a pipe line.

7 Click to specify an elbow rotation or press ENTER for zero.

8 Press ENTER to finish adding elbows.

To roll an elbow while routing

1 In the drawing area, select a pipe that has an open port.

Place Pipe Fittings | 469

2 At the end of the pipe, click a Continuation grip.

3 At the command prompt, enter r (Rollelbow).

4 In the drawing area, click to specify an elbow angle (for example: 90).

5 It the compass angle snap is not set to an increment of the desired rollangle, do the following:

■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Compass panel ➤ SnapIncrements.

■ In the Snap Increment list, click a snap increment (for example: 15).

6 In the drawing area, click to specify a roll angle (for example: 30).



Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTCONNECTJOINT

PLANTDISCONNECTJOINT

PLANTREMOVEORPHANFASTENERS

System Variables

PLANTCONNECTIONMARKER

Interface Reference

No entries

Place ValvesYou can place valves using the Spec Viewer or from the tool palette.

You can use the rotation grip to orient the valve after insertion. After youhave placed the valve, you can pick an actuator using the Substitution gripon the valve.

The pipe spec determines the valve operator that is placed with the valve.

To insert a valve


2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select a valve (for example: globe valve).



5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an objectsnap (for example: Midpoint).

6 Click to specify a point on the pipe line.

Place Valves | 471

7 Click a valve rotation or press ENTER for zero.

8 Press ENTER to finish adding valves to the model.

To change a valve operator

1 In the drawing area, click to select a valve.

2 Right-click in the drawing area. Click Properties.

3 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Part Properties ➤ ValveOperator.

4 In the Operator list, click a valve operator (for example: HandWheel).

To place a valve at a precise distance from a fitting

1 In the Spec Viewer, in the Spec Sheet, click a valve.


2 Click Insert in Model.


The port aligns with piping flow, regardless of which port you use.

4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click From.


6 Click to specify a point on a fitting.

7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Nearest.

8 Move your mouse over the header to display the osnap glyph (do notclick).

You are now tracking down the pipe.

9 Enter a distance to create the branch (for example: 48).

Place Valves | 473

10 Press ENTER to finish adding valves.

NOTE You can specify the center of a valve using the mid osnap.

Create Custom and Placeholder PartsYou can create and add parts to a pipe line that are not in the pipe spec.

Piping components that are not in the pipe spec are either custom parts orplaceholder parts. A custom part does not have a relationship with a pipe spec.A placeholder part is added when the pipe spec is not complete.

In addition to direct placement, placeholder parts can be created during a specupdate if a part is orphaned from a spec. This occurs when an incompatiblechange is made to the part size, or if the part is removed from the pipe spec.

There are three types of components that can be added to a pipe line:

■ Catalog part. A part that is added from a catalog to the pipe spec. Mostcomponents are catalog parts.

■ Placeholder. An object that is temporarily used until the part is added tothe pipe spec. After the part is added to the pipe spec, you can use thesubstitution grip to update it.

■ Custom part. A part that is not available in the catalogs, and will not beadded to the pipe spec. For example, a specialty item or instrument.

When an item is added to the pipe spec, the part’s geometry (parametric) iscopied from the catalog to the pipe spec. Custom and placeholder parts aredrawn with simplified geometry.


NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 does not provide for authoring parametric contentfor catalog parts. Custom parts allow you to add a part that is not available in thecatalogs.

To create a custom part

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Custom Parts.

2 In the Custom Parts dialog box, click Custom Part (permanent).

3 In the Size list, click the size of the pipe the part attaches to (for example:4).

4 In the Part class list, click the class (for example: Inline Instrument).

5 In the Part Display list, click the part shape (for example cylinder).

6 Under Part Geometry, enter the part dimensions (for example: D 6, L 12).

7 Click Place.

Create Custom and Placeholder Parts | 475

8 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an objectsnap (for example: Nearest).

NOTE If the custom part is flanged, you can add a flange to the pipe beforeattaching the custom part.

9 Click a pipe.

10 Click to specify a rotation or press ENTER for zero.

11 Press ENTER to finish adding custom parts.

To create a placeholder part

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Custom Parts.

2 In the Custom Parts dialog box, click Placeholder Part (temporary).

3 In the Size list, click a pipe size (for example: 6”) this part attaches to.

4 In the Part class list, click a part class (for example: Nipple).

5 In the Required from Spec list, click the pipe spec that needs this part(for example: CS300).


6 Click Place.

7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an objectsnap (for example: Node).

8 Click to specify a point on the pipe line.

The placeholder part is connected to the pipe line.

Create Custom and Placeholder Parts | 477

9 Press ENTER to finish adding placeholder parts.

A glyph appears near placeholder part if plantplaceholderdisplay is on.You can use the substitution grip after the catalog part is added to thespec.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTCUSTOMPARTS

PLANTCUSTOMPARTSCLOSE

System Variables

PLANTPLACEHOLDERDISPLAY

Interface Reference

Custom Parts Window

Edit Placeholder Part Geometry dialog box

Assign TagsYou can assign tags in the 3D model similar to the way you tag in P&IDdrawings.

A tag is a unique identifier for a Plant object. In a 3D model, pipe, pipe fittings,pipe supports, and equipment have a tag by default. You can add a tag tostructure.

Pipe and pipe fittings have a line number tag in addition to the tag that allPlant objects can have. For more information about line numbers, see Set LineNumbers on page 433.

Annotation is not supported for the Plant 3D object tags.

To tag a plant 3D object

1 In the drawing area, select one Plant 3D object.




4 In the Properties palette ➤ Plant 3D group ➤ Tag, click the [...] button.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTTAG

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Insulate PipingYou can add insulation to a pipe line by setting insulation properties and usea display command to control insulation visibility.

You can assign insulation to a pipe line using Data Manager, or to individualpipe components using the properties palette.

You can display or hide insulation using the plantinsulationdisplaybutton on the ribbon.

To add insulation to a pipe

1 In the drawing area, select one or more pipe or fitting objects.



Insulate Piping | 479

4 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Process Line group ➤

Insulation Thickness.

5 In the Insulation Thickness box, enter the thickness.

6 In the Insulation Type box, enter the type.

7 NOTE You can also use Data Manager to assign insulation to Pipe Lines.

Quick Reference

Commands

No entries

System Variables

PLANTINSULATIONDISPLAY

Interface Reference

No entries

Work with External Reference (Xref) DrawingsYou can connect to the open port of pipe, pipe fittings, and equipment nozzlesthat are in a referenced (xref) drawing. When you connect to an xref, fittingsand fasteners are added to the current drawing.

The xref drawing must be part of the current project. If the xref drawing isnot in your current project DWG folder you can link to it. It is not necessaryto copy the drawing first. For more information, see Link or Copy Files to theProject Folders on page 243.

Xrefs must be inserted at the world coordinate origin (0,0,0), and cannot bemoved, scaled, or rotated.

If you select an xref, Continuation grips are not available. You can use a nodeobject snap to connect to the xref port.

Understand Detached Xref Connections

If a connection is broken because of changes made to the Xref, no attemptmade to reconnect. Fasteners that were used to connect to the separated portare called orphaned fasteners.


When you first open a drawing that contains Xrefs, the drawing is checkedto determine if there are orphaned fasteners. With your permission, they areremoved. Orphaned fasteners can also be removed usingplantremoveorphanfasteners.

To connect to equipment in an Xref

1 If the xref is not already placed in the model, do the following:

■ On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Reference pane ➤ Attach.

■ In the Select Reference File dialog box, browse to select a drawing filethat is in the current project.

■ Click Open.

■ Under Insertion Point, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.

■ In the X, Y and Z box, enter (0, 0, 0).

■ Under Scale, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.

■ In the X, Y and Z box, enter (1, 1, 1).

■ Under Rotation, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.

■ In the Angle box, enter 0.

■ Click OK



4 In the drawing area, click to specify a point on an open port (pipe ornozzle) on the xref.

Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings | 481

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTREMOVEORPHANFASTENERS

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Copy Plant 3D objectsYou can use the clipboard to copy and paste Plant 3D objects.

When you copy a Plant 3D object, the tag is assigned a question mark ( ? ). Ifthe object is a pipe component, the line number is set to Unassigned.

To connect to existing pipe, you must use a port location as your base point.

NOTE If the drawing is not in the current project, you can copy Plant 3D objectsonly to the clipboard. You cannot modify or create Plant 3D objects in a drawingthat is not in the current project.

To paste a pipe component into an existing line

1 At the command prompt, enter copybase.


3 Click to specify a point on the pipe at a port (the port does not have tobe open).


4 In the drawing area, select the pipe components you want to copy.

5 Press ENTER to finish selection.

6 At the command prompt, enter pasteclip.

7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an objectsnap (for example: Near).

8 In the drawing area, click to specify a point at the new location.

Copy Plant 3D objects | 483

484

Create and Modify PipeSupports

You can create and connect pipe supports to pipe in a 3D model.

Isometric drawings and drawings exported to PCF file format for interference detection includepipe supports.

Pipe supports include the following types:

■ Shoes

■ Hangers (with or without springs)

■ Trunnions, dummy legs

■ Pipe stanchions (with or without saddles)

■ Trapeze bars (with or without springs)

■ Ubolts

■ Pipe guides

■ Pipe clamps (including riser clamps)

■ Pipe rolls

You can customize pipe supports by attaching AutoCAD objects to a pipe support. If thesupport type that you need is not included in the library, you can convert AutoCAD objectsinto a custom pipe support type.

Add Pipe SupportsYou can create and connect pipe supports to pipe or components in a 3D model.

11

485

You create 3D models of pipe supports from a parametric library, as you wouldcreate 3D models of mechanical equipment.

When you connect pipe supports to pipe, the support orientation and size isset from the pipe line. If you connect a support to sloped piping, the supportis oriented along the axis (not the pipe) to align precisely with a structure orfoundation.

A trapeze bar does not connect to a pipe line because it can support multiplepipe lines.

NOTE Pipe supports connect to pipe when the support is created.

You can set pipe support dimensions for each type of support. The outsidediameter of pipe is used to set dimension default values.

If a pipe support contains variable dimensions (for example: shoe height orhanger length), you specify those dimensions after selecting the insertionpoint and orientation.

Understand Pipe Support Tagging

You can assign tags to pipe supports. Like other Plant 3D objects, pipe supportsare displayed in the Data Manager.

Pipe support position and type are included in a PCF export, which allowspipe supports to be included with the pipe line in isometric drawings, formodel stress analysis, and for design checking.

To add pipe supports

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Create.

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe or pipe component object.

3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click a supporttype (for example: Slide ➤ Clamped Slide 1).

Default support dimensions are provided based on outside diameter.

4 Click Insert.

5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click an objectsnap (for example: Nearest).

486 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

6 Click a pipe.

7 If the support type requires a rotation, do one of the following:

■ Press ENTER to indicate zero rotation.

■ Click to indicate a rotation.

8 Press ENTER to finish adding pipe supports.

To add a dummy leg support


Add Pipe Supports | 487

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe or pipe component object.

3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click DummyLeg ➤ Dummy Legs.

4 Click Insert.

5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click Node.

6 Click to specify an Elbow connection point.

7 Press ENTER to finish adding dummy legs.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIPESUPPORTADD

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Add Pipe Support Dialog Box

Modify Pipe Support DimensionsModify the dimensions of a pipe support in the 3D model.

You can change the dimensions of a pipe support after it has been created,but you cannot change the pipe support type.

If you modify a support that has been customized, attached AutoCAD objectsare erased. You can first detach AutoCAD objects and reattach them after thesupport has been modified.

To change pipe support dimensions

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Modify.

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe support object (for example: a SpringHanger).

3 In the Modify Pipe Support dialog box, modify a dimension (for example:change height to 36).

Modify Pipe Support Dimensions | 489

4 Click OK.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIPESUPPORTMODIFY

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Modify Pipe Support Dialog Box

Edit Pipe SupportsYou can copy, move, and erase pipe supports.

If you copy a pipe support, it adjusts to match the size of the pipe it is copiedto. If the pipe support is copied into space, it is disconnected.

You can move a pipe support from one pipe line to another.

If a pipe support is not attached to pipe, it displays a disconnect glyph.


NOTE Use grips to edit pipe and connected supports. If you use the AutoCADmove command, pipe supports do not move unless pipe and supports are bothselected.

If pipe is moved using grips, connected pipe supports move with the pipe. Ifpipe is erased, connected pipe supports are erased by default.

To move supports with pipe

1 In the drawing area, select a pipe object that has supports attached.

2 Click the Move Part grip.

3 Specify a new location for the pipe.

The pipe and pipe support move together.

Create Custom SupportsYou can customize supports by attaching AutoCAD objects to a support. Youcan also create a custom support type by converting AutoCAD objects into apipe support.

You can create a custom pipe support type such as a pick-up.

A custom pipe support type cannot contain other pipe supports, pipe, or pipecomponents. Only AutoCAD objects can be converted into a custom pipesupport type. You can explode a pipe support to obtain AutoCAD objects froma pipe support.

If you want to reuse a custom support you can add it to the tool palette.

To attach AutoCAD objects to a pipe support

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Attach Support.

Create Custom Supports | 491

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe support object (for example: a SimpleSupport).

3 Select one or more AutoCAD objects to attach (for example: an AutoCADcylinder).

To detach AutoCAD objects from a pipe support

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ DetachSupport.

2 In the drawing area, select a customized pipe support object.

To create a custom pipe support type

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ ConvertSupport.

2 In the drawing area, select one or more AutoCAD objects.


4 Click a pipe or pipe component.


Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPIPESUPPORTATTACH

PLANTPIPESUPPORTCONVERT

PLANTPIPESUPPORTDETACH

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Work with Sloped PipingYou can attach vertically aligned pipe supports to sloped piping.

Pipe supports that attach to a foundation or structure aligns in a precisehorizontal or vertical orientation when attached to sloped pipe.

To add pipe support to a sloped pipe


2 In the drawing area, select a pipe object that has a slope.

3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click a supporttype (for example: Dual Clamp Stanchion).

Work with Sloped Piping | 493

4 Click Insert.


6 Click a pipe.


■ Press ENTER to indicate zero rotation.

■ Click to indicate a rotation.

8 Press ENTER to finish adding pipe supports.


Control the Plant 3D ModelDisplay

You can change the display style to show realistic and wireframe visual styles. You can alsoshow or hide individual plant 3D objects.

Control the Visual Style of the Plant 3D ModelWhen you use a wireframe visual style, you generally configure display settingsthat are different from those set for a realistic visual style. Configuring visualstyle settings can benefit display appearance and performance.

Default display settings show isolines when using a wireframe visual style.

12

495

You can configure the wireframe visual style to display true silhouettes. If youchange back to a realistic visual style, you can turn off silhouettes to improvedisplay performance.

For more information, see Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects.

To turn on silhouettes for wireframe display

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visual Styles pane ➤ Visual StylesManager.

2 In the Visual Styles Manager palette, click Available Visual Styles inDrawing ➤ 2D Wireframe.

3 In the Face Settings ➤ Draw True Silhouettes list, click Yes.

4 In the Countour Lines box, enter 0 (zero).

5 At the Command prompt, enter regen.

NOTE The 2D wireframe silhouette and isoline display settings also affectthe 3D wireframe settings.

Set Visibility of Plant 3D ObjectsYou can set the visibility of all Plant 3D objects, including pipe, equipment,and structure.

When you want to work without visual interference from other objects inlarge drawings, you can hide Plant 3D objects.

NOTE Plant 3D visibility control is separate from AutoCAD layer visibility.

496 | Chapter 12 Control the Plant 3D Model Display

To hide Plant 3D objects

1 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects you want to hide.

2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visibility pane ➤ Hide.

To display only selected Plant 3D objects

1 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects you want to display.

2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visibility pane ➤ Hide Others.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTISOLATE

PLANTHIDE

PLANTSHOWALL

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects | 497

498

Manage Data and GenerateReports

You can use the Data Manager to view, edit, export, and import data and to generate reports.

Work with the Data ManagerYou can view, modify, export, and import drawing and project data, and generatereports using the Data Manager.

Using the Data Manager, you can export data for drawings and projects, modifythe data externally, and import it back into the Data Manager. You can exportdata and reports to Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheets and comma-separated value(CSV) files.

NOTE You can also export Plant 3D data to Piping Component Format (PCF) files.

By default, the Data Manager is docked in the drawing area. You can undock itand float it, or anchor it to the top or bottom of the drawing area. You can alsomake the Data Manager transparent or use auto-hide to conserve desktop space.

For more information about how to control the display of the Data Manager,see Control the Display of the Drawing Space on page 293.

Understand Data Views

Data views in the Data Manager display hierarchically organized data for thecurrent drawing, project, or report. In the Data Manager drop-down list, youcan select various data views, including any customized views.

13

499

The following table outlines each data view:

PurposeView

Displays data for the current drawing.Current Drawing Data

Displays data for the current P&ID project.P&ID Project Data

Displays data or the current Plant 3D project.Plant 3D Project Data

Displays project reports data.Project Reports

Displays customized views for drawings or projects.Customized

Current Drawing and Project Data Views

In the Current Drawing Data view, the tree view shows data for the activedrawing grouped by nodes. Data for a selected node is displayed in the datatable.

The tree view for Current Drawing and Project Data views in Plant 3D isorganized differently than the tree view for P&ID drawings. For moreinformation about tree views and nodes, see Understand Tree Views and Nodesin this section.

In Project Data view, data is organized and displayed as it is in the CurrentDrawing Data view. You use Project Data view to view data for all drawingsin a project.

Project Reports View

In Project Reports view, the tree view lists the project report types that youcan use to generate reports. When you select a report, data for the report isdisplayed in the data table based on the report definition.

500 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

NOTE Check with your system administrator for more information about Plant3D-specific reports.

Customized Views

In a customized view, the tree view lists the properties for each node of thecustomized view (for example: Manufacturer, Model Number, and Supplier).

For more information about customizing views for P&ID drawings, seeConfigure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) on page 53.

For more information about customizing views for Plant 3D drawings, seeConfigure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150.

Understand Tree Views and Nodes

In a data view, you view data grouped by nodes for the active drawing orproject. Data for a selected node is displayed in the data table. By default, thetree displays only nodes that have content, but you can choose to view allnodes.

In P&ID drawings and projects, you view tree nodes grouped by object type(class), with Engineering Items and Non-Engineering Items as the primarynodes.

Work with the Data Manager | 501

In Plant 3D drawings and projects, you view tree nodes grouped by Area (aphysical area in a model), or by Object type. The default view grouping isArea.

You can specify the Area property when you create a project drawing. Areanodes include equipment, pipe lines, and structural members. For moreinformation about specifying the Area property, see Set Drawing Propertieson page 249.

For more information about displaying nodes, see Control the Display of theTree View on page 511.

To view current drawing data




To view P&ID project data


2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click P&ID Project Data.

To view Plant 3D project data


2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Plant 3D Project Data.

To view Project Reports


2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

To select customized views in the Data Manager


2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriatecustomized view.

To turn Auto-hide on and off for the Data Manager


2 In the Data Manager, right-click the title bar. Click Auto-hide.

To make the Data Manager transparent

1 Make sure that hardware acceleration is disabled.

Work with the Data Manager | 503

NOTE For information about how to disable hardware acceleration, see ToTune Performance Manually in the AutoCAD Help system.


3 In the Data Manager, right-click the title bar. Click Transparency.

4 In the Transparency dialog box, move the slider to specify the percentageof transparency. Click OK.

To synchronize the Data Manager with symbols and annotations in a P&IDdrawing

■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Synchronize PID Symbolsand Annotations.

To refresh data in the Data Manager

■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Refresh.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D ObjectsYou can zoom to a Plant 3D object in a drawing from the data table.


When you select a Plant 3D object in a drawing, the data record for the Plant3D object is displayed and highlighted in the data table.

Using the Data Manager, you can also zoom to a Plant 3D object in a drawingfrom its data table record.

You can zoom to a Plant 3D object by clicking the empty cell in the left columnthat corresponds to the Plant 3D object. If you click a cell for a Plant 3D objectthat is in an unopened drawing, the drawing opens and zooms to the Plant3D object.

To locate a Plant 3D object in a drawing




■ To locate a record in the Data Manager, on the Data Manager toolbar,click Show Selected Items. Click the Plant 3D object in the drawingarea.

■ To locate a Plant 3D object in the drawing area, on the Data Managertoolbar, click Show All Items. Click the row header of the record inthe data table.

To turn persistent zoom on or off


2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate dataview.

3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display.

4 On the toolbar, click Turn Zoom Toggle On or Zoom Toggle Off.

NOTE To zoom to multiple Plant 3D objects, press and hold the CTRL key whenclicking the appropriate cells in the Zoom column of the data table.

Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects | 505

To display a record in the data table by selecting an item in a drawing



3 On the toolbar, click Show Selected Items so that it is toggled on.

4 In the drawing, click a Plant 3D object.

NOTE The data for the selected Plant 3D object is displayed at the top ofthe data table. If the selected item was filtered out by a current filter, the filteris removed.

To scroll through records in the data table




4 At the bottom of the data table, click the left and right arrows to scrollthrough the records.

NOTE You can scroll to the first or last record by clicking the arrow buttonswith vertical lines.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Edit Data Properties in the Data ManagerYou can edit properties in the Data Manager by updating the data table.

You can update multiple cells simultaneously and copy and paste data fromone cell to another or from other programs. In the data table, read-only cellsare displayed with a shaded background and cannot be edited.

When you try to edit data for a Plant 3D object in a drawing that is notcurrently open, the drawing opens. Read-only drawings do not open whenyou attempt to edit properties.

To edit data for a Plant 3D object that spans more than one drawing, all thedrawings that contain the Plant 3D object must be editable. If drawings areread-only, you cannot change the data.

To edit a property by entering a value




4 In the data table, click in the cell of the property to edit. If the propertyis in Acquire mode, click the yellow icon in the cell and click Overridemode on the list.

5 Enter a new value in the cell.

Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager | 507

NOTE A pencil icon in the row marker indicates that the record is in editmode.

6 Press ENTER or click in another cell to commit the new value.

To edit a property by selecting a listed value




4 In the data table, click the cell of the property to edit. If the property isin Acquire mode, click the yellow icon in the cell and click Override modein the list.

5 Click the arrow to display the list.

6 Click a value on the list.

7 Press ENTER or click in another cell to commit the new value.

To edit a property by copying and pasting




4 In the data table, right-click the cell that contains the value you want tocopy. Click Copy.

NOTE It is recommended that you copy values from only one column at atime.

5 Click one or more cells where you want to paste the value.


NOTE To select more than one cell, press and hold the CTRL key while clickingthe cells.

6 Right-click and click Paste.

To clear a cell value




4 In the data table, click one or more cells where you want to clear thevalue.

NOTE To select more than one cell, press and hold the CTRL key while clickingthe cells.

5 Press DELETE.

Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager | 509

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the DataManager

You can place annotations in a P&ID drawing by dragging a cell value fromthe data table.

When placing annotation text in a drawing, a temporary line connects theannotation text to the P&ID object. Annotations you place by dragging cellvalues from the Data Manager are linked annotations. When you move a P&IDobject with a linked annotation, the annotation moves with it. When youchange annotation data in the data table, the annotations in the drawing areupdated accordingly.

You can convert a linked annotation into a freestanding annotation.Freestanding annotations do not move with P&ID objects.

Annotations you add to a drawing using the Data Manager inherit the defaultAutoCAD text style. You can change the text style of annotations by changingthe AutoCAD text style; however you cannot edit annotations with AutoCADtext editing commands.

NOTE You cannot place annotations in Plant 3D drawings from the Data Manager.

To place linked annotations in a P&ID drawing from the Data Manager





4 Click the cell you want to use to annotate the P&ID object and drag itfrom the data table to the drawing area.

5 Release the button and click the drawing area where you want to placethe annotation.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Filter and Sort Data in the Data ManagerYou can use filters and sorting to organize the data you view in the DataManager.

You can filter and sort data, and manipulate the order and display of thecolumns in the Data Manager.

Control the Display of the Tree ViewYou can specify the nodes displayed in the tree view.

By default, the tree view shows only nodes with content in the current drawingor project. You can change this setting to show all nodes.

NOTE When the tree view is displayed by area (the Plant 3D default), you canview only nodes with content.

Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 511

To show all nodes or only nodes with content



3 In the tree view, right-click a node. Click Show All Nodes or Show OnlyNodes with Content.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Filter Information in the Data TableIn the data table, you can select the information you view by applying filters.

You can view all items or only selected items, or filter the data based on specificfield values or value ranges. You view only records for Plant 3D objects selected


in the drawing. Selections you make in the drawing determine what isdisplayed in the Data Manager.

Filters apply to each view, each user, and each AutoCAD Plant 3D session, sowhen you switch views or open a new drawing, your filters are saved. You caneasily remove or apply filters to any view, or apply multiple filterssimultaneously.

To view only items selected in the data table



3 In the tree, click the node you want to display.

4 In the data table, right-click a cell that contains the value whose datayou want to filter. Click Filter By Selection.

To view all items except items selected in the data table




4 In the data table, right-click a cell that contains the value you want toexclude from the filtered view. Click Filter Excluding Selection.

To filter by field values and ranges of values





4 In the data table, right-click a cell for the property where you want to seta filter.

5 In the Filter For box, enter a value for the filter. You can use the followingconditions individually or concurrently:

NOTE Surround a string entry with single quotation marks (‘). Entries arecase-sensitive.

ExamplesPurposeConditions (can beused cumulatively)






Asterisk (*)




Equal signs (=)



IS NULL





Question mark (?)


6 Press ENTER.

To view data for selected Plant 3D objects in the drawing


2 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects whose data you want to view.

3 In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Show Selected Items.

To remove all filters in the current data view



3 In the data table, click a cell.

4 Click Remove Filter.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Sort Records in the Data TableYou can sort data by column in the data table. A small arrow in the columnheader indicates the current sort order.

When you view records in the data table, you can freeze columns so they donot move when you scroll the data table. You can also hide columns that haveno data.

To sort columns in ascending or descending order




4 In the data table, click a column header to change the sort order.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Control the Display of Columns in the Data TableYou can control the display and order of columns in the data table.

You can arrange column order to reduce the amount of scrolling required toview or edit values in the data table. You can also freeze columns so they donot move as you scroll in the data table, or hide columns you do not want toview.

The display and order of columns in the data table for any data view are savedto a project-specific Data Manager Settings (DMS) file.

After the display or order of the columns for a project is set, a file with thename <project name>.dms is created in the following folder: \Documents andSettings\<user profile>\Application Data\Autodesk\<product name>\<productversion>\<language>\Support\PnPProjects. The variable <project name> is thename of the project file that is opened in the Project Manager.

To freeze a column in the data table




4 In the data table, right-click the header of the column to freeze. ClickFreeze.


NOTE When you freeze a column, the column and all columns to the left ofit in the data table hold their position when scrolling. You can unfreeze acolumn by right-clicking its header and clicking Unfreeze.

To hide or show a column in the data table




4 In the data table, right-click the header of the column to hide. Click Hide.

5 To display hidden columns, right-click any column header and clickUnhide.

To resize a column in the data table




4 In the data table column header, place your cursor over the separationline between two columns.

5 Drag the separation line to change the column width.

To rearrange column order in the data table





4 In the data table, click the column header of the column to move anddrag it right or left to a new location.

NOTE When you close AutoCAD Plant 3D, the column order you specify inthis procedure is written to the <project name>.dms file, which is saved in thePnPProjects folder. The PnPProjects folder is located under the folder\Documents and Settings\<user profile>\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCADPlant 3D 2010\<product version>\<language>\Support.

To copy column order for a project on another workstation

1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder: \Documents andSettings\<user profile>\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D2010\<product version>\language\Support\PnPProjects.

2 Locate the file <project name>.dms and copy it to a shared folder on thenetwork.

3 In Windows Explorer, on the workstation where you want to copy thecolumn order, browse to the shared network folder and copy the file.

4 On the workstation where you want to copy the column order, browseto the following folder: \Documents and Settings\<user profile>\ApplicationData\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010\<productversion>\<language>\Support\PnPProjects. Paste the <project name>.dms fileinto the folder.

To revert to the default data table column order



3 In the tree view, right-click a node whose data table column order youwant to reset, and do one of the following:

■ To reset the data table column order for only a selected node, clickReset Node Column Order.

■ To reset the data table column order for a selected node and all childnodes, click Reset All Child Node Column Orders.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

View Read-Only Data and Property Acquisition DataYou can view read-only and acquisition data from the Data Manager.

Acquisition properties in Acquire mode are displayed with a gray backgroundin the data table. You can edit a property in Acquire mode by changing it toOverride mode. For more information about Acquire and Override modes, seeSet Up Property Acquisition (P&ID) on page 90.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Print Data from the Data ManagerYou can print the data displayed in the Data Manager.

To print Plant 3D object data from the Data Manager




4 On the toolbar, click Print.

5 In the Print dialog box, specify the printer and other print settings. ClickOK.

Print Data from the Data Manager | 521

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Export and Import Data in the Data ManagerYou can export Plant 3D object data for projects and drawings, modify thedata externally, and import it into the Data Manager.

Export Data from the Data ManagerYou can export data to a Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheet, to a comma-separatedvalues (CSV) file, or to a Piping Component Format (PCF) file.

NOTE You cannot use import or export custom settings when importing orexporting in Area view.

Export Active Node and Child Nodes

You can export data for the active node and all child nodes under it, or forthe active node only. If you include all child nodes, you export a spreadsheetthat contains a worksheet for each node, or a CSV file for each node. If youinclude only the active node, you export a spreadsheet with a single worksheet,or a single CSV file.


For example: if the Engineering Items node is active, and you export the activenode and all child nodes to a spreadsheet, the spreadsheet contains a separateworksheet for each node.

View Exported Data

When you export the current data table, the resulting file includes all columnsand rows displayed in the Data Manager. An exported file does not includehidden columns and rows.

Read-only columns in the data table are write-protected in the exportedspreadsheet. The exception to this rule is that properties in Acquire mode canbe edited in an exported file.

Each worksheet or CSV file contains a row for each Plant 3D object and acolumn for each property, such as PnPID number, description, andmanufacturer.

Export Data from the Data Manager | 523

Name Exported FilesYou can specify a name for an exported file, or accept the name that theprogram suggests. The following default file name structures vary by file typeand by data table settings in the Data Manager.

Drawing Data ViewProject Data ViewFile Type

DrawingName-ActiveNode-Name.xls (or .xlsx)

ProjectName-ActiveNodeName.xls(or .xlsx)

Spread-sheet

DrawingName-ActiveNode-Name-ChildNodeName.csv

ProjectName-ActiveNode-Name-ChildNodeName.csv

CSV File

In an exported spreadsheet, worksheet names are derived from the displaynames of the nodes being exported. The column headings are derived fromthe display names of the column headings (properties) in the data table. Ifthe display name is longer than 31 characters, the node name is used to namethe worksheet.

NOTE To ensure successful export and import, it is recommended that projectadministrators use node names that are no longer than 31 characters.

To export Plant 3D object data



3 In the tree view, click the node to export.

4 On the toolbar, click Export.


5 In the Export Data dialog box, in the Select Export Settings list, clickDisplayed Data or a custom setting.

NOTE Only Displayed Data is available for area or customized views.

6 Under Include Child Nodes, click the appropriate option to include theactive node and all child nodes, or the active node only.

7 Under Enter File Name and Location for Exported Data, do one of thefollowing:

■ To use the default file path and file name, click OK and go to step 9.

■ To select a different file path or file name, click Browse.

Export Data from the Data Manager | 525

8 In the Export To dialog box, do the following:

■ Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported files.

■ In the File Name box, enter a file name or use the default file nameprovided.

■ In the Files of Type box, select the file format for the exported files:CSV, XLSX, or XLS (the default).

■ Click Save.

9 In the Export Data dialog box, click OK.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Export To Piping Component Format (PCF)You can export to PCF format from the Data Manager.

If the Data Manager tree is ordered by area, you can export line number nodedata to PCF files for use in third-party applications.

To export to a PCF file.


2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the drawing or projectdata view.

3 In the tree view, right-click a line number node. Click Export To PCF.

4 In the Save PCF As dialog box, do the following:

■ Navigate to the appropriate folder to save the file.

■ In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file namefor the file.

■ Click Save.

Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) | 527

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Modify Exported DataYou can add and modify data in an exported Microsoft®Excel®spreadsheet ora comma-separated value (CSV) and import it back into the Data Manager.

Modify Exported Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets

In Excel, you modify the worksheet that corresponds to the active node whereyou plan to import the spreadsheet. If you edit a worksheet that represents achild node, the import process ignores your changes.

For example, you export the Engineering Items node and choose to includeall child nodes. The exported spreadsheet contains multiple worksheets:Equipment, Tanks, Vessel, Pumps, and so on. If you plan to import the dataat the Engineering Items level, you modify only the EngineeringItemsworksheet.

It is important not to modify the names of worksheets in an exported MicrosoftExcel spreadsheet. The import process uses worksheet names to identify amatch with data in the Data Manager.


Modify Exported CSV Files

When you include child nodes in an export to CSV, you create multiple CSVfiles. You can edit data in the CSV files for import back into the Data manager.

Understand Read-Only Exported Data

Some properties, such as PnPID, are read-only in the Data Manager. Theseread-only properties are also write-protected in an exported Microsoft Excelspreadsheet. While it is possible to edit read-only data in a CSV file, asubsequent import ignores these changes.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Import Data to the Data ManagerYou can import data from a Microsoft®Excel®spreadsheet or a comma-separatedvalue (CSV) file to the current data table.

Determine the Node to Import

When you import a worksheet or CSV file, you import data for the currentlyactive node. Select the node that corresponds to the worksheet or CSV filecontaining the data you want to import.

Import Data to the Data Manager | 529

For example, you export the Engineering Items node and include all childnodes. In the resulting spreadsheet, you enter data only in the Equipmentnode. Before importing data, you select the Equipment node to make it activeand to import the correct data.

If you select a node that does not correspond directly to the modifiedworksheet or CSV file, the import ignores the changes.

If you change more than one exported worksheet or CSV file, you import eachmodified node individually. Generally, it is more efficient to edit a worksheetor CSV file that contains all the nodes you plan to edit. You can then importthe files at that node level.

Select Import Settings

When you import data, you can accept the default import setting or select acustom setting. The default setting is Displayed Data, which is the datacurrently displayed in the Data Manager.

NOTE You cannot use import or export custom settings when importing orexporting in Area view.

When a custom setting is configured in Project Setup for this purpose, youcan import data from another program. Select this custom setting duringimport.

Accept and Reject Edits

After you import data, the Data Manager displays modified properties in yellowhighlighting.

You accept or reject edits using the Accept and Reject buttons on the toolbar.You can accept or reject edits all at once, or individually.


AutoCAD Plant 3D creates log files in My Documents (Windows XP) orDocuments (Windows Vista) folder under your Windows user profile.

These log files are based on the data that you accept or reject after importinga spreadsheet or CSV file:

■ The log file ACCEPTED_<date>.log contains the imported data that youaccepted during the import.

■ The log file REJECTED_<date>.log contains the imported data that yourejected.

The variable <date> in the file name indicates the date when you accepted orrejected the imported data. For example, the file nameACCEPTED_10-16-2007.log contains a record for each accepted edit from animport on October 16, 2007.

NOTE You cannot import a spreadsheet exported from an earlier version ofAutoCAD Plant 3D. First, migrate the project or drawing to AutoCAD Plant 3D.You can then export and import data as needed. For more information aboutmigrating project data, see Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575.

Import Modified Acquisition Properties

Properties in Acquire mode appear gray in the Data Manager. You can editthese properties in an exported spreadsheet or CSV file, import the modifieddata, and accept or reject each edit. If you accept a change to an acquiredproperty, the property adopts the new value and changes from Acquire modeto Override mode. For more information about Acquire Mode and OverrideMode, see Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode on page 92.

To import Plant 3D object data from Excel



3 In the tree view, click the node where you want to import data.

NOTE Make sure to select the node that corresponds to the worksheet orCSV file containing the data you want to import.


4 On the toolbar, click Import.

5 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message is displayed, click OK.

NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted andrejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click thelink in the message to open the folder. After you accept and reject edits, youcan access the log file in the folder.

6 In the Import From dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Files of Type list, click the type of files to display (XLS, XLSX,or CSV).

■ Navigate to and select the spreadsheet or CSV file you want to import.

■ Click Open.

7 In the Import Data dialog box, do the following:

■ To select a different file to import, click Browse. Repeat step 6.

■ In the Select Import Settings list, click Displayed Data or a customsetting.


NOTE To import data from another program, click the appropriate customsetting. (Custom settings are unavailable, however, if you are importinginto an area or customized view.)

■ Click OK.

To accept or reject changes in imported data

1 In the Data Manager tree view, click the node that contains the importedchanges.

2 Review the imported data in the data table.

NOTE Pending changes are displayed with yellow highlighting.


■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Accept orReject to accept or reject changes one at a time.


■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Accept Allor Reject All to accept or reject all changes at once.

NOTE Switching data views or closing the Data Manager during this processcauses you to lose all changes that you have not yet accepted or rejected. If youlose changes during this process, repeat the import procedure to finish acceptingand rejecting imported changes.

To view the accepted or rejected logs from imported data

1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the My Documents (WindowsXP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder.

2 Double-click the ACCEPTED_<date>.log or REJECTED_<dat>.log file.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Project Report Selection Dialog Box

Generate Reports in the Data ManagerThe Data Manager provides several types of reports you can use to view andpresent data.

You can view, print, and export reports that contain both P&ID and Plant 3Ddata. You can export to Microsoft® Excel®, comma-separated value (CSV), orPCF (Piping Component Format) files.

In the Project Reports data view, the tree view shows the reports available forall drawings in the project, listed by report type.


The following table describes the default reports in Project Reports:

ContentsReport

Data about control valves, the drawingwhere they are located, the line number,sizes, and so on.

Control Valve List

Data about drawings in the project.Document Registry

Equipment components and the drawingwhere each component is located.

NOTE Your administrator can modify thisreport to include AutoCAD Plant 3D data.

Equipment List

Data about instruments, the drawingwhere they are located, and the object towhich they are connected.

Instrument Index

Data about piping segments grouped byline number and the drawing where theyare located.

Line List

Data about the pipeline groups and thedrawing where they are located.


Line Summary List

Data about nozzles, equipment, the draw-ing where they are located, and the line

Nozzle List

(segment and group) to which they areconnected, if any.

Generate Reports in the Data Manager | 535

ContentsReport

NOTE Your administrator can modify thisreport to include Plant 3D data.

Data about valves, the line segment, orgroup where they are located, and thedrawing location.


Valve List

The Project Reports data view includes the default report types and any customreport types. Consult your system administrator about available customizedAutoCAD Plant 3D reports.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

View Data in ReportsAll reports contain a column that lists the project with which the data isassociated.

When a Plant 3D object is present in more than one drawing, the reportcontains a separate entry for each drawing that contains the Plant 3D object.

You can manipulate what you see in a report by filtering and sorting the reportdata. For more information about filtering and sorting data in the DataManager, see Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager on page 511.


To view data in a report


■ In the Project Manager, click Reports flyout ➤ Reports.

■ In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

2 In the tree, expand the Project Reports node, if it is not already expanded.

3 Click the report node you want to view.

NOTE Project report types are preconfigured and cannot be modified.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Export ReportsYou can export project reports from the Project Manager or the Data Manager.

Export Reports | 537

You can export one or more report types as a single report.

If you export to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, the report contains a separateworksheet for each of the report types you export.

If you export to CSV files, you create a separate CSV file for each report typeyou export.

To export a report




2 In the Data Manager tree view, do one of the following:

■ To export one report, click the report you want to export.

On the toolbar, click Export. Go to step 3.

■ To export multiple reports, click Project Reports.

On the toolbar, click Export. Go to step 4.

3 In the Export To dialog box, do the following:


■ Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported report file.

■ In the Files of Type list, select a file format for the report: XLS (thedefault), XLSX, or CSV.

■ In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file namefor the report.

■ Click Save.

4 In the Export Report Data dialog box, do the following:

Export Reports | 539

■ Under Reports, select one or more report types to include in the report.

■ Under Export File, review the default report name and file path.Optionally, click Browse to specify a new file name or file path forthe report.

NOTE By default, AutoCAD Plant 3D exports reports to the My Documents(Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder.

■ Click Export.

NOTE The Export button only becomes active when you select one ormore report types and have specified an export file.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Import ReportsYou can import a project report from Microsoft® Excel® or comma-separatedvalue (CSV) files.

The file you import must use the same report template as the report into whichyou are importing the report.

Import Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets

You can import a spreadsheet to the Project Reports node or to an individualreport node. If you import a spreadsheet to the Project Reports node, youchoose a worksheet to import. If you import a spreadsheet to an individualreport, the spreadsheet must contain a worksheet that matches the report.

Import CSV Files

If the report type of the imported CSV file does not match the report typeinto which you are importing, the import ignores the content. For example,you select a report type for a Valve List. If you import a CSV file containingan Equipment List, the import ignores the Equipment List report because itdoes not contain valve data.

Whether importing a spreadsheet or a CSV file, you can only import primarytable files back into AutoCAD Plant 3D. For example, a valve list can onlyimport data into the valve table; however, it cannot import cells from joinedtables.

To import a report from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

1 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.

Import Reports | 541

2 In the Project Reports tree view, click the Project Reports node, or clickthe report where you want to import data.


4 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message is displayed, click OK. Otherwise, goto the next step.

NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted andrejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click thelink in the message to open the folder containing the files. After you acceptand reject edits, you can access the log files in that folder.


■ In the Files of Type list, select the type of spreadsheet files to display(XLS or XLSX).

■ Navigate to the location of the spreadsheet you want to import andselect it.

■ Click Open.

6 If you are importing data at the Project Reports level, the Project ReportSelection dialog box is displayed. In the Select Project Report to Importlist, select the report you want to import. Click OK.


NOTE Requested changes are displayed in yellow highlighting.

To import a report from a CSV file




2 In the Data Manager tree view, click the report node where you want toimport data.


4 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message box is displayed, click OK. Otherwise,go to the next step.

NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted andrejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click thelink in the message to open the folder containing the files. After you acceptand reject edits, you can access the log files in that folder.


■ In the Files of Type list, select CSV.

■ Navigate to the location of the CSV file you want to import and selectit.

■ Click Open.

Import Reports | 543

6 If you are importing data at the Project Reports level, the Project ReportsSelection dialog box is displayed. In the Select Project Report to Importlist, select the file that contains the report data you want to import. ClickOK.

To end the current import

■ Do one of the following:

■ In the Data Manager, right-click the active node. Click End CurrentImport.

■ Close the Data Manager.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

DATAMANAGERCLOSE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager


Reconcile Changes To Imported ReportsYou can review the changes to data made to an imported report. You canaccept or reject the requested changes.

View Pending Changes in a Drawing

In a drawing, you can graphically view each Plant 3D object that has pendingchanges before you accept or reject the change. Simply click the row header(the left column) of the Plant 3D object with the pending change in the DataManager.

Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports

From an imported report, modified values and their corresponding row headersare displayed with yellow highlighting. You can accept or reject changesindividually or all at once.

When you accept all changes in the report and you encounter a problem witha pending change, the acceptance process terminates. Reject the problemchange before you continue accepting or rejecting changes either individuallyor all at once.

You cannot accept changes that are from read-only P&ID drawings; you canonly reject them. A tooltip shows the original value of a changed field whenyou place the pointer over the field.

You can switch to Project Data or Drawing Data view during data reconciliationfor an imported report. When you switch back to Project Reports view, pending

Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports | 545

changes are still yellow and you can continue to accept or reject them. Untilyou have reconciled all pending changes, you cannot edit any of the fields inthe report.

To accept or reject changes in an imported report

1 In the Data Manager tree view, select the imported report to view.


■ On the toolbar, click Accept or Reject to accept or reject specific

changes in the selected record.

■ On the toolbar, click Accept All or Reject All to accept or reject allchanges in a selected record.

NOTE If any files cannot be opened for editing, you are notified after allother changes have been made.

To view the original value of a modified field

1 In the Data Manager tree view, select the report to view.

2 In the data table, place the cursor over the modified field to display theoriginal value.


Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager


View Report LogsWhen you accept or reject requested changes in imported reports, log filesstore the changes you accept and reject.

When you accept or reject any changes made to reports, the program generatesthe following log files:

■ ACCEPTED_date.log—a list of accepted changes

■ REJECTED_date.log—a list of rejected changes

The log files are tab-delineated files. Each line of the file displays a change.The changed tag number, ID, and drawing are displayed with the file name,date, and time of the report.

Log files do not overwrite previous log files; however, you can manually erasethem. In AutoCAD Plant 3D, log files are stored in the project directory withthe names ACCEPTED_date.log, and REJECTED_date.log. For example, theaccepted log file appears as follows, modifying the manufacturer and modelfor Valve V1234.

Valve.Manufacturer=GOULD Valve.tagNo = V1234

Valve.GUID=03832qnjfa3 PID1.DWG V51PROJ.xls 6/6/2006

To view a report log

1 Navigate to the root directory of the appropriate project.

View Report Logs | 547

2 In the root directory folder, double-click ACCEPTED_date.log orREJECTED_date.log to view the appropriate log file.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Print ReportsYou can print reports in the Data Manager.

The data for the selected data view prints as a spreadsheet.

To print a report




2 In the Data Manager tree view, click the report you want to print.


3 On the toolbar, click Print.

Quick Reference

Commands

DATAMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Data Manager

Print Reports | 549

550

Generate IsometricDrawings

With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create annotated and dimensioned isometric drawingsbased on your 3D models.

Understand Isometric TypesAutoCAD Plant 3D includes three common isometric types, check, stress, andfinal, from which you can create isometric drawings.

These isometric types differ from each other in the amount of detail includedand in the format in which the information is presented. You can also customizethe three isometric drawing types included with AutoCAD Plant 3D to createother isometric types.

Check Isometrics

You create check isometric drawings to make sure that all necessary componentsare represented in the model. A check isometric also confirms that the modelruns through Isogen without errors when it is time to produce the finaldeliverable. The details in check isometric drawings facilitate comparison withAutoCAD P&ID.

Stress Isometrics

Stress isometrics are drawings that convey geometric data pertinent to stresschecking. Typically, you create these isometrics only for pipelines requiringstress analysis, such as high temperature lines, lines with large pipe sizes, criticalservice lines, and in some cases, high pressure lines.

14

551

You can also create a piping component file (PCF) to run through a stressanalysis application or to create a loose drawing. The stress engineer uses thisdrawing to analyze the stresses and loading on the pipeline.

Final Isometrics

Final isometrics are the key deliverable documents that you create from 3Dpiping models. You typically produce final isometrics during the last stagesof a project. These drawings include a bill of materials (BOM) and become theissued documents of record that are used for fabrication and construction.

Create Isogen Messages and Information ItemsYou can add notes and annotations to your piping model and include themin a generated isometric drawing.

You can create Isogen messages with the option of including enclosures. Youcan also place Isogen information items such as floor symbols, arrows, locationpoints on your drawing. You can edit or delete the contents of the messagesor information items.

Messages and information items are typically created while you engage inother modeling tasks. For more information about creating models, see Createand Modify a Plant 3D Model on page 367.

Create an Isogen MessageYou can create an Isogen message of up to 75 characters in length. You canpreview the message before placing it on the piping model. The message isdisplayed in the generated isometric drawing.

552 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

You have the option of placing messages in the drawing without enclosuresor with the following enclosure options:

■ Round ended box

■ Rectangular box

■ Circular enclosure

■ Triangular enclosure

■ Diamond shaped enclosure

■ Double circle

■ Ellipse

■ B.I.P. identifier

To create an Isogen message

1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Isogen panel ➤ Isogen Message.

2 In the Create Isogen Message dialog box, Enclose Message In drop-downlist, click the message enclosure.

3 Enter the desired message text in the Message box.

4 To draw the dimension to message, select the Draw Dimension to Messagecheck box.

5 Click OK.

6 In the drawing area, click an insertion point on the center line of a pipe.

7 Press ENTER.

Create an Isogen Message | 553

Quick Reference

Commands

No entries

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Create Isogen Message Dialog Box

Create an Isogen Information ItemYou can create Isogen information items such as floor symbols, flow arrows,and break points, and then place them on your 3D model. The informationitem is displayed on the generated isometric drawing.

To create an Isogen information item

1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Isogen panel ➤ Isogen Info.

2 In the Create Isogen Information dialog box, in the Select item type list,click the item type you want to add to the model.

3 Click OK.

4 In the drawing area, click an insertion point on the center line of pipe.

5 Press ENTER.


Quick Reference

Commands

No entries

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Create Isogen Information Dialog Box

Generate a Quick Isometric DrawingA quick isometric is a drawing you create to check lines in your drawings. Youcan create a quick isometric for any isometric type.

You can check all or a few of the lines, either by selecting them from a list orby selecting them in the drawing area. Because quick isometrics are not keptas drawings of record, they do not become project documents accessible inthe project manager.

A designer often generates a quick stress isometric drawing to hand off to thestress engineer.

To generate a quick isometric drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ Quick Iso.


■ In the drawing area, select the objects that you want to include in theQuick Iso.

■ Press L for line list selection. Enter the line numbers you want toinclude in the Quick Iso.

3 Press ENTER.

4 In the Create Quick Iso dialog box, Iso type list, click the iso type youwant to create.

5 To select a different output directory, under Output Directory, click the[...] button and click a folder. click Open.

Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing | 555

6 Do any of the following:

■ To process components in the current drawing only, select the ProcessComponents in Current Drawing Only check box.

■ To create a DWF file, select the Create DWF check box.

■ To stop the isometric creation process when a line fails, select the Ifa Line Fails to Process, Stop Iso Creation check box.

■ To overwrite previously generated isometric files for current isometrictype, click Options. In the Set Quick Iso Options dialog box, selectthe Overwrite Previous Generated Iso Files check box. Click OK.

■ To specify fields that break the isometric, click Options. In the SetQuick Iso Options dialog box, under Break the Iso When the FollowingFields Change, select check boxes for desired fields. Click OK.

7 Click Create.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTQUICKISO

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Set Quick Iso Options Dialog Box

Create Quick Iso Dialog Box

Generate a Production Isometric DrawingYou create a production isometric when you are ready to create the finaldeliverable drawings for all lines in all drawings.

You can create any of the included (check, stress, and final) or customizedisometric drawing types as production isometrics. You have the options ofoverwriting previously generated isometric files and creating a DWF file fromall isometrics created in the process.


To generate a production isometric drawing

1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ Production Iso.

2 In the Select Lines Dialog box, under Display Lines, click entire projector current Drawing.

3 Under Filter Line Numbers, enter the lines numbers you want to filterout of the selection set.

4 Under Select Lines, Create Isos From the Following Lines, select checkboxes that correspond to the lines you want to create the drawing from.

5 In the Create Production Iso dialog box, under Iso Type, click an iso type.

6 Under Output Settings, do any of the following:

■ To overwrite previously generated isometric files for current isometrictype, select the Overwrite Previous Generated Iso Files check box.

■ To create a DWF file, select the Create DWF check box.

■ To stop the isometric creation process when a line fails, select the Ifa Line Fails to Process, Stop Iso Creation check box.

7 Click Create.

Generate a Production Isometric Drawing | 557

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPRODUCTIONISO

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Select Lines Dialog Box

Create Production Iso Dialog Box

Review Isometric Results DetailsAfter you generate an isometric drawing, you review the creation details tocheck for errors and warnings, and to verify the location and number of PipingComponent Files (PCF) created.

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a notification after generation of each isometricdrawing has completed. You can review these results immediately aftergeneration or refer to the log file later.

By default, isometric drawings that are created are processed in the background,so that you can return immediately to your drawing. While a job is beingprocessed in the background, you can check its status by placing the cursorover the isometric icon on the right side of the status bar. You can also viewdetails about all completed isometric jobs that you have generated from thecurrent session.

Isometric details are saved in a log file for future reference. This file is locatedin the Messages directory that corresponds to the iso type created. The log filetakes the default name Isogen Log File, appended with the date of creation.For example: [Project Name]\Isogen\Final\Messages\Isogen LogFile_3-15-2009.log. You can use any any text editor, such as Microsoft Notepad,to view the log file.

To review isometric results details

1 In the status tray, double-click the isometric icon.

2 In the Isometric Details dialog box, view details about completed isometricjobs.


NOTE Only isometric details from the current session are accessible by clickingthe status tray icon. To view details from a prior session, review the isometric logfile.

To review an isometric log file

1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the Messages directory that correspondsto the iso type (check, stress, or final) used to created the isometricdrawing.

2 In the Windows Explorer selection box, right-click the log file and clickOpen.

Quick Reference

Commands

No entries

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Isometric Details Dialog Box

Export a Piping Component File (PCF)When you generate an isometric drawing, a Piping Component File (PCF) isautomatically created behind the scenes. You do not have to create one.

If you are not generating an Isometric drawing, you can still export a PCF ifyou need one for the stress engineer or pipe fabricator.

The line number is the default file name for the exported PCF.

To export a PCF

1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ PCF Export.

2 Right-click the line number you want to export. Click Export to PCF.

3 In the Save PCF As dialog box, do the following:

■ Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported PCF.

Export a Piping Component File (PCF) | 559

■ In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file namefor the file.

4 Click Save.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTPCFEXPORT

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries


Generate OrthographicDrawings

You can create orthographic drawings that show exact 2D representations of a 3D model.

Overview: Generate Orthographic DrawingsYou can select Plant 3D models and create custom orthographic views to placein an AutoCAD 2D drawing.

Orthographic drawings are AutoCAD DWG files. An orthographic drawing cancontain multiple orthographic views with data extracted from Plant 3D drawings.Orthographic drawings display two-dimensional views of piping, valves,equipment, and structural steel in Plant 3D models.

In an orthographic drawing, you can create multiple orthographic views fromone or more Plant 3D models.

You can copy orthographic drawings into a project or link to orthographicdrawings outside of a project.

15

561

You can set up a customized template for your orthographic drawings with atitle block, or you can use the default template. For more information aboutcreating templates, see “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing” in theAutoCAD Help system.

Understand Drawing References (Xrefs) and Overlaid Xrefs

Drawings that contain references to other drawings are available fororthographic drawings. However, referenced drawings that are overlaid arenot available. For more information about overlaid drawings, see “Nest andOverlay Referenced Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help system.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTORTHOCREATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Select Reference Models Dialog Box

Select Orthographic View Dialog Box

Create an Orthographic DrawingYou can create orthographic drawings from one or more Plant 3D models.

When you create orthographic views, you create individual AutoCAD 2Dviewports based on specified views of a Plant 3D model. Then, you can addthem to an orthographic drawing.

A process overview for creating orthographic drawings is as follows (see theprocedure tab for detailed instructions):

■ Create or open a drawing in the orthographic paper space.

■ Select the Plant 3D model or models on which to base the orthographicdrawing.

■ Specify an area in the model to be displayed in the orthographic drawing.

562 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

■ Set the scale and orthographic view.

■ Place the generated view on the orthographic drawing.

■ Create and place additional views in the orthographic drawing.

■ Annotate and add dimensions to Plant objects in the orthographic drawing.

Create an Orthographic View

Once you have specified the model to use, a temporary drawing containingthe model and the Orthocube is displayed.

You use the OrthoCube, a semi-transparent 3D box, to define the boundariesof the orthographic view. The OrthoCube is the only editable object in thetemporary drawing.

You can use grips on the OrthoCube to adjust the dimensions and placementof the OrthoCube. You can also specify the geometric dimensions of theOrthoCube using the Properties palette. For more information about usinggrips to modify 3D cubes, see “Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces” inthe AutoCAD Help system.

After you specify the placement and dimensions of the OrthoCube, you selecta standard orthographic view to create, and specify the scale. You can selectan orthographic view based on any of six sides of the OrthoCube. The standardorthographic views are Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, and Back.

You can save an orthographic view and load it in any Plant 3D model togenerate views of a consistent size.

Save an Orthographic View

When you have completed configuring the orthographic view, you place theview onto your orthographic drawing. The views you save are project-specific

Create an Orthographic Drawing | 563

and stored in a filed named ortho.dcf. You can copy this file and reuse it inother projects.

To create an orthographic drawing

1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab.

2 In the tree view, expand the project node and click the OrthographicDrawings folder.

3 On the Orthos toolbar, click New Ortho DWG.

4 In the New DWG dialog box, under Drawing Properties, do the following:

■ In the DWG Number box, enter a number for the drawing.

■ In the Author box, enter a name for the author.

■ In the DWG Title box, enter a title for the drawing.

■ In the File Name box, enter a name for the ortho drawing.

■ Click OK.

5 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ New View.

6 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, selectone or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing.Click OK.

NOTE Attached DWG references (xrefs), if any, are included in the temporarydrawing along with the models you select. However, overlaid xrefs are notincluded.


7 If necessary, move the Select Orthographic View dialog box aside so youcan view the temporary drawing. Do the following:

■ (Optional) In the drawing, click the OrthoCube. Drag the size gripson the edges of the OrthoCube to specify the boundaries andplacement of your view.

■ In the Orthographic View list, click a view (for example: Front).

■ (Optional) In the drawing, make further adjustments with theOrthoCube as needed.


NOTE By default, the temporary drawing that is displayed is set to zoom inon all elements currently in the drawing. The ViewCube is set to Top viewusing WCS (world coordinate system).

8 Again in the Select Orthographic View dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Scale list, click a scale (for example: 1:16). If the scale you wantis not in this list, enter a scale at the command prompt when youplace the ortho drawing.

■ (Optional) Click Save to save the view. In the Save View dialog box,enter a name for the orthographic view. Click OK.

■ Click OK.


9 In the orthographic drawing paper space, specify the position of thelower-left corner of the viewport.

NOTE At the Command prompt, you can specify the scale of the viewportbefore placing the viewport in the drawing. You can also specify the exactcoordinates for the drawing.

You can now annotate your orthographic drawing. For more informationabout annotations, see Annotate an Orthographic Drawing on page 569.

To load a saved orthographic view


2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the OrthographicDrawings folder. Double-click an orthographic drawing.


4 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, clickone or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing.Click OK.

5 In Select Orthographic View dialog box, click Load.

6 In the Load View dialog box, under View List, click the name of the viewyou want to load. Click OK.

To rename a saved orthographic view




4 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, clickone or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing.Click OK.

5 In Select Orthographic View dialog box, click Load.

6 In the Load View dialog box, under View List, double-click the name ofthe orthographic view you want to rename. Type the new name and clickOK.


NOTE You can also rename an orthographic view in the Save View dialogbox.

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTORTHOCREATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Select Reference Models Dialog Box

Select Orthographic View Dialog Box

Link or Copy Orthographic Drawings to a ProjectUsing the Project Manager, you can either link or copy drawings to the project.

When you link a file to a project, the file is externally referenced from theproject. Any changes you make to the file are saved in the referenced file, andno copy is stored in the project.

When you copy a file to a project, any changes you make to the file are savedin the project. The original file is not modified or referenced after you makea copy.

Linking is faster than copying, but either method can be used to add drawingsto a project. Select the method that best serves your project requirements.

To link an orthographic drawing to the current project


2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the OrthographicDrawings folder.

3 On the Orthos toolbar, click Link To Ortho DWG.


4 In the Select Drawings To Link To Project dialog box, locate and click thedrawing file you want to link to the current project. Click Open.

To copy an orthographic drawing to the current project


2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the OrthographicDrawings folder.

3 On the Orthos toolbar, click Copy Ortho DWG To Project.

4 In the Select Drawings To Copy To Project dialog box, locate and clickthe drawing file you want to copy to the current project. Click Open.

Quick Reference

Commands

PROJECTMANAGER

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

Project Manager

Annotate an Orthographic DrawingYou can select a Plant object in an orthographic drawing to annotate.

In an orthographic drawing, you can annotate valves, equipment, andcomponents as you can in any AutoCAD drawing. The annotation is basedon the AutoCAD default text style. For information about adjusting the styleof annotation text, see “Work with Annotative Styles” in the AutoCAD Helpsystem.

Annotate an Orthographic Drawing | 569

To add an annotation to an orthographic drawing



3 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-clickthe viewport that contains the component you want to annotate.

4 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ Plant Annotate.

5 In the drawing, click a component to annotate.

6 In the Specify Annotation Style list, click a value to specify the annotationtag style.

7 Use the cursor to move the annotation in the drawing. Click to set theannotation.

NOTE Polar Tracking restricts cursor movement to specified angles. To placeannotations at any angle from the component, click Polar Tracking on the

application status bar to free cursor movement.


Shortcut menu: Right-click an object in an orthographic drawing and clickAnnotate.

Command entry: PLANTORTHOANNOTATE

To move an annotation in an orthographic drawing

1 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-clickthe viewport that contains the Plant object annotation you want to move.

2 Click the annotation.

3 Drag the annotation to any location on the drawing using the move grip.

Annotate an Orthographic Drawing | 571

Quick Reference

Commands

PLANTORTHOANNOTATE

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Add Dimensions to an Orthographic DrawingYou can add dimensions to a selected Plant object in an orthographic drawing.

In an orthographic drawing, you can add dimensions in the orthographicviewports as you can in any AutoCAD drawing. For more information aboutadding dimensions in drawings, see “Create Dimensions” in the AutoCADHelp system.

To add a dimension to an orthographic drawing




3 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-clickthe viewport that contains the component to which you want to add adimension.

4 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension.

5 In the drawing, specify the first and second extension line origins or pressENTER to select an object to dimension.

6 Use the cursor to move the dimension line in the drawing. Click to setthe dimension line.

Shortcut menu: Right-click an object in an orthographic drawing and clickAnnotate.

Quick Reference

Commands

See “Create Dimensions” in the AutoCAD Help system.

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference

No entries

Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing | 573

574

Migrate Projects andDrawings

Migrate projects and drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID to ensure dataintegrity with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Overview: Migrate Projects and DrawingsWhen you open a project or drawing created in an earlier version of AutoCADP&ID, the project and drawing migration process starts automatically. AutoCADPlant 3D 2010 starts the Project Migration or Drawing Migration wizard whenit detects that a project or drawing requires migration.

During migration, the program updates project or drawing-level data. Forexample, it changes point parameter names to support end-coded valves, oradds To/From properties for pipe line segments.

Migration can be time-intensive, depending on how large a project is or howmany drawings are associated with the project. Once the migration is complete,you can work on the project and its drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

NOTE You can migrate files created with AutoCAD P&ID 2008 and AutoCAD P&ID2009 only. Migrate projects and drawings created in AutoCAD P&ID 2008 first toAutoCAD P&ID 2009 before migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D does not migrate user profiles, including custom toolpalette settings. Instead, you can save the user profile from an earlier version ofAutoCAD P&ID and import it to AutoCAD Plant 3D. For more information, see “Save& Restore Interface Settings” in the AutoCAD Help system.

16

575

Verify Projects and DrawingsBefore you open AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 to start migrating a project ordrawing, verify that the project and its related drawings are not in use.

You can migrate only those projects and drawings that are not already locked.If a project or drawing is in use or if files are missing, the File Unavailable pageis displayed and lists the invalid files. Once you begin migration, otherdesigners cannot open the project or its associated drawings for editing untilmigration is complete.

Use the version of the product that created the project or drawing to verifythat it is not in use. For example, if you used AutoCAD P&ID 2009 to createthe project you plan to migrate, open the project with that version.

After you open the project in AutoCAD P&ID 2009, you can view the ProjectManager to see if any of the related drawings are in use. If someone is editinga drawing that is part of the project, the Locked Drawing icon is displayed inthe Project Manager. Save and close the drawing. Once you close all drawings,make sure to close the entire project before exiting AutoCAD P&ID 2009.

Now you can safely proceed with migration.

Migrate ProjectsMigrate projects created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID before openingthem with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

When you open a project created in an earlier version of AutoCAD P&ID, theProject Migration wizard starts. It displays the Project Migration Launch dialogbox. During the migration process, you can back up the project and associateddrawings. A backup ensures that the project still opens in the earlier versionof AutoCAD P&ID. If you cancel the migration process, the project and itsrelated files return to their original state.

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 makes the following changes when migrating aproject from AutoCAD P&ID 2009.

DescriptionProject-level changes

Updates the project version number from2009 to 2010

Project version number

576 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

When migrating a project from 2008 to 2009, the following changes are made.


Updates the project version number from2008 to 2009.

Project version number

Adds Property Acquisition rules and trig-gers to the AutoCAD P&ID 2009 pro-

Integrate Property Acquisition data

ject.xml file and renames the file as PnID-Part.xml.

Creates a new project.xml file based on theproject.xml template in the install direct-

New project.xml file

ory. The templates are crucial to the migra-tion process.

Makes the following changes to the Process-Power.dcf file:

Update of the ProcessPower.dcf file

■ Changes the underlying database en-gine to SQLite.

■ Adds new tables and columns to thedatabase to support AutoCAD Plant3D 2010 features such as AcquisitionProperties.

■ Assigns a tag property to thePipeLineGroup. The default value isLine Number.

Replaces the ProcessPower.xsd and Process-Power.xml files with ProcessPower.dcfx.

Replacement of ProcessPower.xsd and Pro-cessPower.xml

Scans all block definitions that have Attach-mentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 in the

Update to the projSymbolStyles.dwg andeach drawing associated with a project.

right to left (negative x-axis) direction orin the up to down (negative y-axis) direc-tion. Swaps the attachment points, ifpresent, so they are in the positive x or y-axis direction.This change in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 isimportant because AttachmentPoint1 rep-resents the inlet and AttachmentPoint2

Migrate Projects | 577


represents the outlet of blocks when attach-ing and aligning them with schematiclines.

Adds the PnIDMigration.xml file. Use thisfile to replace AutoCAD P&ID 2009 blocks

Addition of the PnIDMigration.xml file

with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 blocksmanually. Enter the block names that youwant to replace.

Understand Conversion to Acquisition Properties

When you take the interim step to migrate a project from AutoCAD P&ID2008 to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 before migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010,the program converts some properties to acquisition properties.

In the following table, the Acquisition Property column shows the propertiesthat the migration process converts to acquisition properties. The SourceProperty column displays the properties from which each acquisition propertyacquires its value when the acquisition property is in Acquire mode.


PipeLines.SizeHandValves.Size

PipeLines.SpecHandValves.Spec

PipeLines.SizeInLineInstruments.Size

PipeLines.SizePipingSpecialtyItems.Size

PipeLines.SpecPipingSpecialtyItems.Spec

PipeLines.SizePipingFittings.Size

PipeLines.SpecPipingFittings.Spec

If a migrated property value from a project is equal to the corresponding sourceproperty value, the property converts to an acquisition property in Acquiremode. If the migrated property value is not equal to the corresponding sourceproperty value, the property converts to an acquisition property in Overridemode.


NOTE To detect migration errors after you migrate a project, you can validatethe project drawings. In the Project Manager, right-click a migrated drawing andclick Validate.

To migrate a project

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.

2 In the Project Manager, in the drop-down list, click Open.

3 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the projectyou want to migrate.

4 Click the project.xml file. Click Open.

The Project Migration wizard starts.

5 Verify that the project and its related drawing files are closed. On theProject Migration Launch page, click Next.

6 If the File Unavailable page is displayed, your project has files that are

missing or currently in use . Find and close all project files. Onthe File Unavailable page, click Exit and repeat steps 1-5.


7 To back up the files, on the File Available page, select Backup These FilesBefore Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected. To addother files to the backup, click Add Files For Backup, find and select thefiles you want to add, and click Open. (To remove an added file, clickRemove.)

NOTE It is recommended that you back up your files in case they requirefurther work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009.

8 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup files.

9 Click Next. The Project Migration Backup page shows the progress of thebackup and indicates whether it successfully backs up each file.


10 Click Migrate. The Project Migration Progress page indicates the progressof the migration.


11 Click Finish. The project opens in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Migrate DrawingsMigrate drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID before addingthem to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 projects.

When you attempt to add an AutoCAD P&ID 2009 drawing to a project youcreated with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, the Drawing Migration wizard starts.Migration occurs only for the drawing you are adding to the project. You cancreate a backup during migration in case the drawing requires further editingin AutoCAD P&ID 2009. If you cancel the drawing migration process, thedrawing returns to its original state.

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 makes the following changes occur when migratinga project from AutoCAD P&ID 2009.

DescriptionDrawing-level changes

Updates the drawing version number from2009 to 2010.

Drawing version number

The following changes occur when migrating a project from AutoCAD P&ID2008 to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 in preparation for migrating to AutoCAD Plant3D 2010.


Updates the drawing version number from2008 to 2009.

Drawing version number

Applies property acquisition to valves andother inline instruments so that they adopt

Update to inline instrument properties

the properties of the schematic line withwhich they are associated.The properties of inline components areoverridden in favor of the schematic lineproperties.

Scans all block definitions that have Attach-mentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 in the

Update to AttachmentPoint1 and Attach-mentPoint2 of all blocks in the drawing

right to left (negative x-axis) direction orin the up to down (negative y-axis) direc-tion. If present, the attachment points are



exchanged so that they are in the positivex or y-axis direction.This change in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 isimportant because AttachmentPoint1 rep-resents the inlet and AttachmentPoint2represents the outlet of blocks when attach-ing and aligning them with schematiclines.

The migration process can change the way drawings look in AutoCAD Plant3D. Part of the migration process updates the drawing with the symbols andsettings of the new project. The drawing may appear different due to changesin AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 symbols and settings.

NOTE If you try to migrate a drawing that has the same file name as a drawingin the current project, a naming conflict message is displayed. You can eithermigrate the drawing with an assigned new name or stop migration.

NOTE To detect migration errors after you migrate a project, you can validatethe project drawings. In the Project Manager, right-click a migrated drawing andclick Validate.

To migrate a drawing by linking it to the current project

1 If the Project Manager is not already displayed, on the ribbon, click Hometab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.

2 In the Project manager, in the toolbar, click Link to Drawing.

3 In the Select Drawings to Link to Project dialog box, navigate to the folderthat contains the drawing you want to migrate.

4 Click the drawing file. Click Open.

The Drawing Migration wizard starts.

Migrate Drawings | 583

5 Verify that the drawing file is closed.

6 On the Drawing Migration Launch page, select Backup the Drawing BeforeMigration (Recommended), if it is not already selected.

NOTE It is recommended that you back up your drawing in case it requiresfurther work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009.

7 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup file.

8 Click Migrate. The Drawing Migration Progress page indicates the progressof the migration.


9 Click Finish. The drawing opens in your AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 project.

To migrate a drawing by copying it to the current project

1 If the Project Manager is not already displayed, on the ribbon, click Hometab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.

2 In the Project manager, in the toolbar, click Copy Drawing to Project.

3 In the Select Drawings to Copy to Project dialog box, navigate to thefolder that contains the drawing you want to migrate.

4 Click the drawing file. Click Open.

The Drawing Migration wizard starts.

Migrate Drawings | 585

5 Verify that the drawing file is closed.

6 On the Drawing Migration Launch page, select Backup the Drawing BeforeMigration (Recommended), if it is not already selected.

NOTE It is recommended that you back up your drawing in case it requiresfurther work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009.

7 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup file.

8 Click Migrate. The Drawing Migration Progress page indicates the progressof the migration.


9 Click Finish. The drawing opens in your AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 project.

Resolve Migration FailureProject and drawing migration failure can occur for several reasons.

The following table contains some common migration failure scenarios andtheir resolutions.

ResolutionFailure scenario

If a designer is editing a drawing that ispart of the project you want to migrate,

Files are in use

AutoCAD Plant 3D cannot place a lock onthat file. The File Unavailable dialog boxlists files in use with the following status

symbol: Resolve this situation by making sure thatno one is editing the drawing. Restart themigration process to lock the offending fileso migration can proceed.

Resolve Migration Failure | 587


If a file residing in your project folder is re-named or moved to another folder, the

Missing files

Migration wizard is unable to lock it. Thefile is no longer associated with the projectand the migration fails.Missing files are displayed in the File Un-available dialog box.The File Unavailable dialog box lists filesthat are missing with the following status

symbol: Resolve this problem by renaming a mis-named file with its original name or byadding a drawing with the new name backto the project in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. Ifthe File Unavailable dialog box lists missingfiles, find and move them back to the pro-ject folder.

You cannot directly migrate projects anddrawings created in AutoCAD P&ID 2008to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Migrating an AutoCAD Plant 3D 2008project or drawing

Resolve this problem by migrating theproject or drawing first to AutoCAD P&ID2009. When that migration is complete,save the project or drawing and migrate itto AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is available in 32-bit and 64-bit versions. AutoCAD P&ID

Platform incompatibility

2009 was available in both 32-bit and 64-bit versions, but cross migration does notwork. Direct file migration from AutoCADP&ID 2008 can only be achieved between32-bit versions. AutoCAD P&ID 2008 wasonly available in a 32-bit version.You cannot migrate an AutoCAD P&ID2008 project or drawing to a 64-bit install-ation of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.Resolve this problem by first migrating theAutoCAD P&ID 2008 project or drawing



to the 32-bit version of AutoCAD Plant 3D2010. After you save the file, you can editthe project or drawing in either platformversion of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.

Resolve Migration Failure | 589

590

Validate P&ID Drawings

Make sure that your project drawing complies with company standards by validating yourdrawing regularly.

Overview: Validate P&ID DrawingsValidate your drawing and complete the Validation Summary to correct or flagdetected errors.

Running the validation process for your P&ID project ensures that projectdrawings comply with industry or company standards. Use the validation toolin AutoCAD P&ID to detect errors as you work rather than waiting until late ina project cycle, when mistakes are more costly and difficult to resolve.

For each project, you specify the types of errors that are flagged when you runa validation. After running a validation, you can correct or ignore the detectederrors.

NOTE For information about validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing, seeValidate the 3D Model on page 359.

Validate Project DrawingsYou can run validations for an individual drawing, several drawings, or allproject drawings at any stage of a project.

Understand the Drawing Validation Process

The validation process is as follows:

■ You run validations for individual drawings or for an entire project.

17

591

■ In the Validation Summary window, you click each error to zoom in todrawing the area you need to check. The description at the bottom of thewindow helps to identify the problem.

Understand Validation Settings

You can configure validation settings to check for potential errors. For example,you can check for the following conditions in a drawing or project:

■ Size mismatches

■ Spec mismatches

■ Non-terminating lines

■ Unconnected components

■ Flow direction conflicts

■ Orphaned annotations

■ Unresolved off-page connectors

■ The presence of base AutoCAD objects, which can be misinterpreted asP&ID objects in plotted output

Before changing these settings, ask your system administrator what thestandards are for your company.

To specify error types to flag

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate Config.

2 In the P&ID Validation Settings dialog box, in the Error Reporting tree,expand the P&ID objects and Base AutoCAD objects nodes. Select thecheck boxes for the error types to be flagged during project validation.

3 Click OK.

Command entry: VALIDATECONFIG

To validate project drawings


■ To validate a specific drawing or all the drawings in a specific folder,in the tree view, click the drawing or the drawing folder. On theribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate.

592 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

■ To validate all the drawings in a project folder, in the tree view, clickthe project folder. On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate.

The Validation Progress dialog box is displayed.

NOTE The Validation Progress dialog box displays the validation progressfor each drawing being checked for errors and overall progress for all thedrawings being validated in the current session (n of n format).

2 When the Validation Progress dialog box closes, do one of the following:

■ If none of the drawings have validation errors, the ValidationComplete message is displayed. Click OK.

The drawings are validated and the validation process is complete.

■ If there are errors in one or more drawings, the Validation SummaryWindow is displayed. The validated drawings are displayed in the treeview. In the Validation Summary window, the Details pane displaysthe following information about the validation:

■ Number of errors identified

■ Number of errors ignored

■ Total number of errors

Go to the next step.

3 To see information about each error, in the Validation Summary tree,click an error node. The drawing zooms in on the problem object. TheDetails pane displays the following information about the error:

■ Error type

■ Error action

NOTE For some errors, the Details pane displays additional error-specificinformation. For information about the Details pane, see Validation SummaryWindow.

Command entry: VALIDATE

For information about correcting specific types of errors, see Correct ValidationErrors on page 594.

Validate Project Drawings | 593

Quick Reference

Commands

VALIDATE

VALIDATECONFIG

VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference



Correct Validation ErrorsAddress the errors that are identified during the validation process.

After you validate the drawings in a project, the Validation Summary windowis displayed, with a list of flagged errors. Errors are identified by the following

symbol:

To zoom in to specific errors, click the name of the error. The Details areadisplays information about the error and its status.

You can ignore the error or fix it manually. Errors flagged as Ignored can behidden by changing the setting in the Validation Summary window.


NOTE For information about validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing, seeValidate the 3D Model on page 359.

Error Validation Reference

When you validate a drawing or project, you can flag and correct the followingerrors.

Base AutoCAD Object

Example:

An AutoCAD object or block (instead of an AutoCAD P&ID compon-ent) has been inserted in the drawing. Such blocks do not show up

Description:

in reports or in the Data Manager, even though they may look likea P&ID component.

To Correct: ■ Erase the object.



Size Mismatch

Example:

The size of a line and its associated component do not match. Thiscondition is usually caused by manual changes to the componentproperties.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Manually fix Size Mismatch errors. You must change the size ofeither the line or its associated component at the connectionpoint so that they match.


Spec Mismatch

Example:

The specification properties (details such as the component material)for lines and inline components do not match. This condition isusually caused by manual changes to the properties.

Description:


To Correct: ■ Manually fix Spec Mismatch errors. To correct the problem,change the specification property of either the line or its associ-ated component so that they match.


Non-terminating Line

Example:

Process lines do not terminate through a connection to an endlinecomponent, or do not end with an endline symbol signifying an airvent, water outline, drain, or other valid terminator.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Create a connection with another line or component.



Unconnected Component

Example:

No true connection exists for lines and their associated components,even though they appear to be connected. This error may result if

Description:

a proper connection was never established, or if a component wasdragged away from a line.

To Correct: ■ Create a connection with another line or component.Specific rules apply to the following components:

■ Equipment: All attachment points on must be connectedto a schematic line.

■ General instruments: At least one signal line must be con-nected to a general instrument.

■ Inline instruments and control valves: These componentsmust be placed on a pipe line.

■ Tanks and vessels: Tanks or vessels must be connected toat least one pipe line. Tanks and vessels that have a place-ment point must be connected to a pipe line at the place-ment point.

For information about components, see Add Compon-ents to a P&ID Drawing on page 302.



Flow Direction Conflict

Example:

The flow direction is incorrect for a line or component.Description:

To Correct: ■ Update the flow direction.


Orphaned Annotation

Example:

An annotation tag has been moved away from the component withwhich it is associated.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Drag the annotation to within the acceptable distance, or toler-ance, of its associated object or enter new coordinates.



Unresolved Off-page Connectors

Example:

Off-page connectors used to connect the current drawing with an-other drawing do not specify a valid project location.

Description:

To Correct: ■ Specify a valid connector in another drawing.


To correct Base AutoCAD Object errors

1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described inValidate Project Drawings on page 591.

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Base AutoCAD Objects tree,click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To convert the Base AutoCAD object to a P&ID component, in thedrawing, right-click the object to be converted. Click Convert to P&IDObject. In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, select a component.Click OK. If prompted, in the drawing, specify an insertion base point.

■ To erase the object, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the errornode. Click Erase.

■ To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the errornode. Click Ignore. The error is moved to the Errors Marked as Ignoredfolder in the Validation Errors tree.


NOTE To change the status of an ignored error, in the Errors Marked asIgnored folder, right-click the error node. Click <Unassigned>.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree,right-click the Base AutoCAD Object folder. Click Refresh.

To correct Size Mismatch errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Size Mismatch error tree, clickthe error node. Do one of the following:

■ To manually fix size-mismatch errors, in the drawing, change the sizeof the mismatched component or the size of the line or linesconnected to the component to match the other.

■ To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the errornode. Click Ignore.

3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree,right-click the Size Mismatches folder. Click Refresh.

To correct Spec Mismatch errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Spec Mismatch error tree,click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To manually fix Spec Mismatch errors, in the drawing, change thesize of the mismatched component or the spec of the line or linesconnected to the component to match the other.




To correct Non-terminating Line errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Non-terminating Line errortree, click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To manually create a connection, re-create or move the endpoint ofthe line so that a connection is established.


3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree,right-click the Non-terminating Line folder. Click Refresh.

To correct Unconnected Component errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Unconnected Componenterror tree, click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To manually create a connection, attach the component to a line atall available attachment points on the component. If the unconnectedcomponent has no attachment points, at least one line must beconnected to it.



To correct Flow Direction Conflict errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Flow Direction Conflict errortree, click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To update the flow in the drawing area, correct the flow direction ofthe line originating or ending at that point.




To correct Orphaned Annotation errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Orphaned Annotations errortree, click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To move the annotation closer to its related component, in thedrawing, drag the annotation or enter coordinates.


3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree,right-click the Orphaned Annotations folder. Click Refresh.

To correct Unresolved Off-Page Connector errors


2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Unresolved Off-pageConnectors error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following:

■ To specify a connector in another drawing, in the drawing area,right-click the connector. Click Off-Page Connector ➤ Connect. TheCreate Connection dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, specifythe information required to resolve the error.


3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree,right-click the Unresolved Off-Page Connectors folder. Click Refresh.

To display or hide ignored error flags

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate Summary.


2 In the Validation Summary window, select the check box for Don’tDisplay Errors Marked as Ignored.

Quick Reference

Commands

VALIDATE

VALIDATESUMMARY

System Variables

No entries

Interface Reference



Glossary

Acquire mode The mode in which a property acquires its value from anothersource (properties for a project, drawing, or class).

See also Override mode and Initialization only.

Acquisition A property type that acquires its value from another source suchas project properties, drawing properties, or class properties.

Annotation An AutoCAD object comprised of text and (optional) shapes. InAutoCAD Plant 3D, annotations are used to display data values of P&IDcomponents (including equipment, valves, lines, and so on). These values aredisplayed as text.

Assembly A group of connected components that are commonly placed in adrawing at the same time. For example, a level gauge assembly might containan instrument and five valves. You can place an assembly from a tool paletteinstead of selecting each component individually.

Assumed nozzle A type of nozzle that is automatically added as a record inthe Data Manager when a pipe line is connected to a piece of equipment.Unlike other nozzle types, an assumed nozzle is not visible in the drawing.

Automatic annotation A type of annotation that gets automatically insertedwhen a component is created. See also Annotation and Linked Annotation.

Bill of materials (BOM) List of components needed to fabricate a pipeline.

Child table See Object table.

Class A specific type of a class, as opposed to a class family. For example,Centrifugal Pump is a class from the Pumps class family.

Class family A class that is used to categorize other classes and set a startingpoint for class properties, tags, and annotations for those classes. For example,Pumps and Equipment are class families; Centrifugal Pump and Ball Valve areclasses.

Glossary | 605

Class property A property of a class; it reflects a data value. For example, theHandValve class type may have attributes of size, spec, and manufacturer. ThePumps class type may have flow, TDH, and manufacturer.

Component A native AutoCAD Plant 3D object type. AutoCAD Plant 3Dcomponents include Equipment, Nozzles, Lines, Instruments, and Inlinecomponents.

Component class See Class.

Connection symbol The graphical element in a drawing that indicates anoff-page or on-page line connection. You can choose from several symbols.

Convert To change an AutoCAD object to an AutoCAD Plant 3D componentor line; the converted item is included in data reports.

Converted support A pipe support that was created by converting one ormore AutoCAD objects.

Data Manager An enhanced secondary window in AutoCAD Plant 3D; itdisplays data in a table.

DWF (P&ID) A Design Web Format file; it is a compressed file format createdfrom DWG files in a project. DWF files are easy to publish and view on theWeb.

Equipment InfoTag An annotation style. A multiline set of attributes thatdisplays selected data values for a placed piece of equipment. One EquipmentInfoTag for each equipment component is typically placed at the top of adrawing or in a grid across the bottom of the drawing.

Family table A table that contains information about different classes withina class family. For example, the Equipment family table contains informationabout pumps, tanks, blowers and other classes found under the Equipmentclass family.

Flag A symbol, like an arrow, that indicates the direction of the flow. The flagsymbol contains the line number annotation. It is on the Non-engineeringtab of the P&ID DIN tool palette.

Flip grip A grip that flips an object in the direction shown in the grip arrow.

Flow arrow The direction in which a schematic line flows. You can controlthe direction of the flow arrow using dynamic grips.

Freestanding annotation Text that is associated with a component; it doesnot move when the component moves. However, the data associated with

606 | Glossary

the annotation updates with the component. Just the text gets disconnected.Annotations are either freestanding or linked. See also Linked Annotation.

Gap crossing A visual indication on a drawing that a line breaks on eitherside of a crossing.

Initialization only A property setting that limits property acquisition to aone-time event, when a component is first initialized. If the property is set toinitialization only, it acquires its value from its designated source and changesimmediately to override mode.

See also Acquisition and Override mode.

Inline component A component with an alignment grip that can be droppedonto a line.

Instrument A device or combination of devices used directly or indirectly tomeasure, display, or control a variable.

Isometrics Stylized drawings of parts of a model which convey the informationrequired to build this model section.

KKS (Kraftwerk-Kennzeichensystem) A power plant classification systemmanaged and developed by VGP Working Panel. KKS is usually used with theDIN 2481 standard.

Line designation table (LDT) List of pipe lines and their properties.

Linked annotation Graphic, text, or text with a graphic that labels acomponent. The text values reflect the data attribute values of a component.Examples of linked annotations are a line ID, a valve size, instrument functionsymbol, or Equipment InfoTag. Linked annotation moves when the componentmoves.

Loop crossing A visual indication on a drawing that a line loops over anotherline.

Object table A table that contains specific information about a class or aproperty of a class. For example, Pumps is an object table of the Equipmentfamily table.

Off-page connector The graphical representation on a P&ID drawing of thecontinuance of a line from one project drawing to another.

OrthoCube A semi-transparent green 3D solid box that you use to define theboundaries of an orthographic view.

Orthogonal connection The default AutoCAD Plant 3D schematic linebehavior of connecting at 90-degree increments.

Glossary | 607

Override mode A mode in which an acquired property can be modified. Aproperty that is set up to acquire its value from another source is switchedfrom acquiring mode to override mode in the Properties palette or in the DataManager. See also Acquiring mode.

Pins Symbols that identify a change in a pipe line property. In the KKS taggingstandard, pins identify a change in properties (for example, Unit Number orSystem Code). A pin is either open (no-fill) or closed (black fill). Open pinsmark the boundaries of a group with a common property. Closed pins identifya break in piping sub-systems or branches in a pipe line. When using eitheropen or closed pins, drafters must manually change the properties of the linesbeyond the open-pin boundary. Pins are located on the Non-engineering tabof the DIN tool palette.

Pipe A tube or hollow cylinder for the conveyance of fluid.

Pipe support A manufactured component that connects a pipe to a structure.

Schematic line A line in AutoCAD Plant 3D that represents pipe lines andsignal lines.

Spool The section of model represented by an isometric. Typically includesstarting & ending at points that are normal breakpoints when constructingthe line.

Tag A property that uniquely identifies a component.

Trim As a verb, to add hardware to a piece of equipment. As a noun, additionalinformation. A pipe trim is additional information (text or graphics) to furtherdefine a piping segment. Equipment trim is additional information (text orgraphics) to further define a piece of equipment.

Validate To check a drawing or a project for errors and inconsistencies suchas unconnected components, non-terminating lines, and so on.

608 | Glossary

Index

A

acquire mode 605acquisition 605actuators

adding to P&ID drawings 314adding

data to equipment 369drawing files to projects 300drawing status notes 258drawings to folders 248equipment to drawings 302existing drawing to projects 244fittings 467instruments to P&ID drawings 306lines to drawings 322new drawing to projects 245nozzles to drawings 305pipe 445pipe supports 486read-only drawing to projects 244valves 471work history to drawings 259

alignmentpipe 447

anchoring windows 293annotating

components 300lines 300

annotationorthographic drawings 569

annotations 605automatic 605setting up for ortho drawings 231setting up for P&ID 131

application menu 290arrows, behavior on lines 82assemblies 605

creating and using 320assigning

tags 335, 339

tags, elevation, and descriptions toequipment 369, 375

assigning tagabout 293

assumed nozzles 605attaching

graphics to equipment 389attachment points 69audit

projects 271auto-hide for windows 293AutoCAD

exporting P&ID drawings to 344AutoCAD objects

converting to AutoCAD P&IDcomponents 342

AutoCAD P&IDabout 1Help system 1

AutoCAD Plant 3Dabout 1

automatic numbering ofcomponents 249, 251

B

bill of materials 605

C

changing lengthstructural members 403

child table. See object table 605class definitions

modifying and creating 57specifying attributes and properties

for Plant 3D 193client information, changing for

projects 11Clipboard (Windows)

copying pipe 482

609 | Index

component classes 606component classes. See object

definition 606components 606

about 302annotating 300attachment points 69automatic numbering 249converting AutoCAD objects to 342editing the block geometry of 319placing 300scaling 69setting automatic numbering 251tagging 300, 335, 339understanding 297

compress projects 271configuring

drawing behavior settings inP&ID 32

drawing behavior settings in Plant3D 140

drawing properties 17end connections in P&ID 33reports 20symbols 68the drawing and modeling

environment 7configuring P&ID

validation settings 592connected pipe 467connection grips 327connection symbols 606connectors, configuring 179context menus. See shortcut menuscontinuation grips 327control valves

adding to a P&ID drawing 306conversion 606converted support 606converting

equipment from 3D objects 383copying

equipment 389pipe 482

creatingequipment 369

equipment by stacking shapes 375equipment from 3D objects 383equipment from patterns 369footings 425grids 395Isogen information item 554Isogen message 552ladders 420members,structural 400plates 427production iso 556Quick Iso 555railings 413stairs 417structural grids 395structural members 400

customized views 501customizing

pipe supports 491reports 20the drawing and modeling

environment 7cutting

members 404structural members 404

D

Data Manager 606about 282creating a customized view for

P&ID 53creating a customized view for Plant

3D 150customized views 501data table

filtering data 512ordering columns 517sorting data 516

data views 499, 501Current Drawing data view 500Project Reports data view 500

editing data 507exporting data 522

active node and childnodes 522

610 | Index

modifying data using Excel 528naming exported files 524read-only exported data 529understand read-only exported

data 529viewing exported data 523

exporting reports 538exporting to PCF (Piping Component

Format) 527importing data

accept or reject changes onimport 530

import settings 530importing CSV files 541importing modified acquisition

properties 531importing to tree nodes 529

printing data and reports 548reports

accepting and rejecting changeson import 545

report types 534viewing pending changes on

import 545viewing report logs 547viewing reports 536

tree viewfiltering data 511working with nodes 501

viewing acquisition propertydata 520

viewing read-only data 520zooming to Plant 3D objects 505

definingpart properties for equipment 369,

375, 383detaching

graphics from equipment 390DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e.

V.) 5DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e.

V.) standards 297displaying

pipe insulation 479dockable windows, controlling display

of 293

docking windows 293drawing behavior settings

in P&ID 32in Plant 3D 140

drawing filesadding to projects 300creating 300

drawing propertiesconfiguring 17

drawing status, refreshing 260drawings

adding equipment to 302adding existing to projects 244adding lines to 322adding new to projects 245adding nozzles to 305adding read-only to projects 244adding status notes for 258adding title block information 255adding to folders 248adding work history to 259changing order in tree 248checking status of 253grouping in folders 246including xrefs (referenced

drawings) 242linking or copying 243linking or copying with xrefs 243numbering 250opening 255organizing in projects 239previewing 254–255printing 264refreshing status of 254removing from projects 245saving all in project 261setting properties 249–250sharing 264tracking work history of 261transmitting 264viewing read-only 255viewing work history for 259

DWFP&ID 606

DWF filesoutput settings 266

Index | 611

publishing 266publishing options 268

E

edge cuttingmembers,structural 411structural members 411

editinggrids 395members,structural 401pipe 461structural grids 395structural members 401

equipmentadding data to 369, 375, 383adding nozzles to 369, 375, 383adding reserve space to 391adding to drawings 302assigning tags, elevation, and

descriptions to 369, 375attaching graphics to 389converting 3D objects to 383copying 389creating 369creating a template from 369, 375,

383creating and modifying 369creating by stacking shapes 375creating user-fabricated 375detaching graphics from 390modifying 387moving 388reorienting 388shapes and dimensions 375stacking shapes 369using existing patterns 369using parametric patterns 369

Equipment InfoTags 606equipment parameters 369, 375, 383equipment part properties

defining 369, 375, 383equipment templates

creating 369, 375, 383erasing 467

explodingobjects,structural 424structural trim objects 424

export and import settingsexternal data mapping for P&ID 40external data mapping for Plant

3D 140exporting

objects,structural 428P&ID drawings to AutoCAD 344PCF 559structural objects 428

extendingmembers 408structural members 408

F

fabricated equipmentcreating 375

family tables 606field

add field data 256create a title block 257insert a title block 257update a title block 257update field data 256

file locationsP&ID project data 51Plant 3D project data 148

fileslinking or copying 243

fittings 467flags 606flip grips 606floating windows 293flow arrows 606

adding to P&ID drawings 314folders

adding drawings to 248changing order in tree 248creating 247creating nested 248project drawings in 246removing 248renaming 248

612 | Index

footing settings,structural 425footings

creating 425specifying settings 425

freestanding annotations 606

G

gap crossings 607gaps

adding to P&ID drawings 314general instruments (bubbles)

adding to P&ID drawings 306graphics

attaching to equipment 389detaching from equipment 390

grids,structural 395grips 287

connection 327continuation 327, 438rotation 467substitution 461, 467

H

Helpabout 1organization 1

I

initialization only mode 607inline components 607

about 310end connections and 311open or closed state 311

inline instrumentsadding to a P&ID drawing 306

instruments 607adding to P&ID drawings 306piping 474

insulation 479International Organization for

Standardization (ISO) 5

ISA (Instrument Society of America)standards 297

ISA symbols license 4ISO (International Organization for

Standardization) standards 297ISO symbols license 5Isogen information item

creating 554Isogen message

creating 552isometric drawings

dimensions 158labels 161paths 154set up new type 157settings 153sloped lines 160title block area settings 166title block bill of materials 168title block layers settings 163title block settings 163

isometrics 607check 551final 552stress 551types 551

J

JIS symbols 6

K

KKS 607

L

ladder settings, structural 420ladders


layer and color assignmentsconfiguring automated schemes 171

lengtheningstructural members 403

Index | 613

line designation tableconfigure 156

line designation table (LDT) 607line model 393line numbers 434

selecting 466line settings, setting up 62lines

adding to drawings 322annotating 300connecting to components 327connecting to each other 327converting AutoCAD objects to 342define the directional flow of 329editing 330grouping behavior 328groups and segments 322placing 300setting up arrow behavior 82tagging 300, 335, 339To and From information 323understanding 297

linked annotations 607locking

pipe 465locking windows and toolbars 294loop crossings 607

M

mappingP&ID and 3D sizes 357

mapping Plant objects 182marking

nozzle locations to addmetadata 383

member settings, structural 398members

creating 400cutting 404edge cutting 411editing 401extending 408lengthening 403mitering 406restoring 412

trimming 408members,structural 398menus, shortcut 286migrating

P&ID drawings 582P&ID drawings and projects 575–

576P&ID projects 576, 587

migration (P&ID)projects 579

miteringmembers 406structural members 406

model representation,structural 393modifying

equipment 387pipe size 462pipe spec 462pipe supports 489

monitors, using dual 293moving

equipment 388nozzles 388

N

New Status dialog box 261nozzles

adding to drawings 305adding to equipment 369, 375, 383marking on a piece of

equipment 383moving 388

numbering drawings 250

O

object definition families 605object definition properties 606object definitions 605object snaps

pipe 448object tables 607objects

exploding 424exporting 428

614 | Index

off-page connectors 607about 138adding to P&ID drawings 314

openingprojects 254

options file long (OPL) 607OrthoCube

specifying an orthographic view 563orthogonal connections 607orthographic drawing

adding dimensions 572annotating 569copying to a project 568generating an orthographic

view 562linking to a project 568overview 561templates 562

orthographic viewcopying to another project 563saving 563

outline model 393override mode 608

P

P&ID drawingsadding instruments to 306migrating 582validating 591

P&ID drawings and projectsmigrating 575–576validating 591

P&ID drawings, exporting toAutoCAD 344

P&ID drawings, using with Plant 3D 349P&ID Line List 350P&ID projects

migrating 576, 587parameters for equipment 369, 375, 383paths

configure for P&ID 51configure for Plant 3D 148

patternscreating equipment from 369

pins 608

PIP (Process Industry Practices)standards 297

PIP symbols license 4pipe

adding 437aligning 447connecting 449connecting to nozzles 438connecting to xrefs 480connecting with object snaps 448connection type 468copying 482custom parts 474erasing 467fittings 467formatting line numbers 434insulation 479joints 468line numbers 434locking 465modifying 461modifying size 462modifying spec 462placeholder parts 474precision routing 448properties 462routing 445routing solutions 449selecting 466specs 431supports 485tagging 478valves 471

pipe supports 485, 608customizing 491modifying 489placing 486placing on sloped piping 493

placingcomponents 300lines 300

Plant 3D objectsset up class definitions for 193

platescreating 427

Index | 615

printingdrawings 264

Process Industry Practices (PIP) 4production iso

creating 556project data, changing 11project location 238Project Manager

about 253, 279previewing drawings in 255

project setupadding a new property 11changing details 11class definitions for Plant 3D 193configure line designation table 156configuring connectors 179configuring layer and color

assignments 171create new isometric drawing

type 157creating a customized view for the

Data Manager 150export and import settings for

P&ID 40export and import settings for Plant

3D 140isometric drawing paths 154isometric settings 153map P&ID and 3D piping

classes 182setting dimensions for

isometrics 158setting isometric labels 161setting isometric title block 163setting isometric title block

attributes 165setting isometric title block bill of

materials 168setting isometric title block drawing

area 166setting isometric title block

layers 163setting sloped lines formatting for

isometrics 160Project Setup wizard 8Project Status Manager 261

project.xml file 261projects

audit 271auditing 271compress 271compressing 271create new 8existing drawings in 244grouping drawings in folders 246how to audit 271link or copy files to 243location of 238new drawings in 245opening 253–254organizing drawings in 239organizing files in 246package and transmit 264pointing users to 238project.xml file 261read-only drawings in 244removing drawings from 245saving drawings 260setup process 239starting 241tracking progress of 261

propertiesconfiguring drawing 17pipe 462setting for drawings 249–250setting up for P&ID 86setting up for Plant 3D 197

Properties paletteabout 281

property acquisitionacquire and override modes 92, 202between signal line groups and pipe

line groups 93copy or move components with 92from multiple sources 93initialization only 92, 203rules 90, 202setting up 90, 201

616 | Index

Q

Quick Isocreating 555

Quick Properties panel 285

R

railing settings, structural 413railings


read-only drawingsadding to projects 244viewing 255

relief valvesadding to a P&ID drawing 306

removingfittings 467

reorientingequipment 388

reportsconfiguring 20templates 20

reserve spaceadding to equipment 391

resizing windows 293restoring

members,structural 412structural members 412

reviewingisometric results 558

ribbonabout 275ribbon tabs 275workspaces and 275

right-click menus. See shortcut menus

S

savingproject drawings 260

schematic lines 608selecting

pipe 466

selection listssetting up 101, 210

settingstructural model representation 393

setting up projects 239settings

footing 425ladder 420railing 413stair 417structural member 398

shape model 393shortcut menus 286size mapping 357sorting

work history for drawings 262spec breaks

adding to drawings 314Spec Viewer 283specialty item

piping 474specs

routing pipe 431spools 608stair settings, structural 417stairs


structural grids 395structural members 398

creating 400cutting 404edge cutting 411editing 401extending 408lengthening 403mitering 406restoring 412specifying settings 398trimming 408

structural model representation 393structural modeling in AutoCAD Plant

3D 393structural objects

exploding 424exporting 428

Index | 617

symbol listssetting up 101

symbol model 393symbol settings, setting up 62symbols

components and lines 297

T

tag formatssetting up 215

taggingcomponents 300, 335, 339lines 300, 335, 339

tagging prompt, setting up 62tags 608

assigning 335, 339default format templates 215default templates 114expressions 215for a pipe line group 114format expressions 114format levels 113formats 214–215setting formats for 112, 214setting prompt for in P&ID 62types of 336uniqueness 115, 216using acquiring properties 113, 215

templatescreating for equipment 369, 375,

383reports 20

tool palettesP&ID 284substitution 286

toolbarscontrolling display of 293locking 294

tooltips 289transmit,projects 264transmittal packages

setting up 265unpacking 266

transparent windows 293

trim 608trimming

members 408

V

validatinga 3D model against a P&ID

drawing 359addressing P&ID errors 594correcting mismatch errors between

a 3D model and a P&IDdrawing 362

P&ID drawings 591P&ID drawings and projects 591

validation 608valves 467

W

windowsauto-hiding 293controlling display of 293locking 294resizing 293transparent 293

work historyabout 292adding status and notes to 259displaying 262sorting 262viewing for drawings 259

Work History dialog box 261workspaces

about 273switching 274

X

xrefs 242linking or copying drawings

with 243xrefs (external references)

connecting to pipe 480

618 | Index

Autocad Plant 3d

Documents

autodesk inventor

trademarks of autodesk

autodesk streamline

autodesk mapguide

autodesk intent

autodesk technology

international organization

standardization isoiso